JP2016049149A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which can easily check a state of the game machine.SOLUTION: There are provided: external power source dependence storage means which depends on an external power source; independence storage means which does not depend on the external power source; clocking means which can clock the current time of day; and storage control means which stores to the independence storage means error generation information that associates error information showing an error in the game machine with time clocked by the clocking means when the error has occurred.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 34-14

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing error detection.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine capable of detecting a predetermined error is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-113395 A

  However, in the gaming machine, after a predetermined error occurs and the power is turned off, the error cannot be recognized and the state of the gaming machine may not be easily confirmed.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can easily check the state of the gaming machine.

  SUMMARY An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to solve at least a part of the problems described above, and the invention can be implemented as the following application examples. Note that the reference numerals in parentheses and supplementary explanations in this column show the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to help understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention at all. .

[Application Example 1]
A gaming machine,
External power supply dependent storage means (1103, 1153, etc.) that depend on an external power supply, independent storage means (1155) that does not depend on the external power supply, time measuring means (RTC1154) that can measure the current time, and the gaming machine Error occurrence information (error occurrence information 3499) in which error information indicating an error is associated with a time measured by the time measuring means and when the error occurs is stored in the independent storage means. And a storage control means (production control unit 1150).
[Application Example 2]
A gaming machine described in application example 1,
The gist of the present invention is to provide notification means (108) for notifying the error occurrence information stored by the storage control means.

  According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the state of the gaming machine can be easily confirmed.

1 is a schematic front view of a gaming machine 1. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 1 showing a state in which a glass frame 150 and an inner frame 170 are opened with respect to an outer frame 160. FIG. It is an enlarged view of the indicator 104 in FIGS. 1-1. 3 is a schematic diagram showing an internal structure of a specific region 109. FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating jackpot and a game state. It is a schematic diagram of the gaming machine arrangement system in which a plurality of gaming machines 1 are installed. FIG. 38 is a diagram for describing a flow of effects performed using the main liquid crystal display device 108. It is a screen figure which shows a mode that the special effect image currently displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 108 on a specific condition is reduced-displayed. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the flow of the music performance production performed with the game machine 1. FIG. It is a screen figure which shows an example of the notification effect performed using the sub liquid crystal display device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the music performance production in the all-music open state performed with the game machine 1 after all the new music is performed. 3 is a functional block diagram for explaining each control device of the gaming machine 1. FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the image sound control part 1160. FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the drawing process 1 which is a drawing process at the time of normal production mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the drawing process 2 which is the drawing process in special effect mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the drawing process 3 and the drawing process 4 which are the drawing processes in special effect mode. It is a figure which shows the cup-shaped movable accessory 196 and the movable accessory drive part 1191. FIG. It is a figure which shows typically the operation | movement of the cup-shaped movable accessory 196, and the positional relationship of the position detection sensor 1157. FIG. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing executed in a main control unit 1100. 17 is a detailed flowchart of switch processing in S1605 of FIG. It is a detailed flowchart of the 1st start port switch process in S1701 of FIG. FIG. 18 is a detailed flowchart of a second start port switch process in S1705 of FIG. 17. It is a detailed flowchart of the gate switch process in S1710 of FIG. It is a detailed flowchart of the special symbol process in S3 of FIG. It is a detailed flowchart of the jackpot determination process in S2130 of FIG. It is a detailed flowchart of the process during stop in S2185 of FIG. It is a detailed flowchart of the normal symbol process in S1615 of FIG. It is a detailed flowchart of the electric tulip process in S1620 of FIG. 18 is a detailed flowchart of a specific area release control process in S1625 of FIG. 18 is a detailed flowchart of a specific area release control process in S1625 of FIG. FIG. 17 is a detailed flowchart of a special prize opening opening control process in S1630 of FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the opening pattern of the special winning opening 120, and the production | presentation in special game. FIG. 29 is a detailed flowchart of a long hit game control process in S2802 of FIG. 28. FIG. FIG. 29 is a detailed flowchart of a short hit game control process in S2806 of FIG. 28. FIG. 32 is a detailed flowchart of a game state setting process in S3045 of FIG. 30 and S3180 of FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing details of error detection processing performed by a CPU 1101 of a main control unit 1100. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of an abnormal winning error process performed by a CPU 1101 of the main control unit 1100. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the generation | occurrence | production conditions of an abnormal winning error. 5 is a flowchart showing the contents of a dish full error process performed by a CPU 1101 of the main control unit 1100. 10 is a flowchart showing details of door opening error processing performed by a CPU 1101 of the main control unit 1100. 5 is a flowchart showing the contents of payout state error processing performed by a CPU 1101 of the main control unit 1100. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the generation | occurrence | production condition of a payout state error. 5 is a flowchart showing details of a switch abnormality error process performed by a CPU 1101 of the main control unit 1100. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the generation conditions of a switch abnormality error. 5 is a flowchart showing the contents of magnetic detection error processing performed by a CPU 1101 of the main control unit 1100. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of a discharge error process performed by a CPU 1101 of the main control unit 1100. 5 is a flowchart showing the contents of radio wave detection error processing performed by a CPU 1101 of a main control unit 1100. 6 is a flowchart showing details of impact detection error processing performed by a CPU 1101 of the main control unit 1100. 10 is a flowchart showing details of an abnormal V winning error process performed by a CPU 1101 of the main control unit 1100. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing error occurrence information 3499 stored in FRAM (registered trademark) 1155. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed in the effect control unit 1150. 36 is a detailed flowchart of command reception processing in S3501 of FIG. 36 is a detailed flowchart of command reception processing in S3501 of FIG. 36 is a detailed flowchart of command reception processing in S3501 of FIG. 5 is a flowchart of retry processing performed by a CPU 1151. 10 is a flowchart of an apparatus abnormality detection process performed by a CPU 1151. It is a figure for demonstrating the movable accessory abnormality generation information 3698 and input device abnormality generation information 3699 memorize | stored in FRAM1155. 5 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of a control ROM 1244 of the image sound control unit 1160. FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing executed in the image sound control unit 1160. It is a detailed flowchart of the measurement process in S3805 of FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a performance management table. It is a detailed flowchart of the state control process in S3810 of FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a music performance performance permission state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a music performance performance order management table. It is a detailed flowchart of the notification effect control process in S3815 of FIG. FIG. 39 is a detailed flowchart of a performance announcement effect control process in S3820 of FIG. 38. FIG. 39 is a detailed flowchart of a performance announcement effect control process in S3820 of FIG. 38. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the start time of a performance notification effect, and the time which a long open round game requires. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the start time of a performance announcement production | presentation, and the time which a short hit game requires. It is a detailed flowchart of a music performance effect start process in S3825 of FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the production | presentation when it becomes the start time of a performance announcement production when the variation production accompanying the variation display of a special symbol is not performed in normal production mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the production | presentation when it becomes the start time of the performance announcement production | presentation which is a special production performed in the special production mode during the production of the fluctuation accompanying the change display of the special symbol in the normal production mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the timing chart of the symbol variation which is a variation production, a jackpot production, and a special production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an effect when the decoration design P22 is prepared in special effect mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display image at the time of transfering to the jackpot game state in normal production mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display image at the time of transfering to the jackpot game state in special effect mode. FIG. 39 is a detailed flowchart of a normal effect control process in S3830 of FIG. FIG. 39 is a detailed flowchart of a normal effect control process in S3830 of FIG. FIG. 39 is a detailed flowchart of a normal effect control process in S3830 of FIG. FIG. 39 is a detailed flowchart of a normal effect control process in S3830 of FIG. FIG. 39 is a detailed flowchart of a normal effect control process in S3830 of FIG. It is the schematic of a default table. It is the schematic of a new music A main table. It is the schematic of a new music B main table. It is the schematic of a new music C main table. It is the schematic of a new music D main table. It is the schematic of a new music E main table. It is the schematic of a new music L main table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the change of the image data used for drawing of a background image. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the change of the appearance rate of various background images. It is a detailed flowchart of a music performance effect end process in S3835 of FIG. FIG. 40 is a detailed flowchart of an image output control process in S3840 of FIG. 38. FIG. 40 is a detailed flowchart of an audio output control process in S3845 of FIG. 38. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the start time of a performance announcement production | presentation, and the change time of a special symbol. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of the state control process of S3810. It is the schematic of an all mode table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the screen structure in the jackpot game in the special production mode of other Embodiment 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the screen structure of the normal production mode and special production mode of other Embodiment 2. 1 is a schematic configuration diagram of a gaming system 7800. FIG. 7 is a block diagram of an information management device 7850. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the gaming machine login process in the login game mode of the gaming system 7800 of this embodiment. FIG. 45 is a diagram for describing game history information 8101 and jackpot game point information 8103 stored in the FRAM 1155 of the effect control unit 1150. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the log | history preservation | save process in the login game mode of the game system 7800 of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a game history information replacement process. It is a figure which shows the game point provision effect performed in the main liquid crystal display device. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect for jackpots. It is a figure which shows a jackpot non-winning alert | report effect. It is a figure explaining the alerting | reporting information of the generation | occurrence | production of the error or abnormality of the gaming machine. It is a figure explaining the taking-in to the information terminal of error or abnormality occurrence information of the gaming machine 1.

Hereinafter, a gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.
[Schematic configuration example of gaming machine 1]
A schematic configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1-1 and 1-2. FIG. 1-1 is a schematic front view of the gaming machine 1. In this embodiment, the gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine called a type 1 / type 2 mixed type. FIG. 1-2 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 1 showing a state in which the glass frame 150 and the inner frame 170 are opened with respect to the outer frame 160. As shown in FIG. 1A, the gaming machine 1 includes a gaming board 102 provided with a prize and a character relating to a determination, and a glass frame 150 surrounding the gaming board 102. The glass frame 150 supports a transparent glass plate arranged in parallel with the game board 102 at a predetermined interval. The glass board and the game board 102 form a game area 114 in which a game ball can flow down. Has been.

The gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 160 attached to an island facility of a game store, an inner frame 170 rotatably supported by the outer frame 160 on the front side of the outer frame 160, and a front side of the inner frame 170. The inner frame 170 and the glass frame 150 rotatably supported are provided. The gaming machine 1 also includes a door opening switch 1183. The door opening switch 1183 includes a glass frame opening switch 1183a and an inner frame opening switch 1183b (see FIG. 11). The glass frame opening switch 1183a is a switch that is disposed at a predetermined position of the glass frame 150 and detects that the glass frame 150 has been opened. The inner frame opening switch 1183b is a switch that is disposed at a predetermined position of the inner frame 170 and detects that the inner frame 170 has been opened.

  As shown in FIG. 1-2, the inner frame 170 is provided with main mechanisms and components constituting the gaming machine 1 and various boards described later, and a game area 114 in which game balls flow down is formed. A game board 102 is detachably provided. The game board 102 has a rail member (not shown) in which a game ball launched from below (the launching device 1134, see FIG. 11) rises along the surface of the game board 102 and forms a path toward the upper position of the game area 114. And a guide member (not shown) for guiding the raised game ball to the right side of the game area 114.

  An upper plate 128, a lower plate 129, a handle 130, a speaker 138, a frame lamp 141, an effect button 142 and an effect key 144 (hereinafter referred to as an effect button 142 and an effect key 144) are input to the glass frame 150 that is the front surface of the gaming machine 1. Etc.) (see FIG. 1-1).

  The gaming machine 1 is connected to a card lending unit (not shown) that is installed adjacent to the gaming machine 1, and a card (so-called prepaid card, membership card, etc.) owned by the player is inserted into the card lending unit. By operating a lending button (not shown) provided, a lending request signal corresponding to the operation is transmitted from the card lending unit to the gaming machine 1, and the gaming machine 1 that has received this lending request signal receives a payout control board described later. Thus, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 128, and the player starts playing using the game balls thus paid out.

  When the player grasps the handle 130 and rotates the dial 132 in the clockwise direction, the game balls stored in the upper plate 128 are guided to the launching device (not shown), and with a hitting force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 130. The game area 114 is fired. The game area 114 is provided with game nails, windmills, etc. (not shown), and the launched game balls are guided to an upper position in the game area 114, and are brought into contact with the game nails, windmills, etc. The player falls along the game board 102 while changing the moving direction. Note that the game ball is temporarily stopped when the player operates the stop button 134.

  Further, when the player operates the ball removal button 135 disposed close to the upper plate 128, a part of the lower surface of the upper plate 128 is opened, and the game balls accumulated on the upper plate 128 are disposed below the upper plate 128. Falls on the lower plate 129. Further, when the player operates the ball removal button 136, the game balls accumulated in the lower plate 129 fall into a box disposed below the lower plate 129.

  When the player performs a so-called “left strike” in which the handle 130 is rotated at a small rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively weak hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the left area in the game area 114. On the other hand, when the player performs a so-called “right strike” in which the handle 130 is rotated at a large rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively strong hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the right area in the game area 114.

  A first starting port 116, a second starting port 118, a normal winning port 122, and an electric tulip 117 are provided in the passing path of the left-handed game ball as a winning and determining role. In addition, in the passing path of the game ball that has been hit right, the second starting port 118, the big winning port 120, the two normal winning ports 122, the gate 112, the electric tulip 117, and the specific character are used as the prizes and determinations. A winning opening 190 and a blade member 189 are provided.

The game ball launched into the game area 114 can win any of the first start port 116, the second start port 118, the big winning port 120, and the normal winning port 122 in the process of flowing down along the game board 102. It is. A predetermined number of prize balls corresponding to the winning places are paid out to the upper plate 128. The game balls that have not won a prize are discharged from the game area 114 via the discharge port 124.

  The first start opening 116 as the first winning area is a start opening that is always open, and the second starting opening 118 as the second winning area is operated by the electric tulip 117 as a normal electric accessory. It is a starting port that is opened only when In the gaming machine 1, whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player when the game ball has won through the first start port 116 or when the game ball has won through the second start port 118 Is determined, and the determination result is displayed on the display 104 described later.

  In the following description, the determination that is executed on condition that a game ball wins the first start opening 116 is called “first special symbol determination”, and the game ball wins on the second start opening 118 is a condition. The determination to be executed is referred to as “second special symbol determination”, and these determinations are collectively referred to as “special symbol determination”.

  The special winning opening 120 is a special winning area that is opened according to the result of the special symbol determination. A plate for opening and closing the big prize opening 120 is provided at the opening of the big prize opening 120. The special winning opening 120 is normally closed by this plate. On the other hand, when a predetermined jackpot symbol indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot is stopped and displayed on the display 104, that is, when one kind of jackpot occurs, the above-mentioned plate is operated to win a big prize opening. A special game that opens 120 is executed. For this reason, the player can obtain more prize balls by making a right strike during the special game (during the big hit game) compared to when the special game is not being performed. When a predetermined small winning symbol indicating that the result of the second special symbol determination is a small bonus is stopped and displayed on the display device 104, a small member that activates a blade member 189, which will be described later, to open the specific winning opening 190. A winning game is executed. During this small win game, the V winning opening 392 (see FIG. 3) is temporarily opened, and a game ball wins the V winning opening 392 during this time, thereby generating two types of big wins. The big prize opening 120 is also opened when two types of big hits are generated.

  The electric tulip 117 is disposed close to the second start port 118 and has a pair of blade members. The electric tulip 117 can change its posture between a closed posture (see FIG. 1-1) in which the pair of blade members closes the second starting port 118 and an open posture (not shown) in which the second starting port 118 is opened. It is configured.

  As shown in FIG. 1-1, the second starting port 118 is normally closed by an electric tulip 117. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the gate 112, it is determined whether or not the second start port 118 is to be opened, although no prize ball is paid out. Here, when it is determined that the second starting port 118 is to be opened, the operation of returning to the closed posture after the pair of blade members of the electric tulip 117 has maintained the open posture for the specified time is performed a predetermined number of times. As described above, the second starting port 118 is in a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to win when the electric tulip 117 is not operated, whereas the game ball is easily won by operating the electric tulip 117. Become. In the following description, the determination executed on condition that a game ball is won at the gate 112 is referred to as “ordinary symbol determination”.

  The normal winning port 122 is always open like the first start port 116, and is a winning port through which a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out by winning a game ball. Unlike the first start opening 116 and the like, even if a game ball wins the normal winning opening 122, no determination is made.

On the back side of the game board 102, a radio wave sensor 1127 (FIG. 11) for detecting an electromagnetic wave having a predetermined electric field strength or more in a predetermined band, and a magnetic sensor 1 for detecting a magnetic force having a predetermined strength or more.
126 (FIG. 11) and an impact sensor 1128 (FIG. 11) for detecting an impact of a predetermined value or more. The positions of these sensors are, for example, the positions near various winning openings such as the first starting opening 116, the second starting opening 118, the big winning opening 120, the specific winning opening 190, and the center decoration provided on the game board surface. And the back side of various kinds of movable objects.

  On the right side of the main liquid crystal display device 108, a specific area 109 that is temporarily opened according to the result of the special symbol determination is provided. The specific area 109 will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

[Configuration Example of Display 104]
FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the display 104 in FIG. 1-1. The display 104 mainly displays information related to special symbol determination and normal symbol determination. As shown in FIG. 2, the first special symbol display 201, the second special symbol display 202, and the first special symbol display. The symbol holding display 203, the normal symbol display 205, the normal symbol holding display 206, and the game status display 204 are configured.

  When the first special symbol determination is performed, the first special symbol display 201 displays the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination after variably displaying the symbol, thereby displaying the first special symbol determination. The determination result is notified. The first special symbol display 201 has a jackpot symbol indicating that the result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit (1 type big hit), or a lost symbol indicating that the result of the first special symbol determination is a loss. Is stopped.

  When the second special symbol determination is performed, the second special symbol display unit 202 displays the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination after variably displaying the symbol, thereby displaying the second special symbol determination. The determination result is notified. The second special symbol display 202 has a jackpot symbol indicating that the result of the second special symbol determination is a big hit (1 type big hit), and a small hit indicating that the result of the second special symbol determination is a small hit A losing symbol indicating that the symbol or the result of the second special symbol determination is losing is stopped and displayed.

  By the way, when a game ball is newly won at the first start opening 116 during the symbol variation display related to the special symbol determination or during the special game, the first special symbol determination and the symbol variation display are immediately triggered by this winning. Can not be executed. Therefore, the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured so that the right of the first special symbol determination is suspended when the first special symbol determination cannot be immediately executed even if a game ball wins the first starting port 116. It is configured. The first special symbol hold display 203 displays the number of hold of the first special symbol determination held in this way.

  In the gaming machine 1, even if a game ball wins the second starting port 118, the second special symbol determination and the symbol variation display cannot be executed immediately, that is, during the symbol variation display related to the special symbol determination or special When a game ball is newly won at the second starting port 118 during the game, the second special symbol determination is not executed, and the right of the second special symbol determination is not held. For this reason, the display device 104 is not provided with a display device that displays the number of reserved second symbol determinations.

When the normal symbol determination is performed, the normal symbol display 205 notifies the determination result of the normal symbol determination by suspending and displaying the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the normal symbol determination after variably displaying the symbol. Note that the normal symbol determination and the symbol variation display related to the normal symbol determination cannot be immediately executed even if the game ball passes through the gate 112, such as during the symbol variation display on the normal symbol display 205, for example. Judgment rights are withheld. The normal symbol hold display unit 206 displays the number of hold for normal symbol determination held in this way. The gaming state display 204 displays the gaming state at the time when the gaming machine 1 is powered on. The gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be described in detail later based on FIG.
In the following description, the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 201 or the second special symbol display 202 is referred to as “special symbol”, and the symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 205 is “normal symbol”. Shall be called.

[Configuration Example of Specific Area 109]
FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the specific region 109. The specific area 109 is an area where a game ball is opened so as to be able to enter when a small hit occurs, and a blade member 189 that opens and closes the specific winning port 190 is provided in the specific winning port 190 that is the entrance. Yes.

  In the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the jackpot symbol indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is “big hit” is stopped and displayed as the determination symbol on the first special symbol display 201 or the second special symbol display 202. The first special game is executed with one type of big hit.

In the present embodiment, as the first special game, two types of special games, a long winning game and a short winning game, are provided.
The long winning game is a state in which the grand prize opening 120 is opened until a predetermined condition (for example, nine game balls are awarded to the big prize opening 120 or 29 seconds have passed since the grand prize opening 120 is opened). The long open round game that closes the special winning opening 120 after the maintenance is executed a predetermined number of times. In the present embodiment, two types of long games for long-open round games, that is, 8R long games that are executed 4 times, and 7R long games that are executed 7 times long-open round games are played as long-games per 1 type big hit. A winning game is provided. In the long open round game, as long as a plurality of game balls can enter the long winning opening 120, the big winning opening 120 is opened and closed with an opening pattern different from the opening pattern exemplified in the present embodiment. You may do.

  The short win game is a short-opening round game in which the big prize opening 120 is closed after the big prize opening 120 is kept open until a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) elapses after the big prize opening 120 is opened. Is a 15R short game that executes a specified number of times (for example, 15 times). The prescribed number of times is not limited to 15 as long as it is plural. In addition, in the short open round game, if the game ball opens the short winning hole 120 so that it is difficult to enter the game, it opens and closes the large winning port 120 with an opening pattern different from the opening pattern exemplified in the present embodiment. It may be.

  On the other hand, when a small hit symbol indicating that the result of the second special symbol determination is “small hit” is stopped and displayed as the determination symbol on the second special symbol display 202, the blade member 189 is operated to operate the specific region 109. A small hit game that releases is executed. In this small hit game, the operation of the blade member 189 that closes the specific area 109 after maintaining the open state of the specific area 109 until a predetermined time (for example, 3.2 seconds) elapses after the specific area 109 is opened. It is executed a prescribed number of times (for example, once). As described above, when a small hit occurs, the game ball can enter the specific area 109.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the specific region 109 is provided with a guide member 391, a V winning opening 392, a lose winning opening 393, and a slide member 394. The guide member 391 guides the game ball that has entered the specific area 109 from the specific winning opening 190 to the V winning opening 392 or the lose winning opening 393. When a game ball is won in the V winning opening 392 or the lose winning opening 393, a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out. The lose prize winning opening 393 is always open, whereas the V winning opening 392 is normally closed by the slide member 394 and is opened only for a predetermined period after the specific winning opening 190 is opened. Specifically, in the present embodiment, for example, 0.5 seconds after the specific winning opening 190 is opened, the slide member 394 slides to open the V winning opening 392, and 0.2 from the opening of the V winning opening 392. When the second elapses, the slide member 394 returns to the original position shown in FIG. 3 and the V winning opening 392 is closed.

Then, when a game ball wins (V winning) at the V winning opening 392 during the opening period of the V winning opening 392, two kinds of big wins are generated, and the second special game including the already played small winning game is executed. The That is, when two types of big hits occur, the long hit game is executed following the small hit game. Specifically, following the small hit game that opens the specific area 109 for 3.2 seconds, a long win game consisting of seven long open round games that open the long winning opening 120 long, or the big winning opening 120 A long hit game consisting of 14 long open round games that are long open is executed. That is, a total of 8R including a small hit game of 1 time / minute and a long open round game of 7 times / minute
A total of 15R special games including one special game per minute and a small open round game of 14 times / minute are executed.

  As described above, in the special game based on the 1st type jackpot, the first special game composed of the round game in which only the winning prize opening 120 is opened, whereas in the special game based on the 2nd type jackpot, the specific area 109 is opened. A second special game composed of a small hit game and a round game that opens the big prize opening 120 is executed. Note that if the game ball does not win the V winning opening 392 during the opening period of the V winning opening 392, the big winning opening 120 will not be opened following the small hit game, so the second special game is small. It will end with 1R of only winning games.

  In this embodiment, the case where the V winning opening 392 is opened and closed by the slide member 394 will be described. However, the V winning opening 392 is opened and closed by a blade member that rotates about the depth direction of the gaming machine 1 as an axial direction. May be. In addition, the operation pattern of the blade member 189 during one small hit game (time and number of times of opening the specific winning opening 190) and the like can be appropriately changed.

[Description of changes in gaming state]
Next, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot and the gaming state. As shown in FIG. 4, the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is controlled in the “normal gaming state” or “time-saving gaming state”.

  The “normal game state” is a normal game state in which a so-called electric chew support function is not given. Specifically, in the “normal game state”, when the second start port 118 is opened, the rate determined in the normal symbol determination is set to a relatively low rate (for example, 1/12), and the variation time of the normal symbol is set. A relatively long time (for example, 25 seconds) is set, and when it is determined that the second starting port 118 is to be opened, the opening time of the second starting port 118 is relatively short (for example, 0.1 second × 1). Game state set to (times).

  The “time saving gaming state” is a gaming state to which an electric chew support function is provided. In the “short-time gaming state”, specifically, when the second start port 118 is opened, the rate determined in the normal symbol determination is set to a relatively high rate (for example, 12/12), and the variation time of the normal symbol is set. A relatively short time (for example, 2 seconds) is set, and when it is determined that the second start port 118 is to be opened, the opening time of the second start port 118 is relatively long (for example, 0.3 seconds × 5). Game state set to (times). That is, the “short-time gaming state” is a gaming state in which the second starting port 118 is easily controlled to be in an open state as compared to the normal gaming state.

Due to the board configuration of the game board 102, the game ball launched into the left area of the game area 114 can win the first starting port 116, whereas the game ball launched into the right area of the game area 114 is the first. There will be no winning in 1 start opening 116. Further, the second start port 118 is unlikely to be in an open state when in the “normal game state”. For this reason, there is no merit of making a right strike in the “normal game state”. As described above, the “normal game state” is a left-side advantageous state in which it is easier to hit a jackpot than hitting a game ball in the left area of the game area 114 than in the right area. Left-handed is performed in accordance with a message displayed on 108 and voice guidance output from the speaker 138.

  When the player makes a left strike in the “normal game state” and the game ball launched into the left area of the game area 114 wins the first start opening 116, the first special symbol determination is performed, and the first special symbol is determined. After the special symbol is variably displayed on the symbol display 201, the determination symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. Here, if it is determined that the first special symbol is determined to be one type of big win, the first special symbol indicating the fact is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 201, and the first special game that opens the big prize opening 120 is performed. Executed. The gaming state is set at the end of the first special game according to the type of jackpot symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 201 at the start of the first special game. In the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 4, the “normal game state” is continued at a rate of 50% after the first special game is finished, while the remaining 50% is changed from “normal game state” to “ The gaming state changes to “short-time gaming state”.

  In the present embodiment, after the first special game is completed, the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, and as shown in FIG. 4, after the seven long open round games are performed as illustrated in FIG. There is a short per 7R when the normal gaming state is entered, and 50% of the one type large per 7R per short at this time. In addition, 15 times per 8R with a short time that will be in a short-time game state after four long open round games have been performed as per short time when the game will be controlled in the short-time game state after the end of the first special game. There are two types of short-acting short-term games that become short-time game states after the short-opening round game is completed, and 50% of the one-type game is one of these two types of short-timed games.

  When the gaming state shifts to the “short-time gaming state”, the second starting port 118 is likely to be in an open state as compared to the “normal gaming state”. In addition, since most of the results of the second special symbol determination executed on condition that a game ball wins the second start opening 118 is a small hit, two types of big hits are likely to occur. Thus, the “short-time gaming state” is a right-side advantageous state in which it is easier to hit the jackpot than hitting the game ball in the right region of the game region 114 than in the left region. The user makes a right turn in accordance with the message displayed on 108 and the voice guidance output from the speaker 138.

  When the player makes a right strike in the “short-time gaming state” and the game ball launched into the right area of the game area 114 passes through the gate 112, a normal symbol determination is performed. When it is determined that the second starting port 118 is opened when the normal symbol determination is performed in the “short-time gaming state”, the opening time of the second starting port 118 is longer than that in the “normal gaming state”. The game ball launched into the right area of the game area 114 easily wins the second starting port 118.

  In the “short-time gaming state”, when the special symbol is not variably displayed and the game ball is won at the second starting port 118 when the special game is not being performed, the second special symbol determination is performed and the second special symbol display is performed. After the special symbol is variably displayed on the container 202, the determination symbol indicating the result of the second special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. Here, when it is determined that a small winning is determined by the second special symbol determination, the small special symbol indicating that is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 202, and the specific area 109 and the V winning opening 392 are temporarily displayed. The small hit game to be opened is executed, and the game ball wins the V winning opening 392 during the small hit game, so that two kinds of big hits are made, and the second special game including the small hit game is executed. Then, the game state is set at the end of the second special game according to the type of the small hit symbol that is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 202 at the time of the small hit game. In the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 4, the “short-time gaming state” is continued at a rate of 70% after the second special game is completed, while the remaining 30% is “from the short-time gaming state” to “ It will be returned to the “normal gaming state”.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, one small hit game and seven long open times, as illustrated in FIG. 4, as a short hit when the game will be controlled in the normal game state after the end of the second special game. There is provided per short 8R when the normal game state is reached after the round game is performed, and 30% per two kinds of big is per short 8R at this time. In addition, after the second special game, the game will be controlled in the short-time game state. As the short-time game, after one small hit game and 14 long open round games are performed, There are 2 types per 8R with a short time after a small hit game and 7 long open round games per short time, and 70% per 2 types Is one of these two types of time savings.
In addition, although detailed explanation is omitted, even when the second special symbol determination (or first special symbol determination) is performed 100 times in the “short-time gaming state”, the gaming state is not The “normal game state” is returned from the “short-time game state”.

[Example of configuration of rendering means of gaming machine 1]
As shown in FIG. 1-1, on the game board 102 or the glass frame 150, a main liquid crystal display device 108, a sub liquid crystal display device 106, a logo accessory 107, a speaker 138, a frame lamp are provided to perform various effects. 141, a retractable 137, and a cup-shaped movable accessory 196 are provided. Since the cup-shaped movable accessory 196, the sub liquid crystal display device 106, and the logo accessory 107 are movable accessories, they are also collectively referred to as a movable accessory.

  When the retractable 137 enters a predetermined gaming state, as shown by arrows A and B in FIGS. 1 and 1-2, the retractable 137 is rotated by a predetermined angle as a frame gimmick so as to protrude forward by a retractable motor 1181 described later. Then it opens and closes. Further, a retractable lamp 139 made of LEDs is built in the retractable 137. The retractable lamp 139 rotates as a frame gimmick by a patrol motor 1182 to be described later for lighting for a predetermined time when the retractable 137 is opened. It is supposed to be.

  The main liquid crystal display device 108 is an image display device that displays effect images, and is provided at a position where it can be easily seen by the player. The main liquid crystal display device 108 has, for example, a decorative symbol for notifying the result of the special symbol determination, a character or item that performs a notice effect, point assignment at the time of a jackpot, which will be described later, and the first special symbol determination. An effect image including various display objects such as a hold display image indicating the image is displayed.

The sub liquid crystal display device 106 is an image display device that displays effect images, and is provided above the main liquid crystal display device 108. As the sub liquid crystal display device 106, a device having a display screen smaller than that of the main liquid crystal display device 108 is used.
In the present embodiment, a case where both the main liquid crystal display device 108 and the sub liquid crystal display device 106 are configured by a liquid crystal display device will be described. You may comprise by an image display apparatus.

  The logo accessory 107 is configured to be movable with respect to the sub liquid crystal display device 106. For the purpose of guiding the player's line of sight to the sub liquid crystal display device 106, a performance announcement effect is performed on the sub liquid crystal display device 106. Operates to vibrate prior to being touched.

  The speaker 138 outputs music, sound, sound effects, etc. so as to synchronize with the display effect performed on the main liquid crystal display device 108 or the sub liquid crystal display device 106, and performs the effect by sound. The frame lamp 141 produces an effect by light by changing a light emission color, a light emission pattern, and a light emission direction.

[Configuration example of operation means of gaming machine 1]
The glass frame 150 is provided with an effect button 142 and an effect key 144 as operation means operated by the player. The effect button 142 is a push button for inputting operation information when pressed by the player. The effect key 144 is a so-called cross key for instructing one of up, down, left and right directions. In the gaming machine 1, there may be an effect according to the operation information input from the effect button 142 or the effect key 144.

[Main features of production performed on the gaming machine 1]
Hereinafter, main features of effects performed in the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS.
FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a gaming machine arrangement system in which a plurality of gaming machines 1 are installed. As illustrated in FIG. 5, in the so-called pachinko hall, one island is configured by arranging a plurality of the above-described gaming machines 1 (for example, 20). Each gaming machine 1 installed on this island is electrically connected to the island power supply device 500 through a common island power supply line. Therefore, by turning on the island power supply device 500 with the individual power switch of each gaming machine 1 set to “ON”, a plurality of gaming machines 1 installed on one island are simultaneously activated. be able to. As will be described in detail later, the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is configured to be able to start the same production at the same time in all the gaming machines 1 installed on the same island using such an activation method. It has.

  FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the flow of effects performed using the main liquid crystal display device 108. Specifically, FIGS. 6A and 6D are diagrams showing screen configurations representing normal effects. FIG. 6B is a diagram illustrating a screen configuration representing a performance announcement effect which is a special effect. FIG. 6C is a diagram showing a screen configuration representing a music performance effect which is a special effect.

  The gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a normal production mode that is mainly a normal production mode such as a fluctuation production or a jackpot production executed in accordance with a variation display of a special symbol as a production mode related to the game. When the date and time are reached, a special production mode mainly including a special production different from the normal production is provided.

[Screen structure of normal production mode]
As shown in FIG. 6 (A), in the normal effect mode, the main liquid crystal display device 108 (display screen) is composed of elemental images such as the background P11, the decorative symbol P12, the holding ball display P13, the character P14, and the item P15. The game effect image to be played is displayed. And using this game effect image, the game effect performed sequentially with the effect time predetermined based on the progress of the game by the result of the lottery is performed. In this game effect, a jackpot notice that is a notice suggesting that the degree of expectation of the jackpot is high, a jackpot confirmation effect that suggests that the jackpot has been confirmed, and the like can be executed.

  The background P11 is formed over the entire screen. The background P11 constitutes a scene behind another element image, a frame of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 108, and the like. The decorative symbol P12, the reserved ball display P13, the character P14, the item P15, and the like are displayed over the background P11.

The decorative symbol P12 is composed of three symbols. For example, a single digit of “1” to “9” is variably displayed on each symbol. When the decorative symbol changes, for example, the numerical value of each symbol is cyclically forwarded from top to bottom, and a display that scrolls on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 108 is performed. And the numerical value of each symbol is fixed in the stop symbol, and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is presented by the combination of these numerical values. Usually, a stop symbol having three identical numbers is a symbol representing a hit. And the decoration design P12 of a game production | presentation decorates a number and displays the face image of the member of a singer group on a number. In the illustrated example, numbers are displayed for each symbol, but various symbols such as characters, symbols, and marks other than numbers may be displayed.
The holding ball display P13 is composed of, for example, four marks. Each mark is increased or decreased according to the number of holdings. For example, one mark is displayed if the number of holds is one, and four marks are displayed if the number of holds is four. Since the theme of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a singer group, the reserved ball display P13 of the game effect is configured by marks with a recording disk as a motif.

The character P14 operates on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 108 to provide information to the player. In the present embodiment, an image simulating a fan of a singer group is displayed as the character P14. Moreover, in this embodiment, the result of the preliminary determination process as a notice effect of a lottery result is displayed using the character P14 and the holding ball display P13, for example. For example, the character P14 operates so as to throw a heart. Further, under certain conditions, the thrown “heart” is caught by a specific mark constituting the holding ball display P13. In this way, the lottery result of the reserved ball of the specific mark displayed together with the “heart” suggests that there is a high possibility that it will be a big hit, for example.
The item P15 is an image displayed on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 108 under certain conditions. In this embodiment, for example, by making the item P15 appear, for example, the reliability of the jackpot of the lottery result in the current symbol variation is suggested.

[Screen structure of special production mode]
The special effects of this embodiment include a performance notification effect and a music performance effect performed after the performance notification effect. The performance announcement effect (for example, 1 minute) is performed prior to the music performance effect, for example, and the music performance effect is notified. The music performance production (for example, 5 minutes) is a singing stage where the singer group sings the music announced in the performance announcement production, for example. In addition, the musical performance performance includes the next performance announcement performance. This next performance announcement effect (for example, for 5 seconds) is performed, for example, after the end of the music performance effect, for the announcement of the next music performance effect. The next performance announcement effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 6 (B) and 6 (C), in the special effect mode, a game effect image composed of element images such as the background P21, the decorative symbol P22, and the reserved ball display P23 on the main liquid crystal display device 108. Is displayed. In the special effect mode, the game effect is performed using the game effect image. Further, the main liquid crystal display device 108 displays a special effect image which is special effect data composed of element images of the performance announcement effect image P47 and the music performance effect image P48. In the special effect mode, a special effect is performed using the special effect image.

  In the special effect mode, the main liquid crystal display device 108 includes an area for displaying the special effect image (hereinafter referred to as “upper area”) and an area for displaying the game effect image (hereinafter referred to as “lower area”). An area division screen in which the display screen area is divided is displayed. The upper region is a region where a special effect is performed, and the lower region is a region where a normal effect is performed. In the present embodiment, the area of the lower region A2 is made smaller than that of the upper region A1. In the special effect mode, as shown in FIG. 6 (B) and FIG. 6 (C), the special effect image is displayed in the upper area A1 and the game effect image is displayed in the lower area A2, respectively. The effect image and the game effect image are displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 108 at the same time.

The background P21 is formed over the entire screen as shown in FIGS. 6 (B) and 6 (C). The background P21 is displayed in each of the upper area A1 and the lower area A2, and constitutes a scene behind. The background P21 also constitutes an image that displays the boundary between the upper area A1 and the lower area A2 in the area division screen.
The decorative design P22 is displayed in the lower area A2, as shown in FIG. 6 (B). The decorative symbol P22 is displayed smaller than the decorative symbol P12 of the game effect. Further, the decorative symbol P22 in the special effect mode is simplified from the decorative symbol P12 of the game effect. In the present embodiment, the decorative design P22 is expressed by a dot display constituted by a plurality of dot sets. Thus, unlike the decoration pattern P12 in the normal effect mode, the decoration pattern P22 in the special effect mode is configured by a simple display that does not involve the decoration of numbers or the display of the character image.

  The reserved ball display P23 is displayed in the lower area A2, as shown in FIG. 6 (B). The reserved ball display P23 is displayed smaller than the reserved ball display P13 in the normal effect mode. Further, the reserved ball display P23 is more simplified than the reserved ball display P13 in the normal effect mode. For example, the reserved ball display P23 is configured by a simple circle that is not decorated unlike the reserved ball display P13 in the normal effect mode.

  In the present embodiment, the lower area A2 is set to have a smaller area than the upper area A1. Along with this, the display of the decorative pattern P22 and the reserved ball display P23 becomes relatively small. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the display of the decorative symbols P22 and the reserved ball display P23 is simplified without being complicated so that the player can easily recognize the decorative symbols P22 and the reserved ball display P23 displayed in a small size.

  In the special effect mode, display of the character P14 and the item P15 displayed in the normal effect mode is prohibited. In the special effect mode, the area of the lower area A2 is set smaller than that of the upper area A1. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a part of the element images constituting the game effect image displayed on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 108 in the normal effect mode based on the priority as to whether the information is important for the player. Only the information of is displayed.

  For example, the decoration symbol P22 or the like displays the result of the lottery in the game and is important information for the player. Further, the holding ball display P23 is information for informing the number of lotteries held and is considered to have high priority for the player. On the other hand, for example, the character P14 has a low priority as important information for the player when compared with the decorative pattern P22 that displays the lottery result itself. In the present embodiment, in this special effect, only the decorative symbol P22 and the reserved ball display P23 having higher priority among the game effect images are displayed.

The performance notification effect image P47 is a performance image of the performance notification effect in the special effect mode, as shown in FIG. 6B. The performance announcement effect image P47 is displayed in the upper area A1. The performance announcement effect image P47 displays the name of the song to be performed (“early winter memory” in the figure) and the remaining time (“48 seconds” in the example in the figure) until the performance announcement effect is started.
By performing the performance notification effect using the performance notification effect image P47, it is possible to know in advance that a special effect different from the game proceeding according to the result of the lottery is performed for the player who is playing the game. it can. In addition, in the gaming machine 1 in which no game is performed, it can be expected that a player is invited to the gaming machine 1 by the performance announcement effect.

  The music performance effect image P48 is an effect image of the music performance effect in the special effect mode, as shown in FIG. The music performance effect image P48 is displayed in the upper area A1. In the present embodiment, the music performance effect image P48 is an image configured by a singing stage by a singer group. Note that music is played from the speaker 138 (see FIG. 1-1) in synchronization with the display of the music performance effect image P48.

  In addition, in the lower right of the music performance effect image P48 in FIG. 6C, the remaining time until the music performance effect is always displayed is counted down, and the player can enjoy the music performance effect while enjoying the music performance effect. It is possible to recognize the remaining time until ending. The countdown display for 60 seconds displayed in this performance notification effect corresponds to a third remaining time notification (countdown notification) for prompting the player of the start time of the music performance effect.

  As described above, in the normal effect mode, a normal effect using the main liquid crystal display device 108, the speaker 138, the frame lamp 141, and the like is executed along with the game using the game ball as the game medium. Here, the normal effect includes both a variation effect associated with a special symbol variation display and a winning effect associated with a special game. Note that the image in the normal effect mode is displayed in the entire area in the present embodiment when only the normal effect is performed.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 1, a measurement process for measuring an elapsed time since the power is turned on is performed, and the music performance is performed after the first set time (about 59 minutes in the present embodiment) has passed since the power is turned on. Prior to the production (see FIG. 6C), a performance notification production is performed in which a musical performance performance is announced. This performance announcement effect is related to the performance of the music performance and the content of the performance. In this embodiment, the performance of the document video of the new song reproduced in the performance performance of the music is played back. In addition, in the performance announcement effect in the present embodiment, the remaining time until the music performance effect is started is displayed in a countdown manner (see FIG. 6B). In the present embodiment, this performance announcement effect image is displayed in the upper area A1, which is a part of the entire area. The countdown display of the remaining time until the performance of the music performance is started is also performed on the sub liquid crystal display device 106 (see FIG. 9C).

  In the present embodiment, the case where the performance announcement effect is realized by movie playback of a document video of a new song will be described. However, if the performance announcement effect is related to the music performance effect, for example, the music performance effect Other effects such as an effect of playing a movie of a scene prepared by a member who sings a new song in a dressing room may be used as an effect suggesting the contents of the action.

  Next, at the timing when the second set time (1 hour in the present embodiment) has passed since the power is turned on, a music performance effect (playing a new song movie in the present embodiment) is started to perform a new song as unperformed content. (See FIG. 6C). Unlike the performance announcement effect, this music performance effect is forcibly started when the second set time elapses after the power is turned on, regardless of the game situation using the game ball. For this reason, it is possible to simultaneously start a musical performance performance on these gaming machines 1 by simultaneously starting a plurality of gaming machines 1 installed on one island using the island power supply device 500. .

By the way, the performance announcement effect and the music performance effect, which are special effects performed in the special effect mode, are effects performed independently of the game using the game ball, but the performance announcement effect and the music performance effect are performed. Since the game using the game ball is continued while the game is in progress, it is necessary to make the normal performance for the game parallel to the performance announcement performance or the music performance performance. For this reason, in the gaming machine 1, the performance announcement effect and the music performance effect are performed using the upper area A1 from the start of the performance notification effect until the end of the subsequent music performance effect. A normal effect is performed using the lower area A2 of the display screen of the display device 108 (see FIGS. 6B and 6C).
As described above, the image of the music performance effect is displayed in the same upper area A1 as the image of the performance notification effect is displayed, whereas the image of the normal effect is displayed until the performance notification effect is started. While displayed in the entire area, after the performance announcement effect is started, it is displayed in the lower area A2 located below the upper area A1. In the present embodiment, in order to make the performance announcement effect and the music performance effect stand out, a decorative pattern or the like of the normal effect is displayed in dots in the lower area A2.
In the special effect mode, during the performance announcement effect or during the music performance effect, the jackpot notice and the jackpot finalizing effect specific to the special effect mode different from the normal effect mode are executed.

  When the musical performance performance is finished, the normal performance mode is entered, and the normal performance is performed using the lower area A2, and the normal performance is performed using the entire area (FIG. 6D). reference). In the normal performance in the normal performance mode after the music performance performance is performed, the performance based on the new song performed in the music performance performance is performed. That is, the production data related to the new song that was not used in the normal production before the start of the music performance production can be used when the music performance production is executed.

  The musical performance performance is not executed only when one hour has elapsed since the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on. In this embodiment, one hour after the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on. It is executed every time. That is, when an hour performance has elapsed since the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, for example, when the performance of a song performance of “early winter memory”, which is a new song A, is executed, the new song A, “early winter” No memory "performance performance. Also, the performance performance for one new song is continued for one week after the first performance performance of the new song is performed, and the performance performance of other new songs is performed every hour for the next week. . In the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, by repeating such processing, a musical performance performance is performed for all 12 new songs over a period of about three months, and each time the production data that can be used for the normal performance increases. Go.

  In the following description, the entire area on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 108 is simply referred to as “entire area”, and the upper area A1 on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 108 is simply referred to as “upper area A1”. The lower area A2 on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 108 is simply referred to as “lower area A2”.

  FIG. 7 is a screen diagram showing how the special effect image displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 108 is reduced and displayed under a specific condition. If the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the special symbol determination in the entire area between the start time of the performance announcement production and the start time of the music performance production, it is accompanied by the execution of the special symbol determination next to this special symbol determination. If the display mode of the normal effect is switched to the dot display in the lower area A2 when starting the variation display of the decorative symbols, it is possible to prevent the interest of the normal effect from being impaired. On the other hand, if the information necessary for the game using the game ball is not appropriately notified, the performance notification effect and the music performance effect may interfere with the game.

  For this reason, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 7A, when a big hit occurs during a performance announcement performance or a music performance performance and it is necessary to notify the player to make a right strike, The opening image that is the game effect image that is the normal effect data is displayed not in the dot display in the lower area A2, but in the entire area, and the music performance effect image P48 (or the performance announcement effect image P47) is superimposed on the opening image. It is supposed to be reduced in size.

  Further, as exemplified in FIG. 7B, for example, a round in which a “challenge chance” is performed, which is a big hit and an effect of whether or not to shorten the time during the performance announcement performance or the music performance performance. In this case, when it is necessary to notify the player that the “challenge chance” is to be performed, the challenge chance image that is the game effect image is displayed in the entire area instead of the dot display in the lower area A2. At the same time, the music performance effect image P48 (or the performance notification effect image P47) is reduced and displayed so as to be superimposed on the P48 challenge chance image.

In addition, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 7C, a round in which a jackpot is being made and an announcement is made that it is determined that the time-short state has been decided during the performance announcement performance or the music performance performance. In this case, when it is necessary to notify the player that the time reduction state has been determined, the time reduction state determination image, which is a game effect image, is displayed in the entire area instead of the dot display in the lower area A2. At the same time, the music performance effect image P48 (or the performance notification effect image P47) is reduced and displayed so as to be superimposed on the time reduction state determination image.
7A to 7C, the music performance effect remaining time until the music performance effect is ended is also counted down in the music performance effect image P48 displayed in a reduced scale.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a flow of music performance effects performed on the gaming machine 1. In addition, in order to show the flow of the musical performance performance in an easy-to-understand manner, FIG. 8 shows the time when the gaming machine 1 is turned on at 9:00 am. Further, for the convenience of explanation, illustration of a performance announcement effect executed prior to the music performance effect is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, when the gaming machine 1 is introduced into a pachinko hall on Saturday, 11/23, for example, a default normal performance is performed until one week has passed since the introduction. For example, two types of background images, a first default background image and a second default background image, are stored in advance as background images to be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 108 in a state where the music performance performance has never been performed. Until the first music performance effect of the “early winter memory” as the new song A is executed, either the first default background image or the second default background image is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 108.

  Then, on the Saturday of 11/30 when one week has passed since the gaming machine 1 was introduced into the pachinko hall, when 3 hours have passed since the gaming machine 1 was turned on, the new song A ( The performance of the first music performance of “Early Winter Memory”) is executed (see FIG. 8B). In FIG. 8 (B), since the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at 9:00 am, the first song performance performance of the new song A is performed at exactly noon, and then the song performance performance of the new song A is performed every hour thereafter. An example where is executed is shown.

  When the first music performance effect of the new song A is executed, the normal effect that mainly uses the image data related to the new song A is performed in the normal effect mode. In other words, taking the background image as an example, only two background images, the first default background image and the second default background image, could be used, but the image constituting the movie data of the new song A to be played in the music performance performance A new song A background image created in advance based on the data can be newly used. Since the new song A background image is set to have a higher selection rate than the first default background image and the second default background image for one week when the musical performance performance of the new song A is performed, the first default background image and the second default image It is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 108 at a higher rate than the default background image.

  Next, on the Saturday of 12/7, when one week has passed since the first performance performance of the new song A was executed, when three hours have passed since the game machine 1 was turned on, the new song was played in the special performance mode. The first musical performance performance of “Winter Vacation”, which is B, is executed (see FIG. 8C).

When the first music performance effect of “Winter Vacation”, which is the new song B, is executed, a normal effect that mainly uses image data related to the new song B is performed in the normal effect mode. In other words, the background image will be described as an example. Although the three default images of the first default background image, the second default background image, and the new song A background image can be used, the first default background image cannot be used. Instead, a new song B background image created in advance based on the image data constituting the movie data of the new song B to be reproduced in the music performance effect can be newly used. Since the new song B background image is set to have a higher selection rate than the second default background image and the new song A background image for one week when the performance of the new song B is performed, the second default background image and the new song A background are set. It is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 108 at a higher rate than the image.
In this way, the background images that can be used increase each time the first musical performance performance of each new song is executed, and the background image related to the latest new song is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 108 at the highest rate.

  Note that the music performance production schedule illustrated in FIG. 8 is an example, and the first music performance production of the new song A is performed on the first day of the introduction of the gaming machine 1 or the time interval at which the music performance production of the same new music is executed. Changes such as a time other than one hour or a non-constant time may be made.

  FIG. 9 is a screen diagram illustrating an example of a notification effect performed using the sub liquid crystal display device 106. For example, on the day before Saturday of 11/30 when the first music performance effect of the new song A is performed, as shown in FIG. 9A, a notification effect image P49 for notifying the remaining days until the first music performance effect date is displayed. A notification effect to be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 106 is executed. Further, for example, on the Saturday of 11/30 when the first song performance production of the new song A is performed, the first song performance production is performed today as illustrated in FIG. 9B until the first song performance production starts. A notification effect for causing the sub liquid crystal display device 106 to display the notification effect image P49 for notifying the user is executed. For example, when the remaining time until the start time of the performance performance of the new song A becomes less than a predetermined time, the remaining time is counted down on the sub liquid crystal display device 106 as illustrated in FIG. 9C. The notification effect is executed by the notification effect image P49 to be performed. Also, as illustrated in FIG. 9D, for example, when the first song performance effect of the new song A is finished, for example, a notice effect that notifies that the first song performance effect of the next new song B will be performed one week later. A notice effect for displaying the image P49 on the sub liquid crystal display device 106 is performed. As described above, in the sub liquid crystal display device 106, various notification effects relating to the music performance effect are executed.

  FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the music performance effect in the state where all songs are released, which is performed on the gaming machine 1 after all new songs are performed. As shown in FIG. 8D, when the first song performance performance of the twelfth new song L is performed, the music performance performance is performed every hour from 2/22 Saturday when one week has passed since that day. The types of new songs to be performed change sequentially (see FIG. 10). And as illustrated in FIGS. 10A to 10D, the music performance effect of the new song A is performed on 1/22 Saturday when 1 hour has passed since the power is turned on. The performance of the new song B is performed on 1/23 Sunday when 1 hour has passed since the power is turned on, and the performance of the new song C is performed on 1/24 Monday when 1 hour has passed since the power is turned on. As such, even during the same time period, the type of new song performed varies from day to day.

Therefore, from the first performance performance of the new song A until the completion of the one-week performance performance of the new song L, the performance performance of all the songs that could not be enjoyed without playing every week in one day. I can enjoy it. Also, from the new song A on Saturday, 2/22, when the performance of the music performance ends, the next performance announcement performance for the next performance performance (one hour later) will be part of the performance performance of the music. To be executed. The next performance announcement performance will be described with reference to FIG. 10A as an example. When the performance performance of the new song A is started at 10:00 and this performance performance performance ends, the performance performance of the new song B is continued next time. The next performance announcement production is performed to notify that the production will be performed. When the performance performance of the new song B is started at 11:00 and the performance performance of the new song C is finished, the next performance announcement performance is executed to notify that the performance performance of the new song C will be performed next time. In this way, the next performance announcement effect is executed.
In addition, since the type of new song to be performed varies depending on the day even in the same time zone, even players who can play only during a certain time zone can enjoy the performance performance of various types of new songs. .

[Configuration of control device of gaming machine 1]
FIG. 11 is a functional block diagram for explaining each control device of the gaming machine 1. In FIG. 11, “SW” is an abbreviation for “switch”.

  On the back side of the game board 102, a control device for controlling the operation of the gaming machine 1 is provided in addition to a ball tank for storing game balls to be paid out as prize balls. As illustrated in FIG. 11, the control device of the gaming machine 1 is based on a main control unit 1100 that controls execution of determination, command transmission processing to the effect control unit 1150, and the command received from the main control unit 1100. An effect control unit 1150 for overall control of effects, an image sound control unit 1160 for controlling effects by images and sounds, a lamp control unit 1170 for controlling effects by various lamps and logo accessories 107, and a game ball A payout control unit 1140 for controlling the payout of the game ball, and a launch control unit 1130 for controlling the launch of the game ball.

[Configuration of Main Control Unit 1100]
The main control unit 1100 includes a CPU 1101, a ROM 1102, a RAM 1103, and a RAM clear switch 1105. The CPU 1101 performs various arithmetic processes related to determination and the number of payout balls based on a program stored in the ROM 1102. The RAM 1103 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the CPU 1101 executes the program, or a work area for data processing.

  When the RAM clear switch 1105 is turned on in a predetermined manner when the gaming machine 1 is turned on (eg, turned on at the same time as turning on the gaming machine 1 and then turned on again), the RAM clear signal is sent to the main controller 1100. By outputting, the storage in the RAM 1103 is erased. Note that the main control unit 1100 may be provided with a RAM clear restriction button for preventing the game history from being erased by a third party in such a manner that only a related person can operate.

  The main control unit 1100 includes a first start port switch 1110, a second start port switch 1111, an electric tulip opening / closing unit 1112, a gate switch 1113, a big winning port switch 1114, a big winning port control unit 1115, a normal winning port switch 1116, Specific prize opening switch 1117, specific area opening / closing part 1118, V prize opening switch 1120, lose prize opening switch 1121, V prize opening opening / closing part 1122, display 104 (each display 201-206), magnetic sensor 1126, electric wave sensor 1127 A shock sensor 1128, a frame count switch 1123, a game information output terminal 1124, and a dish full switch 1125 are connected.

  The dish full tank switch 1125 is a switch for detecting that the lower dish 129 is filled with a game ball, and is a predetermined part of the lower dish 129 (a ball path that connects the upper dish 128 and the lower dish 129). Etc.). The frame count switch 1123 is a switch for counting game balls (safe balls) won in each winning device, that is, the start opening 116, 118, the big winning opening 120, and the normal winning opening 122, and is a glass. It is provided in the lower part of the back side of the frame 150. This frame count switch 1123 is a game ball detected by the frame count switch 1123 and the number of passing game balls detected by the winning switch when, for example, a winning switch for detecting winning of the winning device malfunctions due to fraud by radio waves. This is for detecting the abnormality by comparing the number of passages.

The first start port switch 1110 detects that a game ball has won the first start port 116 and outputs a detection signal to the main control unit 1100. The second start port switch 1111 detects that a game ball has won the second start port 118 and outputs a detection signal to the main control unit 1100. The electric tulip opening / closing unit 1112 opens and closes the second starting port 118 by operating an electric solenoid coupled to the pair of blade members of the electric tulip 117 so as to be able to transmit driving in response to a control signal from the main control unit 1100. To do. The gate switch 1113 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 112, and outputs a detection signal to the main control unit 1100. The big winning opening switch 1114 detects that a game ball has won the big winning opening 120 and outputs a detection signal to the main control unit 1100. In response to a control signal from the main control unit 1100, the special prize opening control unit 1115 opens and closes the special prize opening 120 by operating an electric solenoid coupled to a plate that closes the special prize opening 120 so as to be able to transmit driving. To do. The normal winning port switch 1116 detects that the game ball has won the normal winning port 122 and outputs a detection signal to the main control unit 1100.

  The specific winning opening switch 1117 detects that the game ball has won the specific winning opening 190 and outputs a detection signal to the main control unit 1100. The specific area opening / closing unit 1118 opens and closes the specific winning opening 190 by operating an electric solenoid coupled to the blade member 189 so as to be able to transmit driving in response to a control signal from the main control unit 1100. The V winning opening switch 1120 detects that a game ball has won the V winning opening 392 and outputs a detection signal to the main control unit 1100. The lose prize opening switch 1121 detects that the game ball has won the lose prize opening 393 and outputs a detection signal to the main control unit 1100. The V winning opening / closing unit 1122 opens and closes the V winning opening 392 by operating an electric solenoid coupled to the slide member 394 so as to be able to transmit driving.

  The CPU 1101 of the main control unit 1100 detects signals from the first start port switch 1110, the second start port switch 1111, the big winning port switch 1114, the normal winning port switch 1116, the V winning port switch 1120, or the lose prize port switch 1121. Is input, the payout control unit 1140 is instructed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the place where the game ball has won, and the number of prize balls to be paid out is determined based on information from the payout control unit 1140. to manage.

  The CPU 1101 acquires various random numbers as acquisition information at the timing when the detection signal from the first start port switch 1110 is input, and executes the first special symbol determination using the acquired random numbers. Further, the CPU 1101 acquires various random numbers as acquisition information at the timing when the detection signal from the second start port switch 1111 is input, and executes the second special symbol determination using the acquired random numbers. Then, when it is determined that the winning game is a big win, the special winning opening 120 is opened and closed via the special winning opening control unit 1115.

  When the CPU 1101 determines that the result of the second special symbol determination is a small hit, the CPU 1101 opens and closes the specific winning opening 190 by operating the blade member 189 via the specific area opening / closing unit 1118, and the V winning opening The V winning opening 392 is opened and closed by operating the slide member 394 via the opening and closing part 1122. Then, when a game ball wins the V winning opening 392 while the slide member 394 is operating, the big winning opening 120 is opened and closed via the big winning opening control unit 1115 in the same manner as the case where it is determined that it is a big win.

  The CPU 1101 acquires a random number at the timing when the detection signal from the gate switch 1113 is input, and executes normal symbol determination using the acquired random number. When it is determined that the second start port 118 is to be opened, the second start port 118 is temporarily opened by operating the electric tulip 117 via the electric tulip opening / closing part 1112.

  CPU1101 makes each display 201-206 which comprises the display 104 perform the process mentioned above based on FIG.

  The CPU 1101 confirms the detection status of game balls in the first start port switch 1110, the second start port switch 1111, the big winning port switch 1114, the normal winning port switch 1116, and the specific winning port switch 1117. An error detection process described later is executed by determining that an illegal winning has occurred when more than a few gaming balls are detected or when a gaming ball is detected at a closed winning opening.

  The CPU 1101 executes an error detection process described later according to the status of the magnetic sensor 1126, the radio wave sensor 1127, and the impact sensor 1128 described above.

[Configuration of Payout Control Unit 1140]
The payout control unit 1140 includes a drive motor that sends out a prize ball from a ball tank provided on the back side of the game board 102 to the upper plate 128. The payout control unit 1140 performs payout control of game balls. The payout control unit 1140 is connected to the main control unit 400 and is also connected to a card unit (not shown) via a ball rental connection board or the like. Also, the payout control unit 1140 is connected to the main control unit 1100 and the card unit (ball lending connection board) so as to be able to communicate bidirectionally.

In addition, on the input side of the payout control unit 1140, a ballless switch 1145 for detecting that there is no game ball payout from the counter case incorporating the payout control unit 1140 (deficient) is paid out from the counter case. A payout ball counting switch 1146 for counting the number of game balls, a rotor rotation switch 1147 for detecting the rotation of the rotor of a payout motor (not shown), a glass frame opening switch 1183a for detecting that the glass frame 150 is opened, An inner frame opening switch 1183b for detecting that the inner frame 170 is opened is connected.
The various input switches described above are connected to the input side of the payout control unit 1140 via an input interface IC (not shown), like the main control unit 1100. This interface IC is provided with an abnormality detection processing circuit for detecting an abnormality such as disconnection (not connected) or short circuit of the input switch. When such an abnormality occurs in the input switch, a switch abnormality detection signal is detected. Is output to the main control unit 1100 via the payout control unit 1140.

  Further, on the output side of the payout control unit 1140, a launch control unit 1130 and a payout driving unit 1144 for paying out a predetermined number of game balls based on a winning signal or a ball lending signal are connected. Thus, the detection signals output from the ballless switch 1145, the payout ball counting switch 1146, the glass frame opening switch 1183a, and the inner frame opening switch 1183b are input to the payout control unit 1140 and then from the payout control unit 1140 to the main. Input to the control unit 1100. Here, the detection signal input from the glass frame opening switch 1183a and the inner frame opening switch 1183b to the dispensing control unit 1140 is a single signal indicating that the door is opened from the dispensing control unit 1140, regardless of which of the two detection signals. It is output as a detection signal and input to the main control unit 1100. With this configuration, it is possible to simplify the system configuration and wiring for abnormality processing described later, thereby reducing costs.

  When the payout control unit 1140 receives a payout number designation command generated when a game ball wins a predetermined winning device from the main control unit 1100, a predetermined number of game balls according to the content of the payout number designation command are received. The payout drive unit 1144 is driven to pay out a predetermined game ball.

Also, the payout control unit 1140, after confirming the connection with a card unit (not shown), inputs a ball lending signal from the ball lending switch, while exchanging information with the card unit,
A control (ball lending control) for paying out a specified number of game balls is performed, and the payout driving unit 1144 is driven to pay out a predetermined game ball.

The launch control unit 1130 performs launch control of the game ball. In addition to the payout control unit 1140, the launch control unit 1130 is connected to a dial 132 and a stop button 134, and to the output side, a launch device 1134 is connected. The launch control unit 1130 performs arithmetic processing when performing various controls related to the launch device 1134.
The firing control unit 1130 receives a touch signal from a touch sensor (not shown) of the dial 132 and, based on a voltage supplied from a launch volume (not shown) of the dial 132, a launch solenoid (not shown) that configures the launch device 1134 Control to energize the ball feed solenoid.

  The touch sensor is provided inside the handle 130, and is configured by a capacitive proximity switch that utilizes a change in capacitance caused by the player touching the dial 132. When the touch sensor detects that the player has touched the dial 132, the touch sensor outputs a touch signal that permits energization of the firing solenoid to the firing control unit 1130. The firing control unit 1130 is configured to prevent the game ball from being fired in the game area 114 unless a touch signal is input from the touch sensor.

  The stop button 134 is a button that can stop the launch of the game ball even while the dial 132 is being rotated. The launch control unit 1130 outputs a launch device 1134 when a signal indicating that the stop button 1134 is pressed is output. The operation of the launching solenoid and the ball feeding solenoid is stopped, and the launch of the game ball is stopped.

[Configuration of Production Control Unit 1150]
The effect control unit 1150 includes a CPU 1151, a ROM 1152, a RAM 1153, an RTC (real time clock) 1154, and a FRAM (Ferroelectric Random Access Memory) 1155. The CPU 1151 performs a calculation process when controlling the presentation based on the program stored in the ROM 1152. The RAM 1153 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the CPU 1151 executes the program, or a work area for data processing.

  The RTC 1154 measures the current time (including date and day of the week). The RTC 1154 operates with this power when the power from the island power supply device 500 is supplied to the gaming machine 1, and to the gaming machine 1 when the power from the island power supply device 500 is not supplied to the gaming machine 1. Timekeeping operation is performed by electric power supplied from a backup power source including a built-in capacitor (not shown). For this reason, the RTC 1154 can count the current time even when the gaming machine 1 is not powered on.

  Note that a built-in battery may be provided in place of the backup power supply, and the RTC 1154 may be operated by power supplied from the built-in battery. By replacing the built-in battery, it is possible to increase the discharge capacity that can be stored compared to the backup power supply. Therefore, the RTC 1154 can maintain a sufficient life even with the built-in battery alone. Even in this case, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is supplied, the RTC 1154 performs a measurement operation with the power supplied from the island power supply device 500, and when the power of the pachinko machine is not supplied, By performing the measurement operation with the built-in battery, it is possible to extend the life compared to the case where only the built-in battery is used as the measurement operation power supply, and the gaming machine 1 while the power is supplied to the gaming machine 1. Since the measurement operation is more stable than when the power is not supplied to the power source, the time deviation is reduced.

  As will be described in detail later, the overall CPU 1241 (see FIG. 12) of the image sound control unit 1160 obtains information indicating the current time (hereinafter referred to as “RTC information”) from the RTC 1154, and performs the above-described performance announcement effect or Control the performance of music.

  The CPU 1151 of the effect control unit 1150 sets the effect contents of the normal effect based on the game information related to the special symbol determination, the normal symbol determination, the special game, and the like transmitted from the main control unit 1100. In that case, the input of the operation information from the production | presentation button 142 or the production | generation key 144 is received, and the production | generation content according to the operation information may be set. In addition, the CPU 1151 transmits a command instructing execution of the effect of the set effect content to the image sound control unit 1160 and the lamp control unit 1170. In the present embodiment, the setting of the content of the performance notification effect and the music performance effect described above is performed not by the effect control unit 1150 but by the image sound control unit 1160.

  The FRAM 1155 is a ferroelectric nonvolatile memory. The FRAM 1155 stores data generated by error detection processing, retry processing, input device abnormality detection processing, game history information replacement processing, and the like, which will be described later (see FIGS. 34-14, 36-6, and 81).

  The effect control unit 1150 receives an effect button 142, an effect key 144, and a position detection sensor 1157. When the effect control unit 1150 receives a predetermined input signal from the input device 145 (the effect button 142 and the effect key 144) by the player's operation, the image sound control unit 1160 and the lamp are based on the input signal. The controller 1170 is controlled to execute a predetermined effect or the like. Further, the effect control unit 1150 performs abnormality determination based on an input signal from the position detection sensor 1157 in a retry process (FIG. 36-4) described later. Furthermore, the effect control unit 1150 performs an abnormality determination based on an input signal from the effect button 142 or the effect key 144 in an input device abnormality detection process (FIG. 36-5) described later.

[Configuration of Lamp Control Unit 1170]
The lamp control unit 1170 includes a CPU 1171, a ROM 1172, and a RAM 1173. The lamp control unit 1170 is connected to an effect control unit 1150 on the input side, and on the output side is a lighting device such as a frame lamp 141 and a patrol lamp 139, a movable accessory driving unit 1191, a retractable motor 1181, a patrol lamp motor 482, and the like. Are connected, and on the basis of a command sent from the effect control unit 1150, various devices / devices connected to the output side are controlled according to the effect contents set by the effect control unit 1150.

  The movable accessory driving unit 1191 drives and controls the logo accessory 107, the sub liquid crystal display device 106, and the cup-shaped movable accessory 196. In the present embodiment, the drive control of the cup-shaped movable accessory 196 among the three movable combinations controlled by the movable accessory drive unit 1191 is described in detail with reference to FIGS. 15-1 to 15-3 described later. Give a simple explanation.

The lamp control unit 1170 performs lighting control by lighting the LEDs such as the frame lamp 141 and the patrol lamp 139. The lamp control unit 1170 controls the energization of the movable accessory driving unit 1191 including an electric solenoid, a motor, and the like, and uses the sub liquid crystal display device 106, the logo accessory 107, the cup-shaped movable accessory 196, and the like. Perform the production.
The lamp control unit 1170 controls energization of the retractable motor 1181 and the patrol motor 482 to control the opening and closing of the retractable 137, and rotates the patrol lamp 139 when the retractable 137 is opened.

The CPU 1171 performs arithmetic processing when controlling the lighting device, the driving device, and the like. The ROM 1172 is a program executed by the CPU 1171 and various data (lighting / flashing pattern data and light emission color pattern data (light emission pattern data) of the lighting equipment corresponding to the effect content set by the effect control unit 450), and driving. Device operation pattern data) and the like are stored. The RAM 1173 is used as a working memory for the CPU 1171. The CPU 1171 selects and reads out the pattern data stored in the ROM 1172 corresponding to the command sent from the effect control unit 1150, and based on the read pattern data, the lighting device and the driving device are selected. Control by illuminance and operation.

[Configuration of Image Sound Control Unit 1160]
FIG. 12 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the image sound control unit 1160. The image sound control unit 1160 performs image display control of the main liquid crystal display device 108 and the sub liquid crystal display device 106 and audio output control from the speaker 138. The image sound control unit 1160 includes a general CPU 1241, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 1242, an sound DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 1243, a control ROM 1244, a control RAM 1245, a sound ROM 1246, an SDRAM 1247, and a VRAM 1249.

  The overall CPU 1241 stores image data stored in the CGROM 1248 with respect to the VDP 1242 based on programs and various tables stored in the control ROM 1244, commands received from the effect control unit 1150, and RTC information acquired from the RTC 1154. An instruction to display on the main liquid crystal display device 108 or the sub liquid crystal display device 106 is given. This instruction is mainly performed by outputting a display list.

  Here, the display list is composed of commands for instructing execution of drawing in frame units. The type of image to be drawn, the position (coordinates) to draw the image, display priority, display magnification, and rotation. It includes various parameters such as angle and transmittance. The processing for creating this display list will be described in detail later.

  The overall CPU 1241 also instructs the sound DSP 1243 to output the sound data stored in the sound ROM 1246 from the speaker 138.

The control ROM 1244 is configured by a mask ROM, and stores a control program for the overall CPU 1241, a display list generation program for generating a display list, various tables (see FIG. 37), and the like.
The control RAM 1245 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the general CPU 1241 executes the program, or a work area for data processing.

The CGROM 1248 stores effect data necessary for executing a normal effect, a performance notification effect, a music performance effect, a notification effect, and the like. The CGROM 1248 includes a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, and the like, and includes sprite data (one piece of image data) including a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels), and a plurality of pieces of image data. Compressed and stored movie data consisting of a collection of The pixel information is composed of color number information for specifying a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image. Further, the CGROM 1248 stores palette data or the like in which color number information for specifying a color number and display color information for actually displaying colors are associated with each other without being compressed.
In this CGROM 1248, music performance effect movie data and performance announcement effect movie data are individually stored for each new song as data for performing a song performance effect and a performance announcement effect.

The VDP 1242 identifies which new song performance announcement effect and music performance effect execution has been instructed based on the display list created by the general CPU 1241, and performs performance announcement movie data and song performance effect movie of the identified new song. Data is read from CGROM 1248 and reproduced.

  The CGROM 1248 stores normal effect data and special effect data as sprite data used for generating a normal effect image. The normal effect data is default data that can be used regardless of whether or not the music performance effect is performed, and image data of the first default background image and the second default background image corresponds to this. On the other hand, the special performance data is sprite data (for example, image data of a new song A background image and a new song B background image) that can be used only after the first performance of the music performance is performed. It is memorized individually. The special effect data is generated in advance by editing the image data constituting the music performance effect movie data.

  In the present embodiment, in order to increase the appearance rate of the normal effect using the newly available special effect data as much as possible, the normal effect using the normal effect data every time the usable special effect data increases. The display list creation table is switched every time the first song performance performance of a new song is performed so that the appearance rate of the normal performance using the normal performance data will eventually become zero, gradually decreasing the appearance rate of Selection is performed. This special selection will be described in detail later.

The VDP 1242 reads normal effect data or special effect data from the CGROM 1248 based on the display list created by the overall CPU 1241, and executes a drawing process for performing the normal effect. Since the special performance data is not read when the first music performance performance has never been performed, a drawing process using the normal performance data is performed. For example, a default background image is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 108. Is displayed. On the other hand, for example, when the initial performance performance of the new song A is performed, the special performance data for the new song A is read, and the drawing process using the special performance data is performed, for example, the background of the new song A An image is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 108. As described above, in the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the use restriction of the special effect data of the new song is released when the first song performance effect of the new song is executed.
Note that only a part of the image data stored in the CGROM 1248 may be compressed. As a method for compressing movie data, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

  The VRAM 1249 is configured by an SRAM capable of writing and reading image data at high speed, and includes a display list storage area 1291, a development storage area 1292, a full screen frame buffer 1293, a reduced image frame buffer 1294, a main liquid crystal display. And a sub liquid crystal frame buffer 1296.

The display list storage area 1291 temporarily stores the display list output from the overall CPU 1241. The expanded storage area 1292 stores image data expanded after being read from the CGROM 1248. The full screen frame buffer 1293 is a drawing frame buffer for drawing an image displayed in the entire area. The reduced image frame buffer 1294 includes a game effect image (see FIG. 7) reduced and displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 108, and a special effect image (performance announcement effect image P47 or music performance) displayed reduced on the main liquid crystal display device 108. This is a drawing frame buffer for drawing the effect image P48). The main liquid crystal frame buffer 1295 is a display frame buffer that temporarily stores image data transferred from the full-screen frame buffer 1293 (and the reduced image frame buffer 1294). The sub liquid crystal frame buffer 1296 is a frame buffer that is used for both drawing and display for drawing and displaying image data displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 106.

  The VDP 1242 expands the image data stored in a compressed state in the CGROM 1248 and stores the expanded image data in the expanded storage area 1292. The VDP 1242 performs a drawing process using the full screen frame buffer 1293, the reduced image frame buffer 1294, or the sub liquid crystal frame buffer 1296 based on the display list stored in the display list storage area 1291. The VDP 1242 generates an RGB signal as a video signal indicating the color of the image from the image data stored in the display frame buffer (the main liquid crystal frame buffer 1295 or the sub liquid crystal frame buffer 1296) in the VRAM 1249. The processed RGB signals are output to the main liquid crystal display device 108 or the sub liquid crystal display device 106.

  Connected to the acoustic DSP 1243 are an acoustic ROM 1246 for storing various acoustic data related to music, voice, sound effects, etc., and an SDRAM 1247 used as a work area for data processing by the acoustic DSP 1243. The acoustic DSP 1243 reads out acoustic data corresponding to an instruction from the overall CPU 1241 from the acoustic ROM 1246 to the SDRAM 1247, executes data processing, and outputs the acoustic data after the data processing to the speaker 138.

[Drawing processing of VDP 1242]
Next, a drawing process executed by the VDP 1242 and an image displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 108 or the sub liquid crystal display device 106 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13, 14-1, and 14-2.

  FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a drawing process 1 which is a drawing process in the normal performance mode. When the performance announcement effect and the music performance effect described above are not performed, the following drawing process 1 is executed in units of frames by the VDP 1242 based on the display list for the main liquid crystal stored in the display list storage area 1291. . That is, as illustrated in FIG. 13, the VDP 1242 includes, for example, a first image indicating a decorative symbol and a character, a second image as a background image indicating a background such as a decorative symbol, and a third image as a character image. Are read from the CGROM 1248 and stored in the expanded storage area 1292, and a game effect image obtained by synthesizing these images is drawn in the full-screen frame buffer 1293 using the Z buffer method or the like.

  Note that the reduced image frame buffer 1294 needs to reduce and display the game effect image under a specific condition during the performance announcement effect or the music performance effect, which is a special effect executed in the special effect mode, and When it is necessary to reduce and display the performance notification effect image P47 and the music performance effect image P48 under specific conditions during the performance by the game performance image, and during the performance of the performance announcement and music performance effects, the game When the effect image is displayed in the entire area and the performance announcement effect image P47 or the music performance effect image P48 needs to be displayed in a reduced size, it is a frame buffer used for the performance announcement effect or the music performance effect. It is not used when there is no normal performance mode.

  For this reason, in the normal performance mode in which the performance announcement performance or the music performance performance is not performed, the VDP 1242 transfers the game performance image drawn in the full screen frame buffer 1293 to the main liquid crystal frame buffer 1295, and has a predetermined display timing. Are output to the main liquid crystal display device 108 as RGB signals. While the image in the main liquid crystal frame buffer 1295 is being output to the main liquid crystal display device 108, the game effect image of the next frame is drawn in the full screen frame buffer 1293.

  Further, the VDP 1242 reads out a notification effect image related to the music performance effect from the CGROM 148 based on the display list for the sub liquid crystal stored in the display list storage region 1291 and stores it in the expanded storage region 1292. The character image indicating the remaining days until the date when the first performance performance is performed and the remaining time until the performance performance is started is synthesized and drawn in the sub-liquid crystal frame buffer 1296 using the Z buffer method or the like. . Then, the combined effect rendering effect image P49 is output to the sub liquid crystal display device 106 as an RGB signal at a predetermined display timing.

  In order to efficiently execute the drawing process, image data frequently used in the drawing process may be buffered in the expanded storage area 1292.

  FIG. 14A is an explanatory diagram for explaining a drawing process 2 which is a drawing process in the special effect mode. In the special effect mode, the performance announcement effect or the music performance effect described above is performed. Therefore, in this special effect mode, the following display is performed by the VDP 1242 on the basis of the display list for the main liquid crystal stored in the display list storage area 1291. Such a drawing process 2 is executed for each frame. That is, as shown in FIG. 14A, the VDP 1242 is, for example, a dot effect for displaying a pre-rendered special effect image (performance notification effect image P47 or music performance effect image P48) and a game effect image. The images are read from the CGROM 1248 and stored in the expanded storage area 1292, and these images are drawn together in the full-screen frame buffer 1293. At that time, the special effect image is drawn in the area corresponding to the upper area A1, and the dot effect image is drawn in the area corresponding to the lower area A2.

  Note that when the normal effect is performed by the dot effect image, the game effect image displayed in the entire area does not need to be displayed in a reduced size, and therefore the reduced image frame buffer 1294 is not used here.

  For this reason, when the performance announcement effect or the music performance effect is being performed, the VDP 1242 transfers the special effect image and the dot effect image drawn in the full-screen frame buffer 1293 to the main liquid crystal frame buffer 1295 for a predetermined display. The RGB signal is output to the main liquid crystal display device 108 at the timing. Then, while the image in the main liquid crystal frame buffer 1295 is being output to the main liquid crystal display device 108, the special effect image and the dot effect image of the next frame are drawn in the full screen frame buffer 1293.

  The VDPU 142 draws the notification effect image P49 in the sub liquid crystal frame buffer 1296 and outputs it to the sub liquid crystal display device 106 in the same manner as when the performance notification effect and the music performance effect are not performed. It should be noted that when a music performance effect is being performed using the main liquid crystal display device 108, a process of counting down the remaining time until the music performance effect is started is not necessarily required. Instead of P49, a rendering process for displaying on the sub liquid crystal display device 106 an effect image related to the music performance effect performed on the main liquid crystal display device 108 may be performed.

FIG. 14B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the drawing process 3 and the drawing process 4 which are drawing processes in the special effect mode. First, scenes using these drawing processes will be described.
As an example, when the jackpot is generated during the performance announcement performance or the music performance performance during the special performance mode and it is necessary to notify the player to make a right turn, the drawing process 4 described above is used. If notification that prompts the player to make a right strike is performed using the dot effect image, there is a high possibility that the notification that prompts the player to make a right strike is difficult to be transmitted. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent the occurrence of such a problem, for example, when it is necessary to perform notification for urging the player to make a right strike during a musical performance performance, a right-handed notification image that is a game effect image. Is displayed, and the music performance effect image P48 is reduced and superimposed on the right-handed notification image.

  As another example, during the special performance mode, a special performance is performed during the special performance mode, with a variation effect (normal performance) accompanied by a long special symbol variation display such as 2 minutes. If the variation effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol continues even after the announcement effect or the music performance effect is started, the game effect image is displayed before the change effect (normal effect) accompanying the change display of the special symbol is finished. Is switched to dot display, the interest of the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol which is the normal effect is lost.

  Therefore, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, it is conceivable that the entire area display of the game effect image is continued until the change effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol is finished. This causes another problem that the display of the performance announcement effect image P47 or the music performance effect image P48 is delayed (display starts from the intermediate image of the performance announcement effect image P47 or the music performance effect image P48). . Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent these problems from occurring, for example, the transition from the normal performance mode to the special performance mode, and the timing at which the performance announcement performance is started or the timing at which the music performance performance is started, If the change display has not ended yet, the special effect image (performance announcement effect image P47, music performance effect image P48) is reduced and superimposed on the game effect image, and after the special symbol change display ends, The music performance effect image P48 is displayed in the upper region A1, and the variable display (normal effect) using the dot effect image is started in the lower region A2. Details including other examples will be described later with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51.

  When the game effect image is reduced and displayed during the performance announcement effect or the music performance effect in the special effect mode described above, the following display is performed by the VDP 1242 based on the display list for the main liquid crystal stored in the display list storage area 1291. Such a drawing process 3 is executed for each frame. That is, as shown in FIG. 14B, as described above, the VDP 1242 draws the special effect image (the performance announcement effect image P47 or the music performance effect image P48) in the full screen frame buffer 1293. In addition, the VDP 1242 draws a reduced image obtained by scaling the game effect image including the first image, the second image, and the third image in the reduced image frame buffer 1294.

  Next, the VDP 1242 transfers the special effect image (the performance announcement effect image P47 or the music performance effect image P48) drawn in the full screen frame buffer 1293 to the main liquid crystal frame buffer 1295 and also to the reduced image frame buffer 1294. The drawn reduced image is transferred to the main liquid crystal frame buffer 1295. The VDP 1242 outputs the two images stored in the main liquid crystal frame buffer 1295 in this way to the main liquid crystal display device 108 as RGB signals at a predetermined display timing. In addition, a special effect image (a notification effect image or an effect image related to a music performance effect) is drawn on the sub liquid crystal frame buffer 1296 and output to the sub liquid crystal display device 106.

  In the present embodiment, when the game effect image is reduced and displayed during the special effect mode, the same game effect image as that displayed in the entire area is reduced and displayed in the lower left of the entire area. For this reason, in the lower left area of the full-screen frame buffer 1293, the normal effect is drawn so as to be reduced.

On the other hand, when shifting to the special effect mode during the above-described normal effect mode and displaying the special effect image (the performance announcement effect image P47 or the music performance effect image P48) in a reduced size, the main liquid crystal stored in the display list storage area 1291 is displayed. Based on the display list and the like, the following rendering process 4 is executed by the VDP 1242 in units of frames. That is,
As shown in FIG. 14B, the VDP 1242 renders the game effect image in the full-screen frame buffer 1293 as described above. The VDP 1242 draws a reduced image obtained by scaling the special effect image (the performance announcement effect image P47 or the music performance effect image P48) in the reduced image frame buffer 1294.

  Next, the VDP 1242 transfers the game effect image drawn in the full-screen frame buffer 1293 to the main liquid crystal frame buffer 1295, and also reduces the reduced image (performance announcement effect image P47 or music performance) drawn in the reduced image frame buffer 1294. The effect image P48) is transferred to the main liquid crystal frame buffer 1295. The VDP 1242 outputs the two images stored in the main liquid crystal frame buffer 1295 in this way to the main liquid crystal display device 108 as RGB signals at a predetermined display timing. In addition, a sub special effect image corresponding to each of the special effect images (the performance announcement effect image P47 or the music performance effect image P48) is drawn on the sub liquid crystal frame buffer 1296 and output to the sub liquid crystal display device 106.

In the present embodiment, when the special effect image (the performance announcement effect image P47 or the music performance effect image P48) is displayed in a reduced size, the same special effect image (the performance announcement effect image P47 or the same as that displayed in the entire area). The music performance effect image P48) is reduced and displayed at the lower left in the entire area. Therefore, the special effect image (the performance announcement effect image P47 or the music performance effect image P48) is drawn in the lower left area of the full screen frame buffer 1293 so as to be displayed in a reduced size.
Note that a frame buffer similar to the sub liquid crystal frame buffer 1296 may be separately provided to alternately switch between the drawing frame buffer and the display frame buffer.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the VDP 1242 performs drawing processing of two effect images displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 108 and the sub liquid crystal display device 106 will be described. However, the VDP and sub liquid crystal for the main liquid crystal display device 108 are described. A VDP for the display device 106 may be provided separately.

  In this embodiment, the case where the main liquid crystal display list and the sub liquid crystal display list are stored in the display list storage area 1291 will be described. However, in order to store these display lists individually, the display list storage is performed. Two regions may be provided.

[Power saving function]
Here, the power saving function of the gaming machine 1 will be described.
When the CPU 1151 of the effect control unit 1150 does not receive any command from the CPU 1101 for 180 seconds after transmitting a customer waiting effect start command to be described later, or when the operation of the effect button 142 or the effect key 144 is not detected. A power saving mode transition command for shifting the power consumption of the machine 1 from the normal power mode to the power saving mode for power saving is transmitted to the overall CPU 1241 of the image sound control unit 1160 and the CPU 1171 of the lamp control unit 1170.

Receiving this power saving mode transition command, the overall CPU 1241 of the image sound control unit 1160 reduces the luminance of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 5 by 50% from the luminance of the normal power mode, and the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 106 is Turn off the light. Then, the overall CPU 1241 instructs the VDP 1242 to draw an image dedicated to the power saving mode. In order to reduce power consumption as much as possible, the power-saving mode-dedicated images indicate that power is being saved and that the next song performance will be performed in the central area of the entire area, such as “Under power-saving performance until XX minutes XX seconds”. The remaining time until the start of the game is displayed with characters that are large enough to be recognized by the player who will play the game, and the area other than this character is displayed blank.

The overall CPU 1241 then instructs the audio DSP 1243 to set the speaker volume to 0. As a result, in the power saving mode, basically no sound is output.
Further, the CPU of the lamp control unit 1170 that has received the power saving mode transition command turns off all the light emitting elements. As a result, in the power saving mode, the light emitting element basically does not emit light.

  When shifting to the special effect mode and executing the special effect during the power saving mode, the overall CPU 1241 instructs the VDP 1242 to draw a blank image (displays nothing) and sets the volume of the speaker to the sound DSP 1243. An instruction is given to set 50% of the normal power mode. Therefore, when shifting to the special performance mode and executing the special performance during the power saving mode, sound output is performed at a volume reduced by 50% with respect to the normal power mode.

Then, the general CPU 1241 transmits a message indicating that the special control mode is to be transferred to the CPU 1151 of the effect control unit 1150, and the CPU 1151 that has received the notification transmits to the CPU of the lamp control unit 1170 that the control is being switched to the special effect mode. Thus, the CPU of the lamp control unit 1170 performs light emission output by the number of light emitting elements obtained by thinning out the number of light emitting elements used in the normal effect mode by 70%.
As described above, when the special effect mode is executed in the power saving mode, the special effect without using the liquid crystal display device 5 is executed. Note that the special effect in the power saving mode may be executed by only one of the audio output and the light emission output.

  Further, the power saving performance image may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5 when the special effect mode is executed during the power saving mode. In this case, the overall CPU 1241 instructs the VDP 1242 to draw a power saving performance image. This power-saving performance image can be recognized by the player who will play the game from now on until the start of the performance of the music performance, such as “XX seconds until the start of performance”, while the performance announcement performance is being performed in the central area of the entire area. While displaying in the size of the extent, the area other than this character is displayed blank. And during the performance of the music performance, it is said that the current performance of the music performance and the remaining time until the end of the performance of the music performance, such as “Now △△△ Until the end of the performance XX minutes”, The characters are displayed in a size that can be recognized by the player to perform, and the area other than the characters is displayed in blank. Also, in the all-track open state, which will be described later, when the performance of the music performance is completed, a game performance announcement that will be executed next time (1 hour later), such as “next time Δ △△ performance”, is performed. The characters are displayed in a size that can be recognized by the user, and the area other than the characters is displayed in a blank.

  In addition, when shifting to the special effect mode and executing the special effect during the power saving mode, the special effect in the normal power mode may be executed by shifting to the normal power mode.

Further, during execution of the special effect in the power saving mode, the special effect in the normal power mode may be executed by shifting to the normal power mode. In this case, for example, when the game is started while the special effect in the power saving mode is being executed, the game 110 is transmitted from the CPU 1101 in response to the winning of the game ball at the first start port 116 or the second start port 118. The CPU 1151 receives the change start command, and the CPU 1151 selects the content of the effect according to the change start command, and the CPU 1151 transmits a command instructing execution of the effect to the CPU of the overall CPU 1241 and the lamp control unit 1170. This is when control according to the command received by the CPU of the general CPU 1241 and the lamp control unit 1170 that has received the command is executed.
Further, for example, this is a case where the operation of the effect button 142 or the effect key 144 is detected. In this case, the CPU 1151 that detects the operation issues a command for instructing the overall CPU 1241 and the CPU 117111171 of the lamp control unit 1170 to execute the effect. It differs from the above in that the main CPU is not involved.

At the beginning of the special production, the customer waiting production was not yet in progress (the game was being performed), but after the special production started, the customer waiting production start command was received, and the special production was still in progress even after 180 seconds. When shifting to the power saving mode sometimes, at the time when 180 seconds have passed, the sound output is performed at a volume reduced by 50% with respect to the above-described normal power mode, and the light emitting element used in the normal performance mode The light emission output is performed by the number of light emitting elements obtained by thinning out the number of the light sources by 70%.
In this case as well, a special effect in the power saving mode may be executed by only one of the audio output and the light emission output, and the power saving performance image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5 as described above. You may do it.

  Also, at the start of the special production, the customer waiting production was not yet in progress (the game was being performed), but after the special production started, the customer waiting production start command was received, and the special production is still running even after 180 seconds. In the case of shifting to the power saving mode in such a case, the mode may be shifted to the power saving mode after completion of the special effect without shifting to the power saving mode when 180 seconds have elapsed.

The transition from the power saving mode to the normal power mode is performed when any command is received from the CPU 1101 or when an operation of the effect button 142 or the effect key 144 is detected.
When shifting from the power saving mode to the normal power mode, the CPU 1151 that has received any command transmitted from the CPU 1101 instructs the overall CPU 1241 and the CPU 11711171 of the lamp control unit 1170 to execute the effect. When a command is transmitted and the central CPU 1241 and the CPU of the lamp control unit 1170 receive this command, the transition from the power saving mode to the normal power mode is performed by each CPU.

  As an example of shifting from the power saving mode to the normal power mode, a game is started during the power saving mode, and a game ball is sent from the CPU 1101 in response to the winning of a game ball at the first start port 116 or the second start port 118. The CPU 1151 receives the changed start command, the CPU 1151 selects the effect content according to the change start command, and the CPU 1151 transmits a command instructing execution of the effect to the overall CPU 1241 and the CPU 1171 of the lamp control unit 1170, This is a time when the control according to the received command is executed by the central CPU 1241 that has received this command and the CPU 1171 of the lamp controller 1170. Further, for example, when the operation of the effect button 142 or the effect key 144 is detected, and when the operation of the effect button 142 or the effect key 144 is detected, the CPU 1151 that has detected the operation and the central CPU 1241 and the CPU 1171 of the lamp control unit 1170 are detected. Is different from the above in that a command instructing execution of an effect is transmitted to the main CPU and the main CPU is not involved.

  Since whether or not to operate the power saving mode depends on the judgment of the game hall side, a changeover switch for the game staff to set whether or not to operate the power saving mode on the back side of the gaming machine 1 The CPU 1151 determines the operation or non-operation of the power saving mode described above by detecting the state of the changeover switch. The place where the changeover switch is provided is not limited to this, and the changeover switch may be a physical switch or an electrical switch (for example, ON / OFF by operating the touch panel).

[Movement of the moving object]
The operation of the cup-shaped movable accessory 196 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15-1 and 15-2.
In the following description, the front, back, top, bottom, left and right directions are directions based on the player when the player plays a game on the gaming machine 1, and the side where the player is located is described as the front of the gaming machine 1. To do.

  FIG. 15A is a diagram illustrating the cup-shaped movable accessory 196 and the movable accessory driving unit 1191. Specifically, in FIG. 15A, the cup-shaped movable accessory 196 is driven and controlled by the movable accessory driving unit 1191 and moves upward (hereinafter also referred to as the advance position direction). The state arrange | positioned in the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 108 is shown. In FIG. 15-1 (B), the cup-shaped movable accessory 196 is driven and controlled by the movable accessory driving unit 1191 from the state of FIG. ) And returned to the home position (home position).

  The cup-shaped movable accessory 196 has two first decorative members 1501 and second decorative members 1502 that are characteristic in design, and these move together. In this embodiment, the 1st decoration member 1501 is the shape which imaged the cup, and the 2nd decoration member 1502 is the shape which imaged the base of the cup. The second decorative member 1502 is located on the front side (player side) of the first decorative member 1501 and is disposed so as to partially overlap the leg of the cup of the first decorative member 1501.

  The movable accessory driving unit 1191 supports the cup-shaped movable accessory 196 by a plurality of columnar link members. A first link member 1503 and a second link member 1504 are rotatably connected to the main body of the movable accessory driving unit 1191, and third ends are respectively connected to the distal ends of the first link member 1503 and the second link member 1504. The lower ends of the link member 1505 and the fourth link member 1506 are rotatably connected.

In addition, a fifth link member 1507 and a sixth link member 1508 are rotatably connected to the vicinity of the upper ends of the third link member 1505 and the fourth link member 1506 (see FIG. 15B).
The first decorative member 1501 is connected to the third link member 1505 and the fourth link member 1506. The second decorative member 1502 is connected by a fifth link member 1507 and a sixth link member 1508.

  That is, the cup-shaped movable accessory 196 includes a first link member 1503, a third link member 1505, and a fifth link member 1507 located on the right side, a second link member 1504, a fourth link member 1506 located on the left side, And the sixth link member 1508 and the left and right link mechanisms. Further, it can be said that the left and right link mechanisms have one end connected to the game board 100 via the main body of the movable accessory driving unit 1191 and the other end connected to the cup-shaped movable accessory 196.

  The movable accessory driving unit 1191 rotates and drives the first link member 1503 and the second link member 1504 around the rotation shafts 709 and 710 by a stepping motor (not shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B). The movement of the cup-shaped movable accessory 196 is realized.

15A is a position where the cup-shaped movable accessory 196 (the first decorative member 1501 and the second decorative member 1502) has moved to the uppermost position. From this state, when the first link member 1503 is rotated counterclockwise about the rotation shaft 709 and the second link member 1504 is rotated clockwise about the rotation shaft 710, the cup-shaped movable accessory 196 is straightened. As shown in FIG. 15-1 (B), the cup-shaped movable accessory 196 moves to the origin position where it has moved most downward. Similarly, when the first link member 1503 and the second link member 1504 are rotated in the opposite directions to those described above when in the origin position, the cup-shaped movable accessory 196 moves straight up and moves to the advanced position. To do.

  FIG. 15B is a diagram schematically illustrating the operation of the cup-shaped movable accessory 196 and the positional relationship of the position detection sensor 1157. Specifically, FIG. 15-2 (A) is a view of the transition of the positional relationship between the cup-shaped movable accessory 196 and the position detection sensor 1157 as viewed from the player side. FIG. 15B is a diagram of the position detection sensor 1157 viewed from the side. In these drawings, the shape of the cup-shaped movable accessory 196 is shown as a single plate for easy understanding.

  In FIG. 15-2 (A), (i) represents the case where the cup-shaped movable accessory 196 is arranged at the origin position, and (vi) represents the limit at which the cup-shaped movable accessory 196 can advance. It represents the case where it is arranged at a position (hereinafter also referred to as a maximum advance position). That is, when there is a cup-shaped movable accessory 196 in (i), the player can hardly see the cup-shaped movable accessory 196 (see FIG. 1-1). When there is a cup-shaped movable accessory 196 in (vi), the player visually recognizes that the cup-shaped movable accessory 196 covers the main liquid crystal display device 108.

  The position detection sensor 1157 includes an upper position detection sensor 1157a and a lower position detection sensor 1157b. The upper position detection sensor 1157a is disposed at a position above the lower position detection sensor 1157b.

  Each of the upper position detection sensor 1157a and the lower position detection sensor 1157b includes an irradiator and a light receiver. The irradiators and light receivers of these position detection sensors 1157 are arranged with a space therebetween. The cup-shaped movable accessory 196 (actually a light shielding plate) moves between them. As shown in FIG. 15B, light is emitted from the irradiator toward the light receiver, and a state where the pair of light receivers can detect the light is defined as a light receiving state, and a state where the light cannot be detected is defined as a light shielding state.

  When the cup-shaped movable accessory 196 is at the origin position (i) and at a position (ii) slightly moved from (i) to the advance position direction, it is shielded from light by the cup-shaped movable accessory 196. The position detection sensors 1157a and 1157b are also in a light shielding state. Furthermore, when it moves in the advance position direction and reaches the position (iii), the lower position detection sensor 1157b enters a light receiving state. This light receiving state continues while the cup-shaped movable accessory 196 is located in the range from (iii) to (iv). Further, when the cup-shaped movable accessory 196 moves in the advance position direction to reach the position (v), any one of the upper position detection sensors 1157a and 1157b is in a light receiving state. The same applies to the advance position (vi). As described above, the position of the cup-shaped movable accessory 196 can be determined based on whether the position detection sensor is in the light receiving state or the light blocking state. In particular, the timing at which the light receiving state and the light shielding state are switched can be determined as the timing at which the cup-shaped movable accessory 196 passes through the reference position.

  That is, when both the upper position detection sensor 1157a and the lower position detection sensor 1157b are in the light-shielded state, it can be determined that the cup-shaped movable accessory 196 is located at the origin position (home position). On the other hand, when the lower position detection sensor 1157b is in the light receiving state, it can be determined that the cup-shaped movable accessory 196 is not located at the origin position. Using such an idea, abnormality determination is performed in a retry process (FIG. 34-5) described later. Further, the position detection sensor 1157 is also arranged for other movable objects (the sub liquid crystal display device 106 and the logo object 107). Based on the position detection sensor 1157, the movable object can be obtained in the same way as described above. Can be determined by determining whether or not is located at the origin position.

[Timer interrupt processing by main control unit 1100]
Next, a timer interrupt process executed in the main control unit 1100 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing executed in the main control unit 1100. The main control unit 1100 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 16 at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on and when the power is turned off. . Note that the processing of the main control unit 1100 described based on the flowcharts of FIG. 16 and the subsequent steps is performed according to instructions issued by the CPU 1101 based on a program stored in the ROM 1102.
First, the CPU 1101 executes random number update processing for updating various random numbers of the jackpot random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the reach random number, the variation pattern random number, and the normal symbol random number (S1601).

  Here, the jackpot random number is a random number for determining the jackpot, the jackpot, or the loss. The jackpot design random number is a random number for determining the type of jackpot when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot. The small hitting design random number is a random number for determining the two types of big hits that are generated when a game ball wins the V winning opening 392 during the small hitting game. The reach random number is a random number for determining whether to perform an effect with reach or an effect without reach when it is determined that the reach is lost. The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern when a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The normal symbol random number is a random number for determining whether or not to open the second start port 118. The jackpot random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the reach random number, the variation pattern random number, and the normal symbol random number are incremented by “1” every time the process of S1601 is performed. Note that a loop counter is used as a counter for performing the processing of S1601, and each random number returns to “0” after reaching a preset maximum value.

  Subsequent to the process of S1601, the CPU 1101 executes a switch process when a detection signal is input from each switch (S1605). This switch process will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS.

  Subsequent to the processing of S1605, the CPU 1101 executes special symbol determination, and displays the special symbol on the first special symbol display 201 or the second special symbol display 202, and then shows the result of the special symbol determination. The special symbol process including the process of stopping and displaying is executed (S1610). This special symbol process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to the processing of S1610, the CPU 1101 executes normal symbol determination, displays normal symbols on the normal symbol display unit 205, and then displays normal symbols indicating the result of the normal symbol determination. Processing is executed (S1615). This normal symbol processing will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the processing of S1615, the CPU 1101 executes the electric tulip process for operating the electric tulip 117 via the electric tulip opening / closing unit 1112 when it is determined that the second starting port 118 is opened as a result of the normal symbol determination. (S1620). This electric tulip process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the processing of S1620, when the CPU 1101 determines that it is a small hit in the special symbol processing of S1610, the CPU 1101 operates the blade member 189 via the specific area opening / closing portion 1118 and also via the V prize opening opening / closing portion 1122. Then, the specific area release control process for operating the slide member 394 is executed (S1625). The specific area release control process will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27.

Subsequent to the processing of S1625, when the CPU 1101 determines that it is a big hit in S1610, or when a game ball wins the V winning opening 392 during the small hit game, the CPU 1101 controls the big winning opening control unit 1115 to make a big hit. A special winning opening opening control process for opening the winning opening 120 is executed (S1630). The special winning opening opening control process will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

Subsequent to the processing of S1630, the CPU 1101 executes prize ball processing for controlling payout of prize balls according to winning of game balls (S1635).
Following the process of S1635, the CPU 1101 executes an error detection process for detecting an error of the gaming machine 1 (S1640). This error detection process will be described in detail later based on FIGS. 33 and 34-1 to 34-14.

  Subsequent to the processing of S1635, the CPU 1101 executes transmission processing for transmitting various commands set in (stored) in the RAM 1103 and information necessary for determining the content of the rendering to the rendering control unit 1150 in the processing steps before S1635. (S1645). By executing the processing of S1645, game information related to special symbol determination and special games is transmitted to the effect control unit 1150. Specifically, the game information includes a change start command, a symbol determination command, an opening command, a round start command, a round end (inter-round interval) command, an ending command, and the like, which will be described later.

[Switch processing by main control unit 1100]
FIG. 17 is a detailed flowchart of the switch processing in S1605 of FIG. Subsequent to the processing of S1601, the CPU 1101 monitors the presence or absence of a detection signal input from the first start port switch 1110 as illustrated in FIG. For the random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number), a first start port switch process is executed to acquire a value at the time when the detection signal from the first start port switch 1110 is input (S1701). The first start port switch process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Next, the CPU 1101 monitors the presence or absence of a detection signal input from the second start port switch 1111, and various random numbers (big hit random number, big hit symbol random number, small bonus symbol random number, For the reach random number and the fluctuation pattern random number), a second start port switch process is performed to acquire a value at the time when the detection signal from the second start port switch 1111 is input (S1705). The second start port switch process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Then, the CPU 1101 monitors the presence / absence of the detection signal input from the gate switch 1113, and obtains the value at the time when the detection signal from the gate switch 1113 is input for the normal symbol random number that is appropriately updated by the processing of S1601. The gate switch process is executed (S1710). This gate switch processing will be described in detail later based on FIG.

[First Start Port Switch Process by Main Control Unit 1100]
FIG. 18 is a detailed flowchart of the first start port switch process in S1701 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 18, the CPU 1101 detects the detection signal from the first start port switch 1110 (ON signal indicating that the first start port switch 1110 is “ON”) following the random number update process of S1601. ) Is input or not, it is determined whether or not the first start port switch 1110 is turned “ON” (S1801). Here, when it is determined that the first start port switch 1110 has been turned “ON” (S1801: YES), the number of reservations U1 for the first special symbol determination stored in the RAM 1103 is stored in the main ROM 102 in advance. It is determined whether or not it is less than the maximum reserved number Umax1 (in the present embodiment, “4”) for the first special symbol determination (S1805).

  If the CPU 1101 determines that the hold number U1 is less than the maximum hold number Umax1 (S1805: YES), the CPU 1101 updates the value of the hold number U1 to a value obtained by adding “1” (S1810). Then, as the acquisition information used for the first special symbol determination, a jackpot random number, a jackpot symbol random number, a reach random number, and a variation pattern random number are acquired, and these random numbers are associated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 1103 (S1815- S1830), a hold command for notifying the image sound control unit 1160 that the first special symbol determination is held is set in the RAM 1103 (S1835).

Note that the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is configured such that the result of the first special symbol determination is either a big win or a loss, and the first special symbol determination is not determined to be a small hit that generates a small hit game. ing. For this reason, the first start port switch process does not include a step of acquiring a small hitting design random number for determining the type of the two big hits.
Further, although not shown in FIG. 18, it is assumed that the illegal winning determination in the first start port switch 1110 described above is executed in this flowchart. If it is determined that an illegal prize has occurred according to the detection status of the first start port switch 1110, an illegal prize error 1 command is set, and the illegal prize error 1 command is transmitted to the CPU 1151 by the transmission process described above.

[Second Start Port Switch Process by Main Control Unit 1100]
FIG. 19 is a detailed flowchart of the second start port switch process in S1705 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 19, following the first start port switch process of S <b> 1701, the CPU 1101 detects a detection signal from the second start port switch 1111 (that the second start port switch 1111 is turned “ON”). It is determined whether or not the second start port switch 1111 is turned “ON” based on whether or not an ON signal shown in FIG.

  If the CPU 1101 determines that the second start port switch 1111 is “ON” (S1901: YES), for example, the long hit game flag, the short hit game flag, or the small hit game flag stored in the RAM 1103 is “ Based on whether or not it is set to “ON”, it is determined whether or not a special game is being played (a jackpot game is being played) (S1905).

  Here, the long winning game flag is a flag indicating whether or not a long winning game consisting of a plurality of long open round games that open the big winning opening 120 is long open. Is set to “OFF” at the end of the long hit game. The short win game flag is a flag indicating whether or not a short win game consisting of a plurality of short open round games that open the big winning opening 120 is short, and is set to “ON” at the start of the short win game. And set to “OFF” at the end of the short hit game. The small hit game flag is a flag indicating whether or not the small hit game that is opening the specific winning opening 190 is being executed, and is set to “ON” at the start of the small hit game, and “ OFF "is set.

  If the CPU 1101 determines that it is not during special game (during jackpot game) (S1905: NO), whether or not the special symbol on the first special symbol display 201 or the second special symbol display 202 is being displayed. Is determined (S1910). Here, when it is determined that the special symbol variation display is not being performed (S1910: NO), as the acquisition information used for the second special symbol determination, the jackpot random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the reach random number, Then, the fluctuation pattern random numbers are acquired, and these random numbers are associated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 1103 (S1915 to S1935).

In this way, when the special game is not being displayed and the variation of the special symbol is not being displayed, the second start port 11
When the game ball wins in 8, the CPU 1101 directly stores various random numbers used for the second special symbol determination in the determination storage area of the RAM 1103. This determination storage area is a storage area for storing various random numbers used for the special symbol determination when the special symbol determination is actually executed. When a game ball is won at the first starting port 116, the CPU 1101 stores various random numbers used for the first special symbol determination in the reserved storage area of the RAM 1103, and actually performs the first special symbol determination. When the variable symbol special display is started, various random numbers stored in the reserved storage area are shifted to the determination storage area.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the game ball is won at the second starting port 118 during the special symbol change display or during the special game, the special symbol change relating to the second special symbol determination corresponding to the winning is made. When the display cannot be started immediately, the second special symbol determination based on the winning of the game ball at the second start port 118 is not performed. On the other hand, even when the game ball is won at the first start port 116, even if the change display of the special symbol related to the first special symbol determination corresponding to the winning cannot be started immediately, the right of the first special symbol determination is 4 is the upper limit.

  Although not shown in FIG. 19, it is assumed that the illegal winning determination in the second start port switch 1111 described above is executed in this flowchart. If it is determined that an illegal prize has occurred according to the detection status of the second start-up switch 1111, an illegal prize error 2 command is set, and the illegal prize error 2 command is transmitted to the CPU 1151 by the transmission process described above.

[Gate Switch Processing by Main Control Unit 1100]
FIG. 20 is a detailed flowchart of the gate switch process in S1710 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 20, the CPU 1101 receives a detection signal (ON signal indicating that the gate switch 1113 is turned “ON”) from the gate switch 1113 following the second start-up switch processing in S22. Whether or not the gate switch 1113 is turned “ON” is determined based on whether or not it has been done (S2001).

When the CPU 1101 determines that the gate switch 1113 is turned “ON” (S2001: YES), the normal symbol determination hold number T stored in the RAM 1103 is the maximum normal symbol determination hold stored in the ROM 1102 in advance. It is determined whether it is less than a number Tmax (eg, “4”) (S2005).
When the CPU 1101 determines that the number of holds T is less than the maximum number of holds Tmax (S2005: YES), the CPU 1101 updates the number of holds T to a value obtained by adding “1” (S2010), and determines the normal symbol held by this process. The normal symbol random number used in the above is acquired and stored in the RAM 1103 (S2015).

[Special symbol processing by main control unit 1100]
Next, the details of the special symbol process executed by the main control unit 1100 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 21 is a detailed flowchart of the special symbol process in S3 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 21, the CPU 1101 of the main control unit 1100 determines whether the long hit game flag, the short hit game flag, or the small hit game flag stored in the RAM 1103 is set to “ON”. Based on this, it is determined whether or not a special game is being played (a jackpot game is being played) (S2101). Here, if it is determined that the special game is being played (the jackpot game is being played) (S2101: YES), the process proceeds to the normal symbol process of S1615.

If the CPU 1101 determines that the special game is not being played (the jackpot game is not being played) (S2101: NO), the CPU 1101 determines whether or not the special symbol is being changed (S2105). If it is determined that the special symbol variation display is not in progress (S2105: NO), it is determined whether or not various random numbers related to the second start opening winning are stored in the determination storage area of the RAM 1103 (S2110). . Specifically, various random numbers acquired in response to the game ball winning the second start opening 118 are directly stored in the determination storage area, and various random numbers related to the second start opening winning are stored. Is stored in the determination storage area. Based on whether or not this flag is stored when various random numbers are stored in the determination storage area, various types of information stored in the determination storage area are stored. It is determined whether the random number is related to the second start opening winning or the first starting opening winning. Here, when it is determined that the random number related to the second start opening winning is stored (S2110: YES), the process proceeds to S2130 described later.

  When the CPU 1101 determines that the random number related to the second start-up winning prize is not stored in the determination storage area (S2110: NO), the first special symbol determination hold number U1 stored in the RAM 1103 is “1”. It is determined whether or not this is the case (S2115). If it is determined that the hold number U1 is “1” or more (S2115: YES), the hold number U1 is updated to a value obtained by subtracting “1” (S2120). Then, a shift process for the storage area of the RAM 1103 is executed (S2125). Specifically, the jackpot random numbers, jackpot symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers related to the first special symbol determination stored in the reserved storage area of the RAM 1103 are first stored in the reserved storage area ( The oldest one) is shifted to the determination storage area, and the remaining one is shifted to the determination storage area side.

  When the CPU 1101 executes the process of S2125, or when it is determined that the random number related to the second start opening winning is stored in the determination storage area (S2110: YES), the random number stored in the determination storage area The jackpot determination process is executed based on (S2130). By executing the jackpot determination process, it is determined whether the jackpot, the jackpot, or the loss, and setting information of a determination symbol indicating the determination result is set in the RAM 1103. When it is determined that the jackpot (one type big hit) is determined, the type of jackpot is determined, and when it is determined that the jackpot is won, a game ball is won in the V winning opening 392 during the small hit game. The kind of two types of jackpots that will be triggered by this is determined. The jackpot determination process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Following the process of S2130, the CPU 1101 executes a variation pattern selection process (S2135). Specifically, referring to the variation pattern table stored in advance in the ROM 1102, the determination result of the jackpot determination in S2130, the type of determination symbol set in the RAM 1103, the current gaming state, the first special symbol determination pending The variation pattern of the special symbol is selected based on the reach random number and the variation pattern random number stored in the storage area for determination together with the number U1 and the jackpot random number used in the processing of S2130. By performing the processing of S2135, it is also determined whether to perform a reachable effect or a reachless effect.

  Following the processing of S2135, the CPU 1101 determines whether the symbol setting information set in the processing of S2130 and the symbol setting information relate to the first special symbol determination or the second special symbol determination. Main information is a change start command including information indicating the change pattern setting information set in the processing of S2135, information indicating whether the effect with reach or effect without reach, information regarding the gaming state of the gaming machine 1, etc. It is set in the RAM 103 (S2140). This variation start command is a command for instructing the start of the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol, and is transmitted to the effect control unit 1150 by the transmission process of S1645.

On the other hand, the effect control unit 1150 needs to specify the result of the special symbol determination by analyzing the change start command received from the main control unit 1100 and perform either the effect with reach or the effect without reach. To determine the game state of the gaming machine 1 by acquiring the variation time during which the special symbol is variably displayed. Then, accompanying the variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 201 or the second special symbol display 202, what kind of effect image is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 108, what kind of sound is output from the speaker 138. Is output, the light emission pattern of the frame lamp 141 is emitted, the logo accessory 107 is activated, and the like, and the effects of the determined contents are displayed in the image sound control unit 1160 and the lamp control unit 1170. To run.

  Subsequent to the processing of S2140, the CPU 1101 starts the special symbol variation display based on the setting information included in the variation start command set in the processing of S2140 (S2145). This special symbol variation display is performed when the processing of S2130 to S2140 is performed in a state where the random number related to the first special symbol determination is stored in the determination storage area, the first special symbol display 201 is displayed. When the processes of S2130 to S2140 are performed in a state where random numbers related to the second special symbol determination are stored, the second special symbol display unit 202 is used.

  Subsequent to S2145, the CPU 1101 determines whether the customer waiting flag stored in the RAM 1103 is set to “ON” (S2150). Here, the customer waiting flag is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming machine 1 is in a customer waiting state, the right of the first special symbol determination is not reserved, and the first special symbol determination or the second special symbol is not held. It is set to “ON” at the timing when the special symbol variation display related to the determination is not performed, and is set to “OFF” when the special symbol variation display is started again.

  When the CPU 1101 determines that the customer waiting flag is set to “ON” (S2150: YES), the CPU 1101 sets the customer waiting flag to “OFF” (S2155). When the process of S2155 is executed, or when it is determined that the customer waiting flag is not set to “ON” (S2150: NO), measurement of the variation time is started (S2160).

  When the CPU 1101 executes the process of S2160 or determines that the special symbol is being changed (S2105: YES), the CPU 1101 corresponds to the change pattern selected by the process of S2135 from the start of measurement of the change time in S2160. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed (S2165). If it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed (S2165: NO), the series of special symbol processing ends, and the processing proceeds to normal symbol processing in S1615.

  When the CPU 1101 determines that the variation time has elapsed (S2165: YES), the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 201 or the second special symbol display 202. Is set in the RAM 1103 (S2170). This symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control unit 1150 by the transmission process in S1645. Thereby, the process etc. which stop-display the decoration symbol which was variably displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 108 in the aspect which shows the determination result of special symbol determination, etc. are performed.

  Following the processing of S2170, the CPU 1101 ends the special symbol variation display started in S2145 (S2175). At this time, the determination symbol set in the processing of S2130 (big hit symbol, small bonus symbol, or lost symbol) is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display that has variably displayed the special symbol.

  Subsequent to the processing of S2175, the CPU 1101 resets the variation time started by the processing of S2160 (S2180), starts the first special game when it is a big win, and plays the small hit game when it is a small win The stop process including the process for starting the process is executed (S2185). This stop process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 1101 determines that the number of holdings U1 for the first special symbol determination is not “1” or more (S2115: NO), the CPU 1101 determines whether the customer waiting flag is set to “ON” (S2187). ). If it is determined that the customer waiting flag is set to “ON” (S2187: YES), the process proceeds to the normal symbol process of S1615.

  When the CPU 1101 determines that the customer waiting flag is not set to “ON” (S2187: NO), the CPU 1101 sets a customer waiting command for notifying that the gaming machine 1 is in a customer waiting state in the RAM 1103 (S2190). The customer waiting flag is set to “ON” (S2195). This customer waiting command is transmitted to the effect control unit 1150 by the transmission process of S1645. As a result, when a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 30 seconds) elapses after the customer waiting command is transmitted, the customer waiting effect is started.

[Big hit determination processing by the main control unit 1100]
FIG. 22 is a detailed flowchart of the jackpot determination process in S2130 of FIG. When the CPU 1101 determines that the random number related to the second special symbol determination is stored together with the flag in the determination storage area (S2110: YES), or when the process of S2125 is executed, as illustrated in FIG. The jackpot determination is executed (S2201). Here, when executing the jackpot determination relating to the second start opening winning, the jackpot determination table relating to the first starting opening winning is executed by referring to the second starting opening winning jackpot determination table stored in advance in the ROM 1102. In this case, the first start opening winning jackpot determination table stored in advance in the ROM 1102 is referred to.

  In the second start opening winning jackpot determination table, a determination result and a random value are stored in association with each other. Specifically, a random value for the big hit, a random value for the small hit, and a random value for the loss are stored. When the CPU 1101 executes the jackpot determination related to the second start opening winning a prize, the jackpot random number stored in the determination storage area matches any random value defined in the second starting opening winning jackpot determination table. Based on this, it is determined whether it is a big hit (one type big hit), a small hit or a loss.

In the first start opening winning jackpot determination table, a determination result and a random value are stored in association with each other. Specifically, a random value for jackpot and a random value for loss are stored. When the CPU 1101 executes the jackpot determination related to the first start opening winning prize, the jackpot random number stored in the determination storage area matches any random number value defined in the first starting opening winning jackpot determination table. Based on this, it is determined whether it is a big hit (1 type big hit) or lost.
As described above, the CPU 1101 sets the various random numbers stored in the determination storage area when the start condition such that the various random numbers related to the first special symbol determination or the second special symbol determination are stored in the determination storage area is satisfied. Based on this, it is determined whether or not to perform the first special game.

  CPU1101 determines whether it is 1 type big hit based on the determination result of S2201 (S2205). Here, when it is determined that it is one kind of big hit (S2205: YES), the type of big hit is determined with reference to the symbol determination table at the time of big hit stored in the ROM 1102 (S2210).

In the symbol determination table at the time of jackpot, the hit type and the random number value are stored in association with each other. The CPU 1101 determines the type of one type of jackpot based on which random number value specified in the symbol determination table at the time of jackpot matches the jackpot symbol random number stored in the determination storage area together with the jackpot random number To decide. Examples of the type 1 big hit in the first special symbol determination include “per 7R without time reduction”, “per 8R with time reduction”, and “abrupt time reduction” as examples. Examples include “per 8R without time reduction”, “per 15R with time reduction”, and “per 8R with time reduction” (see FIG. 4).

  The CPU 1101 sets the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type determined in S2210 as setting information in the RAM 1103 (S2215). As a result, the jackpot symbol set here in the process of S2175 is stopped and displayed as a determination symbol on the first special symbol display 201 or the second special symbol display 202, and the first special game is executed. It will be.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 1101 determines that the result of the special symbol determination is not one type big hit (S2205: NO), based on whether or not the flag relating to the second special symbol determination is stored in the determination storage area, It is determined whether or not this special symbol determination is a first special symbol determination related to a first start opening prize (S2220). Here, when it is determined that the first special symbol determination is made (S2220: YES), if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is not a big hit, it is a loss, so the lost symbol is set as setting information in the RAM 1103 ( S2223). As a result, the lost symbol set here in the process of S2175 is stopped and displayed as a determination symbol on the first special symbol indicator 201.

  When the determination result of the second special symbol determination is not a big hit, the determination result is a small hit or a loss. On the other hand, if the CPU 1101 determines that it is not the first special symbol determination (S2220: NO), that is, if the current special symbol determination is the second special symbol determination, the result of the big hit determination in S2201 is the small hit It is determined whether or not (S2225). Specifically, based on whether or not the jackpot random number stored in the determination storage area matches the random number value corresponding to the jackpot specified in the second start opening winning jackpot determination table. 2 It is determined whether the determination result of the special symbol determination is a small hit or a loss.

  CPU1101 performs the process of said S2223, when it determines with the result of a 2nd special symbol determination not being a small hit (S2225: NO). In this case, the lost symbol set here in the process of S2175 is stopped and displayed as a determination symbol on the second special symbol display 202.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 1101 determines that the result of the second special symbol determination is a small hit (S2225: YES), the CPU 1101 refers to the symbol determination table for the small hit stored in advance in the ROM 1102 to determine the type of the small hit. Determine (S2230). Specifically, the type of the small hit is determined based on which random number value specified in the symbol determination table at the time of the small hit matches the random number for small hit stored in the determination storage area To do. Then, the determined small hit symbol is set in the RAM 1103 as setting information (S2235). Thereby, the small hit symbol set here at the time of the process of S2175 is stopped and displayed as a determination symbol on the second special symbol display 202.

  When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 202 in this way, the above-described small hit game is started. Then, when a game ball wins the V winning opening 392 during the small hit game, two types of big hits are made, and the second special game with the small hit game as the first round is performed. In addition, the kind of 2 types big hit is determined based on the small hit symbol stopped and displayed on the 2nd special symbol display 202. For this reason, the process which determines the kind of small hits can be regarded as the process which determines the kind of two types big hit. Examples of the two types of big hits are “per 15R with time reduction”, “per 8R with time reduction”, and “per 8R without time reduction” (see FIG. 4).

[Processing during stop by main control unit 1100]
FIG. 23 is a detailed flowchart of the stopping process in S2185 of FIG. After resetting the variation time by the process of S2180, the CPU 1101 determines whether or not it is a one-type big hit based on the result of the big hit determination of S2201 as illustrated in FIG. 23 (S2301). Here, when it is determined that it is a one-type jackpot (S2301: YES), it is determined whether the first special game executed for the one-type jackpot is a long hit game or a short hit game (S2305). ). Specifically, it is determined whether a long win game or a short win game is performed based on the setting information of the jackpot symbol set in the RAM 1103 in the process of S2215. In the present embodiment, a short win game is played only when “suddenly a short win”, and a long win game is played for other types of big hits.

  When the CPU 1101 determines that the game is a long game (S2305: YES), the CPU 1101 sets the long game game flag to “ON” (S2310), and when it is determined that the game is not a long game (S2305: NO). ), The short hit game flag is set to “ON” (S2315).

  Following the processing of S2310 or S2315, the CPU 1101 determines whether or not the short-time game flag stored in the RAM 1103 is set to “ON” (S2320). The short-time gaming flag is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is the short-time gaming state, and is set to “ON” when the normal gaming state shifts to the short-time gaming state. It is set to “OFF” when returning to the normal gaming state. If it is determined that the short-time game flag is set to “ON” (S2320: YES), the short-time game flag is set to “OFF” (S2325).

  On the other hand, if the CPU 1101 determines that it is not a one-type big hit (S2301: NO), it determines whether or not the time-saving game flag is set to “ON” (S2330). If it is determined that the short-time game flag is set to “ON” (S2330: YES), the short-time game remaining number W stored in the RAM 1103 is updated to a value obtained by subtracting “1” (S2335). The short game remaining number W indicates the remaining number of times that the second special symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) is executed in the short time gaming state. When the short game residual number W becomes “0”, the game The state is returned from the short-time gaming state to the normal gaming state.

Subsequent to S2335, the CPU 1101 determines whether or not the time-saving game remaining count W is “0” (S2340). Here, when it is determined that the short time remaining game count W is “0” (S2340: YES), the short time game flag is set to “OFF” (S2345). As a result, the gaming state is returned from the short-time gaming state to the normal gaming state.
The CPU 1101 executes the process of S2345, determines that the time-saving game flag is not “ON” (S2330: NO), or determines that the time-saving game remaining count W is not “0” (S2340: NO). In the same manner as the processing of S2225, it is determined whether or not a small hit is made (S2350). If it is determined that the game is a small hit (S2350: YES), the small hit game flag is set to “ON” (S2355).

When the CPU 1101 executes the process of S2325, determines that the time-saving game flag is not set to “ON” (S2320: NO), or executes the process of S2355, it sets an opening command in the RAM 1103 ( S2360). Here, the term “opening” refers to a period from the start of a long win game or a short win game until the first big winning opening 120 starts to be opened, or the first special winning opening 190 is opened after the small winning game is started. It means the period until it starts. On the other hand, the opening command is a command for notifying that the opening is started, and S1645.
Is transmitted to the effect control unit 1150 by the transmission process.

[Normal symbol processing by the main control unit 1100]
FIG. 24 is a detailed flowchart of the normal symbol process in S1615 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 24, following the special symbol process of S3, the CPU 1101 determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag stored in the RAM 1103 is set to “ON” (S2401). This auxiliary game flag is a flag indicating whether or not the electric tulip 117 is in an auxiliary game in which the operation of returning to the closed posture after maintaining the open posture for a predetermined time is being performed a predetermined number of times, and is set to “ON” during the auxiliary game. It is set and set to “OFF” when it is not in an auxiliary game.

  If it is determined in S2401 that the auxiliary game flag is set to “ON” (S2401: YES), the process proceeds to the electric tulip process in S1620.

  When the CPU 1101 determines that the auxiliary game flag is not set to “ON” (S2401: NO), the CPU 1101 determines whether or not the normal symbol display unit 205 is displaying the variation of the normal symbol (S2402). If it is determined that the symbol variation display is not being performed (S2402: NO), it is determined whether or not the number T of the normal symbol determination is “1” or more (S2403). Here, when it is determined that the number of holds T is not equal to or greater than “1” (S2403: NO), the process proceeds to the electric tulip process of S1620.

  If the CPU 1101 determines that the hold count T is “1” or more (S2403: YES), the CPU 1101 updates the hold count T to a value obtained by subtracting “1” (S2404), and executes a hit random number determination process (S2405). . Specifically, the oldest normal symbol random number among the normal symbol random numbers stored in the RAM 1103 by the processing in S2015 (see FIG. 20) is one of the winning values related to the normal symbol determination stored in the ROM 1102 in advance. It is determined whether or not the determination result of the normal symbol determination is a win based on whether or not they match.

  Following the processing of S2405, the CPU 1101 determines whether or not the determination result of the normal symbol determination is win based on the determination result of S2405 (S2406), and if it is determined that it is win (S2406: YES) Then, the winning symbol to be stopped and displayed as the determination symbol on the normal symbol display 205 is set in the RAM 1103 (S2407). Conversely, when it is determined that the determination result of the normal symbol determination is not successful (S2406: NO), the lost symbol is set in the RAM 1103 (S2408).

  Following the processing of S2407 or S2408, the CPU 1101 determines whether or not the current gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is the normal gaming state based on whether or not the time-saving gaming flag is set to “ON”. (S2409). If it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (S2409: YES), the normal symbol change time for displaying the normal symbol on the normal symbol display unit 205 is set to, for example, 25 seconds (S2410). On the other hand, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state (S2409: NO), the normal symbol variation time is set to 2 seconds, for example (S2411). Thus, the normal symbol variation time set by the processing of S2410 or S2411 is temporarily stored in the RAM 1103.

  Subsequent to the processing of S2410 or S2411, the CPU 1101 starts normal symbol fluctuation display by the normal symbol display unit 205 (S2412), and starts measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation display (S2413).

On the other hand, if the CPU 1101 determines that the normal symbol display by the normal symbol display 205 is being performed (S2402: YES), the CPU 1101 determines whether or not to end the normal symbol variation display (S2415). Specifically, the elapsed time when measurement was started by the process of S2413 is
Based on whether or not the normal symbol variation time set in S2410 or S2411 has been reached, it is determined whether or not to end the normal symbol variation display. If it is determined not to end the normal symbol variation display (S2415: NO), the process proceeds to the electric tulip process of S1620.

  If the CPU 1101 determines to end the normal symbol variation display (S2415: YES), the CPU 1101 terminates the normal symbol variation display on the ordinary symbol display unit 205, and the winning symbol set in the RAM 1103 or S2408 in the processing of S2407. In this process, the lost symbol set in the RAM 1103 is stopped and displayed (S2416). And the elapsed time which started measurement by the process of S2413 is reset (S2417). Then, similarly to the process of S2406, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the normal symbol determination is a win (S2418). Here, when it is determined that the determination result of the normal symbol determination is a win (S2418: YES), the auxiliary game flag is set to “ON” (S2419). In this way, when the auxiliary game flag is set to “ON”, the auxiliary game for operating the electric tulip 117 is started.

[Electric tulip processing by main control unit 1100]
FIG. 25 is a detailed flowchart of the electric tulip process in S1620 of FIG. Following the normal symbol process of S4, the CPU 1101 determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag is set to “ON” as illustrated in FIG. 25 (S2501). If it is determined that the auxiliary game flag is not set to “ON” (S2501: NO), the process proceeds to the specific area release control process of S1625.

  When it is determined that the auxiliary game flag is set to “ON” (S2501: YES), the CPU 1101 determines whether or not the electric tulip 117 is operating (S2502). If it is determined that the electric tulip 117 is not in operation (S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (S2503), similarly to the processing of S2406. Here, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (S2503: YES), as an operation pattern of the electric tulip 117, an operation pattern in which the operation of opening the second start port 118 for 0.1 second is performed once. Is set in the RAM 1103 (S2504). On the contrary, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state (S2503: NO), that is, when it is the short-time gaming state, the second start port 118 is opened for 0.3 seconds as the operation pattern of the electric tulip 117. An operation pattern for performing the operation to be performed five times is set in the RAM 1103 (S2505).

After setting the operation pattern in S2504 or S2505, the CPU 1101 causes the electric tulip opening / closing unit 1112 to start the operation of the electric tulip 117 in the set operation pattern (S2506).
If the CPU 1101 executes the process of S2506 or determines that the electric tulip 117 is operating (S2502: YES), the CPU 1101 determines whether the operation of the electric tulip 117 started in the process of S2506 is completed. (S2507). If it is determined that the operation of the electric tulip 117 has been completed (S2507: YES), the auxiliary game flag is set to “OFF” (S2508). Thereby, the auxiliary game is ended.

[Specific Area Open / Close Control Process by Main Control Unit 1100]
When the result of the second special symbol determination is a small hit, the small hit game is executed by the specific area release control process of S1625. Hereinafter, the specific area release control process executed in the main control unit 1100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. Here, FIGS. 26 and 27 are detailed flowcharts of the specific area release control processing in S1625 of FIG.

  Subsequent to the electric tulip process in S1620, the CPU 1101 determines whether or not the small hit game flag is set to “ON” as illustrated in FIGS. 26 and 27 (S2601). Here, if it is determined that the small hit game flag is not set to “ON” (S2601: NO), the process proceeds to the big winning opening release control process of S1630.

  If the CPU 1101 determines that the small hit game flag is set to “ON” (S2601: YES), for example, the elapsed time after setting the opening command related to the small hit game in the processing of S2360 is set in advance. It is determined whether or not the small hit game is being opened based on whether or not the opened time has been reached (S2602). If it is determined that the opening is in progress (S2602: YES), it is determined whether or not the opening time has elapsed (S2603). Here, when it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed (S2603: NO), the process proceeds to the special winning opening release control process of S1630.

  If the CPU 1101 determines that the opening time has elapsed (S2603: YES), it resets the number X of winning game balls to the specific winning opening 190 stored in the RAM 1103 (S2604), and the specific area opening / closing unit 1118 specifies The opening control of the winning opening 190 is started (S2605), and the measurement of the elapsed time after the opening control is started is started (S2606). By performing the processing of S2605, the blade member 189 performs the operation of closing the specific winning opening 190 after closing it for 3.2 seconds once.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 1101 determines that the opening in the small hit game is not in progress (S2602: NO), for example, based on the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game, the CPU 1101 determines whether or not the small hit game is ending. (S2608). Here, if it is determined that the ending in the small hit game is not in progress (S2608: NO), whether or not the specific winning a prize mouth switch 1117 is “ON” based on the presence / absence of a detection signal input from the specific winning a prize mouth switch 1117. It is determined whether or not (S2609). Here, when it is determined that the specific winning opening switch 1117 is “ON” (S2609: YES), it is determined that one gaming ball has won the specific winning opening 190, and the winning number X of the gaming balls is set to “ 1 ”is updated to the added value (S2610).

  When the CPU 1101 executes the process of S2610, determines that the specific prize opening switch 1117 is not “ON” (S2609: NO), or executes the process of S2606, the process of starting measurement in the process of S2606 It is determined whether or not the time matches a preset time (for example, 0.5 seconds) (S2611). Here, when it is determined that the set time has been reached (S2611: YES), a process of opening the V winning opening 392 by operating the slide member 394 in the V winning opening / closing unit 1122 is started (S2612). Thereby, the above-mentioned two types of big hits can be generated.

  If the CPU 1101 executes the process of S2612, or determines that the elapsed time does not coincide with the set time (S2611: NO), the CPU 1101 determines whether or not the V prize opening based on the presence or absence of the detection signal input from the V prize opening switch 1120. It is determined whether or not the switch 1120 is “ON” (S2613). If it is determined that the V prize opening switch 1120 has been turned “ON” (S2613: YES), the V winning flag stored in the RAM 1103 is set to “ON” (S2614). This V winning flag is a flag indicating whether or not a game ball is won at the V winning opening 392 during the small hit game and two kinds of big wins are generated, and no gaming ball is won at the V winning opening 392. Is set to “OFF”, and is set to “ON” when a game ball wins the V winning opening 392.

  When the CPU 1101 executes the process of S2614 or determines that the V prize opening switch 1120 is not “ON” (S2613: NO), the CPU 1101 determines whether it is the closing timing of the V prize opening 392. (S2615). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (0.2 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the V prize opening 392 is opened. If it is determined that the closing timing is reached (S2615: YES), the V winning opening 392 is closed by the V winning opening / closing unit 1122 (S2616).

  When the CPU 1101 executes the process of S2616 or determines that it is not the closing timing of the V prize opening 392 (S2615: NO), the CPU 1101 defines the blade member 189 based on the elapsed time when the measurement is started by the process of S2606. It is determined whether or not the opening operation (in this embodiment, one operation of opening the specific winning opening 190 for 3.2 seconds) is completed (S2618).

  When the CPU 1101 determines that the specified release operation has not ended (S2618: NO), the specific winning prize X stored in advance in the ROM 1102 is the number X of winning game balls to the specific winning opening 190 in the current small hit game. It is determined whether or not the number of game balls Xmax (for example, “6”) that defines the closing timing of the mouth 190 coincides (S2619). Here, if it is determined that the number X of winning prizes does not coincide with the number of gaming balls Xmax (S2619: NO), the process proceeds to the big winning opening opening control process of S1630.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 1101 determines that the winning number X matches the number of gaming balls Xmax (S2619: YES), or when it is determined that the prescribed releasing operation has ended (S2618: YES), the specific winning started in the processing of S2605. The opening control of the mouth 190 is ended (S2620), the elapsed time when the measurement was started in the process of S2606 is reset (S2621), and the measurement of the ending time is started (S2622). Here, the ending refers to a period from the end of opening the specific winning opening 190 to the end of the small hit game.

  When the CPU 1101 determines that the ending is being performed in S2608 (S2608: YES), as illustrated in FIG. 27, the ending related to the small hit game in which the ending time at which the measurement is started in the process of S2622 is set in advance. Based on whether or not the time has been reached, it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed (S2725). If it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (S2725: NO), the process proceeds to the special winning opening release control process of S1630.

  When the CPU 1101 determines that the preset ending time has elapsed (S2725: YES), the CPU 1101 sets the small hit game flag to “OFF” in order to end the small hit game (S2726), and the V winning flag is “ It is determined whether or not “ON” is set (S2727). Here, when it is determined that the V winning flag is not set to “ON” (S2727: NO), it is determined that the game ball has not won the V winning opening 392 during the small hit game, and the large S1630 is obtained. The process proceeds to a prize opening opening control process. In this case, the special game ends only with the small hit game.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 1101 determines that the V winning flag is set to “ON” (S2727: YES), the CPU 1101 sets the V winning flag to “OFF” (S2728), followed by the small hit game and the long open round. In order to start the game, the long hit game flag is set to “ON” (S2729), and the short-time game flag is set to “OFF” (S2730).

Although not shown in FIG. 26, it is assumed that the illegal winning determination at the specific winning opening switch 1117 described above is executed in this flowchart. If it is determined that an illegal prize has occurred according to the detection status of the specific prize opening switch 1117, an illegal prize error 3 command is set, and the illegal prize error 3 command is transmitted to the CPU 1151 by the transmission process described above.

[Main prize opening opening control process by the main control unit 1100]
Hereinafter, the special winning opening opening control process executed by the main control unit 1100 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 28 is a detailed flowchart of the special winning opening opening control process in S1630 of FIG. Following the specific area release control process of S6, the CPU 1101 determines whether or not the long winning game flag is set to “ON” as illustrated in FIG. 28 (S2801). If it is determined that the long hit game flag is set to “ON” (S2801: YES), the long hit game control process is executed (S2802). This long hit game control process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  If the CPU 1101 determines that the long winning game flag is not set to “ON” (S2801: NO), the CPU 1101 determines whether or not the short winning game flag is set to “ON” (S2805). If it is determined that the short hit game flag is “ON” (S2805: YES), short hit game control processing is executed (S2806). The short hit game control process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  When the process of S2806 is executed, when the process of S2802 is executed, or when it is determined that the short win game flag is not set to “ON” (S2805: NO), the prize ball process of S1635 is executed. Processing proceeds.

[Outline of opening pattern of special prize opening 120 and production during special game]
FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of the special winning opening 120 and the effects during the special game. FIG. 29A shows the relationship between the opening pattern of the big prize opening 120 and the performance during the game per 8R length when a game per 8R length is played for "8R without time limit" or "per 8R with time limit". FIG. When the opening command related to the long hit game of 1 type jackpot is transmitted to the effect control unit 1150, the opening effect is started as illustrated in FIG. Then, as the long open round game that opens the grand prize winning opening 120 for 29 seconds at the longest is repeatedly executed with a predetermined interval time, the effect during the round is executed every time the long open round game is started. Is done. This in-round effect includes, for example, an effect that displays the number of times that the special game has been performed continuously from the short-time game state to the normal game state, and an effect that informs the current number of rounds. When all the long-open round games are finished and an ending command is transmitted to the effect control unit 1150, the ending effect is executed until a predetermined ending time elapses.

  FIG. 29B is a diagram showing the relationship between the opening pattern of the big winning opening 120 and the effect during the 15R short win game when the 15R short win game is played for “suddenly short hit”. When the opening command related to the short hit game of 1 type jackpot is transmitted to the effect control unit 1150, the short win effect is started. In this case, the short open round game that opens the grand prize winning opening 120 for 0.2 seconds is executed 15 times at a predetermined time interval (for example, every 1 second), but the time required for the short win game is relatively short. A series of the above short win effects is executed until a predetermined ending time elapses after all short open round games are finished and an ending command is transmitted.

FIG. 29C is a diagram showing the relationship between the opening pattern of the big prize opening 120 and the effect during the game per 15R length when a game per 15R length is performed for “per 15R with time reduction”. When a game ball wins the V winning opening 392 during the small hit game, from the second round, a long open round game that opens the long winning opening 120 for a long time is repeatedly executed with a predetermined interval time in between. During the game per 15R length, in addition to the in-round effect described with reference to FIG. 29A, a music effect is performed. Specifically, a music selection screen (not shown) is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 108 in the second round (during the first long open round game after the end of the small hit game). The music selected by the player using the effect key 144 before the third round is started is continuously played during the third and subsequent rounds. That is, the music selected by the player is output from the speaker 138 and the video of the music is reproduced on the main liquid crystal display device 108. The music reproduction selected by the player in this way may be performed also when the game is controlled in the short-time game state after the game is finished per 15R length.

In this embodiment, the case where music selection is performed in the second round of the game per long game will be described. However, a configuration in which music selection can be performed at any time during the game per long game may be employed. Or you may employ | adopt the structure which can perform music selection, when the game is controlled in a short-time game state. Moreover, you may employ | adopt the structure which can perform a music selection during a short hit game.
Note that the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment also has a feature that the number of songs that can be selected by the player increases every time the first performance performance is performed. Specifically, during the game per 15R length before the first song performance performance of the new song A is performed, a song selection screen capable of selecting only the default song is displayed. On the other hand, during the game per 15R length after the first song performance performance of the new song A is performed, a song selection screen capable of selecting the default song or the new song A is displayed. Then, when the first song performance performance of the new song B is performed, a song selection screen capable of selecting the default song, the new song A, or the new song B is displayed. If the player selects a song but the performance of the song has started, the selected song cannot be played immediately, or if the song playback is interrupted, After the production is finished, the selected music is played from the beginning.

[Long per game control processing by the main control unit 1100]
FIG. 30 is a detailed flowchart of the long hit game control process in S2802 of FIG. When the CPU 1101 determines that the long hit game flag is set to “ON” (S2801: YES), as illustrated in FIG. 30, for example, the opening of the long win game is performed by the process of S2360 in FIG. Based on whether or not the elapsed time after setting the command has reached a predetermined opening time, it is determined whether or not the game is being opened per long game (S3021). If it is determined that the opening is in progress (S3021: YES), it is determined whether the opening time has elapsed based on whether the elapsed time has reached the predetermined opening time (S3022). If it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed (S3022: NO), the process proceeds to a prize ball process in S1635.

  When the CPU 1101 determines that the opening time has elapsed (S3022: YES), the CPU 1101 determines the round number Rmax of the special game, the operation pattern of the big prize control unit 1115, and stores these information in the RAM 1103 (S3023). ). By executing the processing of S3023, various times related to the long game such as the interval time between rounds and the next round, and the ending time after the end of the final round are also set.

  Subsequent to the processing of S3023, the CPU 1101 resets the winning number Y of the game ball to the big winning opening 120 stored in the RAM 1103 (S3024), and the round number R in the game per long also stored in the RAM 1103. Is updated to a value obtained by adding “1” (S3025). The number of rounds R is set to “0” before the start of the game per long, and is incremented by “1” every time the processing of S3025 is performed.

Subsequent to the processing of S3025, the CPU 1101 starts the opening control of the big prize opening 120 by the big prize opening control unit 1115 (S3026), and starts measuring the opening time that is an elapsed time after the opening control is started. (S3027). Then, a round start command for notifying that the long open round game has started is set in the RAM 1103 (S3028).

  When the CPU 1101 determines that the opening in the long hit game is not in progress (S3021: NO), for example, based on information indicating the current time point in the long hit game stored in the RAM 1103, the final round It is determined whether the ending immediately after the end is in progress (S3029). If it is determined that ending is in progress (S3029: YES), the process proceeds to S744 described later.

  If the CPU 1101 determines that the ending in the long hit game is not in progress (S3029: NO), for example, based on information indicating the time point in the long hit game in which the current state is stored in the RAM 1103. It is determined whether it is (between the round and the next round) (S3030). Here, when it is determined that the interval is in progress (S3030: YES), it is determined whether or not the interval time set by the processing of S3023 has elapsed since the special winning opening 120 was closed at the end of the previous round. (S3031). If it is determined that the interval time has elapsed (S3031: YES), the process proceeds to S3024 because it is time to start the next round. On the other hand, if it is determined that the interval time has not elapsed (S3031: NO), the process proceeds to a prize ball process of S1635.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 1101 determines that it is not in the interval (S3030: NO), the CPU 1101 determines that it is in the round, and based on the presence / absence of the detection signal input from the big prize opening switch 1114, the big prize opening switch 1114 Is determined to be “ON” or not (S3033). Here, when it is determined that the big prize opening switch 1114 is “ON” (S3033: YES), it is judged that one game ball has won the big prize opening 120, and the winning number Y of the game balls is set to “ 1 ”is updated to the added value (S3034).

  When the CPU 1101 executes the process of S3028, executes the process of S3034, or determines that the big prize opening switch 1114 is not “ON” (S3033: NO), it is defined from the start of opening the big prize opening 120. It is determined whether or not the opening time has elapsed (S3035). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening time at which the measurement is started by the process of S3027 has reached a specified opening time (29 seconds in this embodiment) stored in advance in the ROM 1102.

When the CPU 1101 determines that the specified release time has not elapsed (S3035: NO), the winning prize number 120 of the game ball in the current round stored in the RAM 1103 is stored in the ROM 1102 in advance. It is determined whether or not it matches the number of game balls Ymax (for example, “9”) that defines the closing timing (S3036). If it is determined that the winning number Y does not match the gaming ball number Ymax (S3036: NO), the process proceeds to a winning ball process in S1635.
On the other hand, when the CPU 1101 determines that the winning number Y matches the number of gaming balls Ymax (S3036: YES), or when it is determined that the specified opening time has elapsed (S3035: YES), the CPU 1101 gives a large value to the big winning opening control unit 1115. The opening control of the winning opening 120 is ended (S3037). At this time, a round end (inter-round interval) command (not shown) is set.

Subsequent to the process of S3037, the CPU 1101 determines whether or not the current round number R of the game per long stored in the RAM 1103 matches the round number Rmax set by the process of S3023 (S3038). . Here, when it is determined that the number of rounds R does not match the number of rounds Rmax (S3038: NO), in order to control the start timing of the next round, an interval that is an elapsed time since the big prize opening 120 is closed. Time measurement is started (S3039). The interval time when the measurement is started by the process of S3039 is used for the process of S3031.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 1101 determines that the round number R matches the round number Rmax (S3038: YES), the CPU 1101 starts measuring the ending time (S3040), and resets the round number R stored in the RAM 1103 (S3041). The ending command is set in the RAM 1103 (S3042). This ending command is a command for notifying that the final opening of the special winning opening 120 has ended, and is transmitted to the effect control unit 1150 by the transmission process of S1645.

  When the CPU 1101 executes the process of S3042 or determines that ending is in progress (S3029: YES), the CPU 1101 determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed (S3044). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the ending time at which measurement is started by the process of S3040 has reached the set ending time set by the process of S3023. If it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (S3044: NO), the process proceeds to a prize ball process in S1635.

If the CPU 1101 determines that the set ending time has elapsed (S3044: YES), the CPU 1101 executes a game state setting process for setting the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 after the long hitting game (S745). Then, in order to end the long winning game, the long winning game flag is set to “OFF” (S3046). The gaming state setting process will be described in detail later based on FIG.
Although not shown in FIG. 30, it is assumed that the above-described illegal prize determination at the special prize opening switch 1114 is executed during the special prize opening control in this flowchart. If it is determined that an illegal prize has occurred according to the detection status of the big prize opening switch 1114, an illegal prize error 4 flag is set.

[Short hit game control processing by the main control unit 1100]
FIG. 31 is a detailed flowchart of the short hit game control process in S2806 of FIG. When the CPU 1101 determines that the short hit game flag is set to “ON” (FIG. 28: S2805: YES), as illustrated in FIG. 31, for example, the process of S2360 in FIG. Based on whether or not the elapsed time since the opening command is set has reached a predetermined opening time, it is determined whether or not the short hit game is being opened (S3161). If it is determined that the opening is in progress (S3161: YES), it is determined whether the opening time has passed based on whether the elapsed time has reached the predetermined opening time (S3162). Here, when it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed (S3162: NO), the process proceeds to a prize ball process of S1635.

  When the CPU 1101 determines that the opening time has elapsed (S3162: YES), the CPU 1101 determines the round number Rmax of the special game, the operation pattern of the special prize control unit 1115, and stores these pieces of information in the RAM 1103 (S3163). ). By executing the processing of S3023, various times related to the short hit game such as the interval time between rounds and the next round, and the ending time after the end of the final round are also set.

Subsequent to the processing of S3163, the CPU 1101 updates the round number R in the short hit game stored in the RAM 1103 to a value obtained by adding “1” (S3164). This round number R is set to “0” before the start of the short hit game, similarly to the case where the long hit game is performed, and is incremented by “1” every time the processing of S3164 is performed.
Subsequent to the processing of S3164, the CPU 1101 starts the opening control of the big prize opening 120 by the big prize opening control unit 1115 (S3165), and starts measuring the opening time that is an elapsed time after the opening control is started. (S3166).

  If the CPU 1101 determines that the opening in the short win game is not in progress (S3161: NO), for example, based on information indicating the current time point in the short hit game stored in the RAM 1103, the final round It is determined whether the ending immediately after the end is in progress (S3167). When the CPU 1101 determines that the ending in the short hit game is not in progress (S3167: NO), for example, based on information indicating the current time point in the short hit game stored in the RAM 1103, during the interval It is determined whether or not (S3168). Here, when it is determined that it is during the interval (S3168: YES), it is determined whether or not the interval time set by the processing of S3163 has elapsed since the big prize opening 120 was closed at the end of the previous round. (S3169). Here, when it is determined that the interval time has elapsed (S3169: YES), the processing proceeds to S3164 because it is time to start the next round. On the other hand, if it is determined that the interval time has not elapsed (S3169: NO), the process proceeds to a prize ball process in S1635.

On the other hand, if the CPU 1101 determines that it is not during the interval (S3168: NO), it determines whether or not the specified opening time has elapsed since the opening of the special winning opening 120 (S3171). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening time at which the measurement is started by the process of S3166 has reached a specified opening time (0.2 second in the present embodiment) stored in the ROM 1102 in advance. If it is determined that the specified opening time has not elapsed (S3171: NO), the process proceeds to a prize ball process in S1635.
If the CPU 1101 determines that the specified opening time has elapsed (S3171: YES), the CPU 1101 causes the special winning opening control unit 1115 to finish the opening control of the special winning opening 120 (S3172).

  Following the process of S3172, the CPU 1101 determines whether or not the current round number R of the short hit game stored in the RAM 1103 matches the round number Rmax set by the process of S3163 (S3173). . Here, when it is determined that the number of rounds R does not match the number of rounds Rmax (S3173: NO), in order to control the start timing of the next round, an interval that is an elapsed time since the special winning opening 120 is closed Time measurement is started (S3174). The interval time when the measurement is started by the process of S3174 is used for the process of S3169.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 1101 determines that the round number R matches the round number Rmax (S3173: YES), the CPU 1101 starts measuring the ending time (S3175), and resets the round number R stored in the RAM 1103 (S3176). The ending command is set in the RAM 1103 (S3177). This ending command is transmitted to the effect control unit 1150 by the transmission process of S1645, similarly to the ending command related to the long hit game.

  When the CPU 1101 executes the process of S3177 or determines that the ending is being performed (S3167: YES), the CPU 1101 determines whether the set ending time has elapsed (S3179). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the ending time at which measurement is started by the process of S3175 has reached the set ending time set by the process of S3163. If it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (S3179: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball process of S8.

  When it is determined that the set ending time has elapsed (S3179: YES), the CPU 1101 executes a game state setting process for setting the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 after the short hit game (S3180). Then, in order to end the short hit game, the short hit game flag is set to “OFF” (S3181).

  Although not shown in FIG. 31, it is assumed that the above-described illegal prize determination at the big prize opening switch 1114 is executed in the same way as in FIG. 30 during the big prize opening control in this flowchart. If it is determined that an illegal prize has occurred according to the detection status of the big prize opening switch 1114, an illegal prize error 4 command is set, and the illegal prize error 4 command is transmitted to the CPU 1151 by the transmission process described above.

[Game state setting process by main control unit 1100]
FIG. 32 is a detailed flowchart of the game state setting process in S3045 of FIG. 30 and S3180 of FIG. This gaming state setting process is a process for setting the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 after the long winning game or the short winning game is ended to the normal gaming state or the short-time gaming state.

  First, the CPU 1101 determines whether or not the special game played this time is a long hit game based on whether the long hit game flag or the short hit game flag is set to “ON” (S3251). ). If it is determined that the game is not long hit (S3251: NO), that is, if the short hit game flag is set to “ON”, the process proceeds to S3252.

  In the present embodiment, since the short hit game is played only when the result of the first special symbol determination is suddenly short hit, the short time is always given after the short hit game is played. Therefore, the CPU 1101 sets the time-saving game flag to “ON” in S3252. Then, the short time remaining game count W is set to “100” (S3253).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the game is a long hit game (S3251: YES), the CPU 1101 determines whether or not the current long hit game is a long hit game following the small hit game (S3254). In the present embodiment, when a long hit game is performed following the small hit game, that is, when two types of big hits are made, the long hit game flag is set to “ON” by the processing of S2729 (see FIG. 27). On the other hand, in the case where only the long hit game is played without playing the small hit game, that is, in the case of one type big hit, the long hit game flag is set to “ON” by the processing of S2310 (see FIG. 23). Therefore, based on which processing step the long hit game flag is set to “ON”, it can be determined whether or not the current long hit game is a long hit game following the small hit game.

  When the CPU 1101 determines that the game is not a long winning game following the small winning game (S3254: NO), the jackpot symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 201 or the second special symbol display 202 at the start of the long winning game. Based on this, it is determined whether or not there is a short time after the end of the game (S3255). Conversely, when it is determined that the game is a long hit game following the small hit game (S3254: YES), the long hit game is based on the small hit symbol stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 202 at the start of the small hit game. It is determined whether or not there is a short time after the end (S3256).

Then, the CPU 1101 determines whether or not the determination result of S3255 or S3256 is a short time (S3257), and if it is determined that there is a short time (S3257: YES), the processing of S3252 and S3253 is executed. Thus, the game is controlled in the short game state when the second start port 118 is easily opened until the special symbol determination is executed 100 times after the long hit game is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no time saving (S3257: NO), since the processing of S3252 and S3253 is not performed, after the long hit game is finished, the second start opening 118 is not easily opened in the normal gaming state. The game will be controlled.

  When this series of game state setting processes is completed, the process proceeds to S3046 (see FIG. 30) when the long hit game ends, and to S3181 (see FIG. 31) when the short hit game ends. Processing proceeds.

[Error detection processing by main control unit 1100]
The error detection process in S1640 of FIG. 16 will be described based on FIGS. 33 to 34-14. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing details of error detection processing performed by the CPU 1101 of the main control unit 1100.

  The CPU 1101 executes abnormal winning error processing shown in FIGS. 34-1 and 34-2, which will be described later, in S3300, executes dish full error processing shown in FIG. 34-3, which will be described later, in S3302, and described later in S3304. 34-4 of FIG. 34-4 is executed, and in S3306, payout state error processing shown in FIG. 34-5 and FIG. 34-6 described later is executed, and in S3308, FIG. 34-7 and FIG. The switch abnormality error process shown in 34-8 is executed. In S3310, the magnetic detection error process shown in FIG. 34-9 described later is executed. In S3312, the discharge error process shown in FIG. 34-10 described later is executed. In S3314, a radio wave detection error process shown in FIG. 34-11 described later is executed, and in S3316, shown in FIG. 34-12 described later. A ball exit confirmation error process is executed, a solenoid photosensor abnormality error process shown in FIG. 34-12 described later is executed in S3318, an impact detection error process shown in FIG. 34-12 described later is executed in S3320, and S3322 is executed. The abnormal V winning error process shown in FIG. 34-13 described later is executed.

  Then, after executing each error process, an error information storage process is executed in S3324. Details of the error information storage process will be described after each error process is described.

<Main side abnormal winning error handling>
FIG. 34-1 is a flowchart showing the contents of abnormal winning error processing performed by the CPU 1101 of the main control unit 1100, and FIG. 34-2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the conditions for generating abnormal winning errors. First, referring to FIG. 34-1, in S3400, the CPU 1101 determines whether or not an abnormal winning error has occurred.

With reference to FIG. 34-2, here will be described the conditions for generating an abnormal winning error. As shown in FIG. 34-2, the abnormal winning error generation conditions are roughly classified into the following three types A to C.
A. When a winning at the grand prize opening is detected when the big prize opening is closed (except for the interval between rounds of big hits).
B. A case where the winning to the winning device (second start port 118) related to the ordinary electric accessory is detected when the ordinary electric accessory (tulip 117) is not operated.
C. When unauthorized winnings are detected for various switches.
Specifically, in the case of the following C-1 to C-7.
(C-1) When the first start port switch 1110 is turned on for 1 s or more.
(C-2) When the second start port switch 1111 is turned on for 1 s or more.
(C-3) When the normal prize opening switch 1116 is turned on for 1 s or more.
(C-4) When the prize winning switch 1114 is turned on for 1 s or more.
(C-5) When the lose winning prize switch 1121 is turned on for 1 s or more.
(C-6) When the specific prize opening switch 1117 is turned on for 1 s or more.
(C-7) When the V prize opening switch 1122 is turned on for 1 s or more.

  Returning to FIG. 34-1, if the CPU 1101 determines that an abnormal winning error has occurred (S3400: Yes), it moves the process to S3401 and determines that an abnormal winning error has not occurred (S3400: No). The processing is returned to the error detection processing (S3302: dish full error processing) in FIG. In the determination process of S3400 (A, B, and C determination processes in FIG. 34-2), the time from when the special winning opening or the ordinary electric accessory is closed until the game ball reaches the various switches ( (Time lag) is taken into consideration.

  In step S3401, the CPU 1101 sets an abnormal winning error start designation command in the RAM 1103 to notify the sub side that an abnormal winning error has occurred. Thereafter, the CPU 1101 shifts the processing to S3402. The abnormal winning error start designation command set in S3401 is transmitted to the effect control unit 1150. In addition, the effect control unit 1150 counts the number of transmitted abnormal winning error start designation commands, and determines an abnormal winning error notification mode based on the counted number of abnormal winning error start designation commands. ing.

  In S3402, the CPU 1101 starts an external information output timer (0.4 seconds) and moves the process to S3403. In S3403, an abnormal winning error has occurred from the game information output terminal board (external information terminal) 1124. A signal indicating is output. Thereafter, the CPU 1101 moves the process to S3404.

  In step S3404, the CPU 1101 determines whether or not the external information output timer has expired, that is, whether or not 0.4 seconds have elapsed since the external information output timer started. If the CPU 1101 determines that the external information output timer has passed 0.4 seconds (S3404: Yes), the CPU 1101 moves the process to S3405 and determines that the external information output timer has not passed 0.4 seconds. In the case (S3404: No), the process returns to the error detection process (S3302: dish full tank error process) of FIG.

  In S3405, the CPU 1101 stops the signal output from the game information output terminal board 1124 based on the fact that the external information output timer has passed 0.4 seconds. Thereafter, the CPU 1101 returns the process to the error detection process (S3302: dish full error process) of FIG.

  That is, in the abnormal winning error process shown in FIG. 34-1, when an abnormal winning error occurs, the fact is notified from the main side to the sub side by the abnormal winning error start designation command and the game information output terminal board 1124. Through (notification) to the outside for a predetermined period (0.4 seconds). In this case, when receiving the command, the effect control unit 1150 controls the image sound control unit 1160 and the lamp control unit 1170 based on the command to perform error notification.

  Note that the signal output from the game information output terminal board 1124 for 0.4 seconds is turned on for 200 ms and then turned off for 200 ms, and is repeated when there are multiple output triggers. (If a new abnormal winning error occurs within 0.4 seconds, another 0.4 seconds are output from that point).

The abnormal winning error start designation command is set to “FE70H” composed of 1-byte CODE data for identifying the command classification and 1-byte DATA data indicating the contents (function) of the command. . When the CODE data is “FEH”, it indicates an error start designation command, and the DATA data is set according to the type of error. The error start designation command described later is also configured in accordance with this.

<Main side dish full error processing>
Based on FIG. 34-3, the dish full tank error process in S3302 of FIG. 33 will be described. FIG. 34C is a flowchart illustrating the contents of the dish full tank error process performed by the CPU 1101 of the main control unit 1100. In the dish full tank error process, first, in S3407, the CPU 1101 determines whether or not the full tank flag is set to “ON” based on the flag information stored in the RAM 1103.
Here, the full tank flag is set to “ON” when the lower plate 129 is filled with game balls and the plate full tank switch 1125 is turned on, and the lower plate 129 is filled with game balls. This is a flag that is set to “OFF” when the dish full tank switch 1125 is off. If the CPU 1101 determines that the full tank flag is set to “ON” (S3407: Yes), the CPU 1101 moves the process to S3411, and determines that the full tank flag is set to “OFF” (S3407: No), the process proceeds to S3408.

  In step S3408, the CPU 1101 determines whether or not the dish full tank switch 1125 has been turned on. If the CPU 1101 determines that the dish full tank switch 1125 has been turned on (S3408: Yes), the CPU 1101 performs processing assuming that a dish full tank error has occurred. The process moves to S3409, and if it is determined that the dish full tank switch 1125 is not turned on (S3408: No), the process returns to the error detection process (S3304: door opening error process) of FIG.

  In step S3409, the CPU 1101 sets the full tank flag to “ON”, moves the process to step S3410, and sets a dish full error start designation command in the RAM 1103 to notify the sub side that a dish full tank error has occurred in step S3410. Thereafter, the CPU 1101 shifts the processing to S3411. Note that the dish full tank error start designation command set in S3410 is set to “FE00H” and is transmitted to the effect control unit 1150. In this case, when receiving the command, the effect control unit 1150 controls the image sound control unit 1160 and the lamp control unit 1170 based on the command to perform error notification.

  In S3411, the CPU 1101 determines whether or not the dish full tank switch 1125 has been turned off. If it is determined that the dish full tank switch 1125 has been turned off (S3411: Yes), the CPU 1101 performs processing assuming that the dish full tank error has ended. When it moves to S3412 and it determines with the pan full switch 1125 not having been turned off (S3411: No), a process is returned to the error detection process (S3304: door opening error process) of FIG.

  In step S3412, the CPU 1101 sets the full flag to “OFF”, and the process proceeds to step S3413. In step S3413, the dish full tank error end designation command for notifying the sub side that the dish full tank error has ended is set in the RAM 1103. Thereafter, the CPU 1101 returns the process to the error detection process (S3304: door opening error process) of FIG. The dish full tank error end designation command set in S3413 is set to “FF00H” and is transmitted to the effect control unit 1150. When the CODE data is “FFH”, an error end designation command is indicated, and an error end designation command to be described later is configured in accordance with this command.

That is, in the dish full tank error process shown in FIG. 34-3, when a dish full tank error occurs, the fact is notified from the main side to the sub side by the dish full tank error start designation command, and the dish full tank error is completed. In such a case, the main side notifies the sub side to that effect by a dish full error end designation command. In this dish full tank error process, when a dish full tank error occurs, external information output for notifying the outside via the game information output terminal board 1124 is not performed.

<Main side door opening error handling>
Based on FIG. 34-4, the door opening error process in S3304 of FIG. 33 will be described. FIG. 34-4 is a flowchart illustrating the contents of the door opening error process performed by the CPU 1101 of the main control unit 1100. In the door opening error process, first, in S3414, the CPU 1101 determines whether or not the door opening flag is set to “ON” based on the flag information stored in the RAM 1103.

  Here, the door opening flag indicates that the door is opened and the door opening switch 1183 is turned on (the glass frame 150 is opened and the glass frame opening switch 1183a is turned on, or the inner frame 170 is opened. This flag is set to “ON” when the inner frame opening switch 1183b is turned on) and set to “OFF” when the door is not opened and the door opening switch 1183 is turned off. If the CPU 1101 determines that the door opening flag is set to “ON” (S3414: Yes), it moves the process to S3418 and determines that the door opening flag is set to “OFF” ( S3414: No), the process proceeds to S3415.

  In S3415, the CPU 1101 determines whether or not the door opening switch 1183 is turned on. If it is determined that the door opening switch 1183 is turned on (S3415: Yes), the CPU 1101 determines that a door opening error has occurred and proceeds to S3416. If it is determined that the door opening switch 1183 is not turned on (S3415: No), the process returns to the error detection process (S3306: payout state error process) in FIG.

  In step S3416, the CPU 1101 sets the door opening flag to “ON”, and the process proceeds to step S3417. In step S3417, the door opening error start designation command for notifying the sub side that a door opening error has occurred is set in the RAM 1103. . Thereafter, the CPU 1101 shifts the processing to S3418. Note that the door opening error start designation command set in S3417 is set to “FE01H” and is transmitted to the effect control unit 1150. In this case, when receiving the command, the effect control unit 1150 controls the image sound control unit 1160 and the lamp control unit 1170 based on the command to perform error notification.

  In step S3418, the CPU 1101 determines whether or not the door opening switch 1183 has been turned off. If the CPU 1101 determines that the door opening switch 1183 has been turned off (S3418: Yes), the CPU 1101 determines that the door opening error has ended and proceeds to S3419. If it is determined that the door opening switch 1183 is not turned off (S3418: No), the process returns to the error detection process (S3306: payout state error process) in FIG.

  In step S3419, the CPU 1101 sets the door opening flag to “OFF”, moves the process to step S3420, and sets a door opening error end designation command in the RAM 1103 to notify the sub side that the door opening error has ended in S3420. . Thereafter, the CPU 1101 returns the process to the error detection process (S3306: payout state error process) of FIG. Note that the door opening error end designation command set in S3420 is transmitted to the effect control unit 1150.

That is, in the door opening error process shown in FIG. 34-4, when a door opening error occurs, the fact is notified from the main side to the sub side by the door opening error start designation command, and the door opening error is completed. In such a case, the fact is notified from the main side to the sub side by a door opening error end designation command. In this door opening error process, when a door opening error occurs, external information output for notifying the outside via the game information output terminal board 1124 is not performed.

<Mainly payout status error processing>
Based on FIGS. 34-5 and 34-6, the payout state error process in S3306 of FIG. 33 will be described. FIG. 34-5 is a flowchart illustrating the contents of the payout state error process performed by the CPU 1101 of the main control unit 1100, and FIG. First, referring to FIG. 34-5, in S3421, the CPU 1101 determines whether or not the payout error flag is set to “ON” based on the flag information stored in the RAM 1103.

  Here, the payout error flag is a flag that is set to “ON” when a payout state error has occurred and is set to “OFF” when a payout state error has not occurred. If the CPU 1101 determines that the payout error flag is set to “ON” (S3421: Yes), it moves the process to S3425, and determines that the payout error flag is set to “OFF” ( (S3421: No), the process proceeds to S3422. In step S3422, the CPU 1101 determines whether a payout state error has occurred.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 34-6, the occurrence condition of the payout state error will be described. As shown in FIG. 34-6, the occurrence conditions of the payout state error are roughly classified into the following five types A to E.

A. B. Counter case error due to ball catching or clogging of payout drive unit (payout motor) Discharge ball counting switch error C. No sphere error Payout excess error E. Issue command error
Hereinafter, each item of A to E will be specifically described in the light of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment.

First, A will be described. There are two specific conditions for occurrence of a payout state error relating to A as follows.
(A-1) When the rotor rotation switch 1147 is turned off when driving the payout motor (a ball biting error in which the rotor cannot rotate due to the ball biting in the counter case).
(A-2) When the payout ball counting switch 1146 is turned off when the rotor rotation switch 1147 is turned on (a clogging error in which the payout ball cannot be detected even though the rotor in the counter case has rotated normally).

Next, B will be described. The specific occurrence condition of the payout state error relating to B is as follows.
(B-1) A case where an abnormality such as disconnection (not connected) or a short circuit occurs in the payout ball counting switch 1146 and a switch abnormality detection signal is input to the main control unit 1100.

Next, C will be described. The specific occurrence condition of the payout state error relating to C is as follows.
(C-1) A case where there is no game ball to be paid out (insufficient) and the ballless switch 1145 is turned on.

Next, D will be described. There are two specific conditions for generating a payout state error relating to D as follows.
(D-1) When the number of payout balls is counted by the payout ball count switch 1146 more than the expected payout ball number.
(D-2) Chattering of the payout ball counting switch 1146 (for example, 10 times or more)
Next, E will be described. The specific occurrence condition of the payout state error relating to E is as follows.
(E-1) When a communication error (missing a payout command in the payout control unit 1140, receiving abnormal data, etc.) occurs between the payout control unit 1140 and the main control unit 1100.

  Returning to FIG. 34-5, if the CPU 1101 determines that a payout state error has occurred (S3422: Yes), it moves the process to S3423 and determines that a payout state error has not occurred (S3422: No). The processing returns to the error detection processing (S3308: switch abnormality error processing) in FIG.

  In step S3423, the CPU 1101 sets the payout error flag to “ON”, and the process proceeds to step S3424. In step S3424, the payout state error start designation command for notifying the sub-side that a payout state error has occurred is set in the RAM 1103. . Thereafter, the CPU 1101 moves the process to S3425. The payout state error start designation command set in S3424 is set to “FE02H” and is transmitted to the effect control unit 1150. In this case, when receiving the command, the effect control unit 1150 controls the image sound control unit 1160 and the lamp control unit 1170 based on the command to perform error notification.

  In step S3425, the CPU 1101 determines whether or not the payout state error has been resolved and ended. If it is determined that the payout state error has ended (S3425: Yes), the process proceeds to S3426, and the payout state error ends. If it is determined that it is not present (S3425: No), the process returns to the error detection process (S3308: switch abnormality error process) of FIG.

In step S3426, the CPU 1101 sets the payout error flag to “OFF”, and the process proceeds to step S3427. . Thereafter, the CPU 1101 returns the process to the error detection process (S3308: switch abnormality error process) of FIG. The payout state error end designation command set in S3427 is set to “FF02H” and is transmitted to the effect control unit 1150.
In other words, in the payout state error processing shown in FIG. 34-5, when a payout state error occurs, the fact is notified from the main side to the sub side by the payout state error start designation command, and the payout state error is completed. In such a case, the fact is notified from the main side to the sub side by a payout state error end designation command. In this payout state error processing, when a payout state error occurs, external information output for notifying the outside via the game information output terminal board 1124 is not performed.

<Main switch error error processing>
Based on FIGS. 34-7 and 34-8, the switch abnormality error processing in S3308 of FIG. 33 will be described. FIG. 34-7 is a flowchart showing the contents of the switch abnormality error processing performed by the CPU 1101 of the main control unit 1100, and FIG. 34-8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the occurrence conditions of the switch abnormality error. First, referring to FIG. 34-7, in S3428, the CPU 1101 determines whether or not the switch abnormality flag is set to “ON” based on the flag information stored in the RAM 1103.

Here, the switch abnormality flag is a flag that is set to “ON” when a switch abnormality error has occurred and is set to “OFF” when a switch abnormality error has not occurred. If the CPU 1101 determines that the switch abnormality flag is set to “ON” (S3428: Yes), the process proceeds to S3432, and the switch abnormality flag is “OF”.
If it is determined that “F” is set (S3428: No), the process proceeds to S3429. In step S3429, the CPU 1101 determines whether a switch abnormality error has occurred.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 34-8, the occurrence condition of the switch abnormality error will be described. As shown in FIG. 34-8, the occurrence condition of the switch abnormality error is roughly divided into the following four types A to D.

A. Input switch error B. Abnormal error without magnetic sensor only V region photo sensor only No abnormal error No impact sensor only error Hereinafter, each of items A to D will be described in detail with reference to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment.

The specific occurrence conditions of the switch abnormality error related to A are as follows.
1st start port switch 1110, 2nd start port switch 1111, gate switch 1113, big prize port switch 1114, specific prize port switch 1117, V prize port switch 1120, lose prize port switch 1121, normal prize port switch 1116, dish full Disconnected (not connected) or shorted to the tongue switch 1125, frame count switch 1123, ballless switch 1145, payout ball count switch 1146, rotor rotation switch 1147, door opening switch 1183 (glass frame opening switch 1183a, inner frame opening switch 1183b) When a switch abnormality detection signal is input to the main control unit 1100. Note that switch abnormality detection signals of the ballless switch 1145, the payout ball counting switch 1146, the rotor rotation switch 1147, and the door opening switch 1183 are input to the main control unit 1100 via the payout control unit 1140.

Specific conditions for the occurrence of a switch abnormality error relating to B are as follows.
When the magnetic sensor 1126 is turned on for 1 second.

The specific conditions for occurrence of a payout state error relating to C are as follows.
When the V prize opening 1120 is turned on for 10 seconds when the V prize opening opening / closing part 1122 is off (when the slide member 394 is closed).

Specific conditions for the occurrence of a switch abnormality error relating to D are as follows.
When the impact sensor 1128 is on for 20 seconds when the door opening switch 1183 is off (when the glass frame 150 and the inner frame 170 are closed).

  Returning to FIG. 34-7, if the CPU 1101 determines that a switch abnormality error has occurred (S3429: Yes), it moves the process to S3430 and determines that a switch abnormality error has not occurred (S3429: No). The processing returns to the error detection processing (S3310: magnetic detection error processing) in FIG.

In S3430, the CPU 1101 sets the switch abnormality flag to “ON”, moves the process to S3431, and sets a switch abnormality error start designation command in the RAM 1103 to notify the sub side that a switch abnormality error has occurred in S3431. . Thereafter, the CPU 1101 moves the process to S3432. The switch abnormality error start designation command set in S3431 is set to “FE03H” and transmitted to the effect control unit 1150. In this case, when receiving the command, the effect control unit 1150 controls the image sound control unit 1160 and the lamp control unit 1170 based on the command to perform error notification.

  In step S3432, the CPU 1101 determines whether or not the switch abnormality error has been resolved and the process ends. If it is determined that the switch abnormality error has ended (S3432: Yes), the process proceeds to S3433, and the switch abnormality error ends. If it is determined that it is not present (S3432: No), the process returns to the error detection process (S3310: magnetism detection error process) of FIG.

  In step S3433, the CPU 1101 sets the switch abnormality flag to “OFF”, moves the process to step S3434, and sets a switch abnormality error end designation command in the RAM 1103 to notify the sub side that the switch abnormality error has ended in S3434. . Thereafter, the CPU 1101 returns the process to the error detection process (S3310: magnetism detection error process) of FIG. The payout state error end designation command set in S3434 is set to “FF03H” and transmitted to the effect control unit 1150.

  That is, in the switch abnormality error processing shown in FIG. 34-7, when a switch abnormality error occurs, the switch side is notified from the main side to the sub side by a switch abnormality error start designation command, and the switch abnormality error is completed. In such a case, the fact is notified from the main side to the sub side by a switch abnormal error end designation command. In this switch abnormality error process, when a switch abnormality error occurs, external information output for notifying the outside via the game information output terminal board 1124 is not performed.

<Main side magnetic detection error handling>
Based on FIG. 34-9, the magnetic detection error process in S3310 of FIG. 33 will be described. FIG. 34-9 is a flowchart illustrating the contents of the magnetic detection error process performed by the CPU 1101 of the main control unit 1100. In the magnetic detection error process, first, in S3435, the CPU 1101 determines whether or not the magnetic sensor 1126 is turned on and a magnetic detection signal is input for 500 ms. If the CPU 1101 determines that a magnetic detection signal has been input for 500 ms (S3435: Yes), the CPU 1101 determines that a magnetic detection error has occurred, moves the process to S3436, and determines that the magnetic detection signal has not been input for 500 ms (S3435). : No), the process is returned to the error detection process (S3312: discharge error process) of FIG.

  In step S3436, the CPU 1101 sets a magnetic detection error start designation command in the RAM 1103 that notifies the sub side that a magnetic detection error has occurred. Thereafter, the CPU 1101 shifts the processing to S3437. The magnetic detection error start designation command set in S3436 is set to “FE04H” and is transmitted to the effect control unit 1150. In this case, when receiving the command, the effect control unit 1150 controls the image sound control unit 1160 and the lamp control unit 1170 based on the command to perform error notification.

  In S3437, the CPU 1101 starts an external information output timer (300 seconds), and moves on to S3438. In S3438, a signal indicating that a magnetic detection error has occurred from the game information output terminal board (external information terminal) 424. Is output. Thereafter, the CPU 1101 shifts the processing to S3439.

In step S3439, the CPU 1101 determines whether or not the external information output timer has expired, that is, whether or not 300 seconds have elapsed since the external information output timer started. If the CPU 1101 determines that the external information output timer has passed 300 seconds (S3439: Yes), the CPU 1101 moves the process to S3440, and determines that the external information output timer has not passed 300 seconds (S3439: No), the process is returned to the error detection process (S3312: discharge error process) of FIG.

  In S3440, the CPU 1101 stops the signal output from the game information output terminal board 1124 based on the fact that the external information output timer has elapsed for 300 seconds. Thereafter, the CPU 1101 returns the process to the error detection process (S3312: discharge error process) of FIG.

That is, in the magnetic detection error processing shown in FIG. 34-9, when a magnetic detection error occurs, the fact is notified from the main side to the sub side by the magnetic detection error start designation command and the game information output terminal board 1124 is displayed. Through (notification) to the outside for a predetermined period (300 seconds).
The signal output from the game information output terminal board 1124 for 300 seconds is turned on for 200 ms and then turned off for 200 ms. When there are multiple output triggers, the signal is repeated (300 If a new magnetic detection error occurs within 2 seconds, another 300 seconds are output from that point).

<Ejection error handling on the main side>
Based on FIG. 34-10, the discharge error processing in S3312 of FIG. 33 will be described. FIG. 34-10 is a flowchart showing the contents of the discharge error process performed by the CPU 1101 of the main control unit 1100. In the discharge error process, first, in S3441, the CPU 1101 detects a winning ball that has won a winning ball, that is, a first starting port switch 1110 and a second starting port switch from which a winning ball is paid out upon detection of the gaming ball. It is determined whether or not 1111, big prize opening switch 1114, lose prize opening switch 1121, specific prize opening switch 1117, and normal prize opening switch 1116 are turned on. If the CPU 1101 determines that any of the winning switches is turned on (S3441: Yes), the CPU 1101 moves the process to S3442, and determines that none of the winning switches is turned on (S3441: No). ), And the process proceeds to S3443.

  In S3442, the CPU 1101 increments (increments) a winning counter NC provided in the RAM 1103 in response to turning on of each winning switch. That is, the winning counter NC is a counter for counting the total number of game balls (safe balls) won in each winning opening, which is incremented by +1 every time any of the winning switches is turned on.

  In S3443, the CPU 1101 determines whether or not the frame count switch 1123 that collectively counts the game balls won in each winning opening is turned on. If the CPU 1101 determines that the frame count switch 1123 has been turned on (S3443: Yes), it moves the process to S3444, and if it determines that the frame count switch 1123 has not been turned on (S3443: No). To S3445.

  In step S3444, the CPU 1101 increments the frame counter WC provided in the RAM 1103 by 1 when the frame count switch 1123 is turned on. In other words, the frame counter WC is a counter for counting the total number of game balls (safe balls) that are won at each winning opening, which is incremented by +1 every time the frame count switch 1123 is turned on.

  In S3445, the CPU 1101 determines whether or not the absolute value of the difference between the count value of the winning counter NC and the count value of the frame counter WC is 50 or more. If the CPU 1101 determines that the absolute value of the difference is 50 or more (S3445: Yes), the CPU 1101 shifts the process to S3446 because an ejection error has occurred, and determines that the absolute value of the difference is less than 50 ( S3445: No), the process returns to the error detection process (S3314: radio wave detection error process) of FIG.

  In step S3446, the CPU 1101 sets a discharge error start designation command in the RAM 1103 for notifying the sub side that a discharge error has occurred. Thereafter, the CPU 1101 shifts the processing to S3447. The discharge error start designation command set in S3446 is set to “FE05H” and is transmitted to the effect control unit 1150. In this case, when receiving the command, the effect control unit 1150 controls the image sound control unit 1160 and the lamp control unit 1170 based on the command to perform error notification.

  In S3447, CPU 1101 outputs a signal indicating that a discharge error has occurred from game information output terminal board (external information terminal) 424. Here, a signal output from the gaming information output terminal board 1124 indicating that this discharge error has occurred is that the RAM clear switch 405 is turned on when the gaming machine 1 is turned on, and the memory in the RAM 1103 is cleared. The output is continuously turned on. Thereafter, the CPU 1101 returns the process to the error detection process (S3314: radio wave detection error process) of FIG.

  That is, in the discharge error processing shown in FIG. 34-10, the difference (absolute value) between the count value of the winning counter NC and the count value of the frame counter WC, which should be the same value, is 50 or more. If a discharge error has occurred, this is notified from the main side to the sub side by a discharge error start designation command and the next storage in the RAM 1103 is cleared via the game information output terminal board 1124 , Notification (output) is made to the outside.

<Main-side radio wave detection error handling>
Based on FIGS. 34-11, the radio wave detection error process in S3314 of FIG. 33 will be described. FIG. 34-11 is a flowchart illustrating the contents of radio wave detection error processing performed by the CPU 1101 of the main control unit 1100. In the radio wave detection error process, first, in S3448, the CPU 1101 determines whether or not the radio wave sensor 1127 is turned on and a radio wave detection signal is input. If the CPU 1101 determines that a radio wave detection signal has been input (S3448: Yes), the CPU 1101 moves to S3449 assuming that a radio wave detection error has occurred, and determines that no radio wave detection signal has been input (S3448: No). ), The process is returned to the error detection process (S3316: discharge ball check error process) of FIG.

  In step S3449, the CPU 1101 sets, in the RAM 1103, a radio wave detection error start designation command that notifies the sub side that a radio wave detection error has occurred. Thereafter, the CPU 1101 returns the process to the error detection process (S3316: discharged ball check error process) of FIG. Note that the radio wave detection error start designation command set in S3449 is set to “FE06H” and is transmitted to the effect control unit 1150. In this case, when receiving the command, the effect control unit 1150 controls the image sound control unit 1160 and the lamp control unit 1170 based on the command to perform error notification.

  That is, in the radio wave detection error process shown in FIGS. 34-11, when a radio wave detection error occurs, the fact is notified from the main side to the sub side by a radio wave detection error start designation command. In this radio wave detection error processing, when a radio wave detection error occurs, external information output for notifying the outside via the game information output terminal board 1124 is not performed.

<Main side impact detection error handling>
Based on FIG. 34-12, the impact detection error process in S3320 of FIG. 33 will be described. FIG. 34-12 is a flowchart illustrating the contents of the impact detection error process performed by the CPU 1101 of the main control unit 1100. In the impact detection error process, first, in S3457, it is determined whether or not the door opening switch 1183 (the glass frame opening switch 1183a or the inner frame opening switch 1183b) is turned on, and it is determined that the door opening switch 1183 is turned on. In the case (S3457: Yes), the processing is returned to the error detection processing (S3322: abnormal V winning error processing) in FIG. 33, and when it is determined that the door opening switch 1183 is not turned on (S3457: No), the processing is S3259. Move to.

  In step S3459, the CPU 1101 determines whether or not the impact sensor 1128 is turned on and an impact detection signal is input for 32 ms. If the CPU 1101 determines that an impact detection signal has been input for 32 ms (S3459: Yes), it determines that an impact detection error has occurred and moves the process to S3460.

  On the other hand, in step S3459, if the CPU 1101 determines that the impact detection signal has not been input for 32 ms (S3459: No), the processing returns to the error detection processing in FIG. 33 (S3316: S3322: abnormal V prize error processing).

  In step S3460, the CPU 1101 sets an impact detection error start designation command in the RAM 1103 for notifying the sub side that an impact detection error has occurred. Thereafter, the CPU 1101 returns the processing to the error detection processing (S3316: S3322: abnormal V winning error processing) of FIG. The impact detection error start designation command set in S3460 is set to “FE09H” and transmitted to the effect control unit 1150. In this case, when receiving the command, the effect control unit 1150 controls the image sound control unit 1160 and the lamp control unit 1170 based on the command to perform error notification.

  That is, in the impact detection error processing shown in FIG. 34-12, when an impact detection error occurs, the fact is notified from the main side to the sub side by the impact detection error start designation command. In the impact detection error process, when an impact detection error occurs, external information output for notifying the outside via the game information output terminal board 1124 is not performed.

<Main side abnormal V winning error handling>
Based on FIG. 34-13, the abnormal V winning error process in S3322 of FIG. 33 will be described. FIG. 34-13 is a flowchart illustrating the contents of the abnormal V winning error process performed by the CPU 1101 of the main control unit 1100. In the abnormal V winning error process, first, in S3461, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a jackpot gaming state. If it is determined that the gaming state is a jackpot gaming state (S3461: Yes), the error detection in FIG. The process ends. If the CPU 1101 determines that it is not in the big hit gaming state (S3461: No), it moves the process to S3462.

  In S3462, the CPU 1101 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the V area (condition opening operation area) 204, that is, whether or not the V winning opening switch 1120 is turned on, and the V winning opening switch 1120 is turned on. If it is determined (S3462: Yes), the process proceeds to S3463 on the assumption that an abnormal V winning error has occurred, and if it is determined that the V winning opening switch 1120 has not been turned on (S3462: No), the error detection process of FIG. finish.

In S3463, the CPU 1101 sets, in the RAM 1103, an abnormal V prize error start designation command (a lamp full extinction (excluding the fourth symbol) start designation command) for notifying the sub side that an abnormal V prize error has occurred. Thus, the abnormal V winning error process in S3322 in FIG. 33 ends, the error detection process also ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (S716: output process) in FIG. The abnormal V winning error start designation command set in S3463 is set to “FE72H” and transmitted to the effect control unit 1150. In this case, when receiving the command, the effect control unit 1150 controls the image sound control unit 1160 and the lamp control unit 1170 based on the command to perform error notification.

  That is, in the abnormal V prize error process shown in FIG. 34-13, when an abnormal V prize error occurs, the fact is notified from the main side to the sub side by the abnormal V prize error start designation command. Yes. In this abnormal V winning error process, when an abnormal V winning error occurs, external information output for notifying the outside via the game information output terminal board 1124 is not performed.

  The error information storage process in S3324 in FIG. 33 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34-14 is a schematic diagram showing accumulated error occurrence information 3499 stored in the FRAM 1155. In this error information storage process, first, when an error occurs in each error process, the CPU 1101 of the main control unit 1100 transmits error information indicating the error to the effect control unit 1150. When receiving the error information from the CPU 1101 of the main control unit 1100, the CPU 1151 of the effect control unit 1150 acquires the current time information from the RTC 1154 as shown in FIG. 34-14. The CPU 1151 associates the received error information with the acquired current time information (that is, error occurrence time information indicating the time when the error occurred), and stores it in the FRAM 1155 as error occurrence information 3499. Thus, the accumulated error occurrence information 3499A in which the error occurrence information 3499 is accumulated is stored in the FRAM 1155.

For example, if an error has occurred in the abnormal winning error process shown in FIG. 34-1, that is, if it is determined that an abnormal winning error has occurred in the process of S3400, in this error information storage process, the CPU 1101 Error information indicating an abnormal winning error is transmitted to the effect control unit 1150. On the other hand, when the CPU 1151 of the effect control unit 1150 receives error information indicating an abnormal winning error from the CPU 1101 of the main control unit 1100, the CPU 1151 acquires current time information from the RTC 1154, and the accumulated error occurrence information 3499 stored in the FRAM 1155 has not been obtained. The error information acquired this time and the current time information are written in the input area in association with each other. The CPU 1101 and the CPU 1151 perform the same process when an error occurs in another error detection process.
Above, description of the timer interruption process performed by CPU1101 of the main control part 1100 is complete | finished.

[Timer interrupt processing by production control unit 1150]
When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the CPU 1151 of the effect control unit 1150 sets a CTC cycle, which is a cycle for performing timer interrupt processing described later. And CPU1151 repeats the random number update process which updates the production | presentation random number etc. which are used in order to determine production | presentation content with the predetermined period shorter than a CTC period. That is, the CPU 1151 repeats the timer interrupt process at the CTC cycle while repeating the random number update process at a predetermined cycle while the gaming machine 1 is activated.

  Hereinafter, the timer interrupt process executed in the effect control unit 1150 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed in the effect control unit 1150. Similar to the timer interrupt process performed by the main control unit 1100, the CPU 1151 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 35 at regular intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds). Note that the processing performed by the effect control unit 1150 described based on the flowcharts of FIG.

  First, when receiving a command as game information from the main control unit 1100, the CPU 1151 executes command reception processing (S3501). Details of this command reception processing will be described later based on FIGS. 36-1 to 36-3.

  Subsequent to the processing of S3501, the CPU 1151 determines whether or not the effect button 142 or the effect key 144 is operated based on whether or not the operation information is input from the effect button 142 or the effect key 144 (S3505). If it is determined that the effect button 142 or the effect key 144 is operated (S3505: YES), an operation command for notifying the fact is set in the RAM 1153 (S3510). By transmitting this operation command to the image sound control unit 1160 and the lamp control unit 1170, processing for realizing the effect on the effect according to the operation of the effect button 142 or the effect key 144 is performed.

  When the CPU 1151 determines “NO” in S3505, or when the process of S3510 is executed, the CPU 1151 executes a command transmission process (S3515). Specifically, the command set in the RAM 1153 by the processing of S10 and S3510 is transmitted to the image sound control unit 1160 and the lamp control unit 1170. By performing this command transmission process, the image sound control unit 1160 is instructed to execute an effect by image display, audio output, and the like, and the lamp control is performed by turning on various lamps and operating the logo accessory 107. Instructed to the unit 1170. It is to be noted that the lamp control unit 1170 is instructed to execute the effect by the lighting of various lamps and the operation of the logo accessory 107 by this command transmission process.

The CPU 1151 detects menu button commands for displaying various menus to the overall CPU 1241 by detecting the operation of the effect button 142 while the variable effect is stopped when the number of reserved memories is 0 or during the customer waiting effect. Send. Receiving this command, the overall CPU 1241 displays a menu screen (not shown) for displaying various menus in the entire area.
The menu displayed on the menu screen includes game history (today, 1 week, 1 month) display, game description display, reach expectation display, and music performance schedule display (the current music performance schedule can be confirmed by calendar display). , Volume adjustment display, mini game display (fortune-telling and fortune-telling), login display, and logout display, and the player selects a desired menu by operating the effect button 142 and the effect key 144 and browses various display contents, etc. Can do.
Each time the CPU 1151 detects the operation of the effect button 142 or the effect key 144, the CPU 1151 transmits an effect button operation command or an effect key operation command to the overall CPU 1241, and the overall CPU 1241 displays according to the menu display scene at that time. Switch or display characters.

  On this menu screen, while displaying any of game history display, game description display, reach expectation display, music performance schedule display, login display, and logout display (first menu display), Always displays the remaining time from the end of the previous music performance until the start of the next music performance production, and the player views these displays (or login operation, logout operation), etc. Even in the state, the start time of the next musical performance performance can be recognized.

On the other hand, while any one of the volume adjustment display and the mini game display (fortune-telling or fortune-telling) is displayed (second menu display), the remaining time is not counted down. The reason is that the time during which the player displays these second menus is shorter than the time during which the first menu is displayed, so that the second menu display is displayed. This is because not much time has elapsed since the time previously recognized by the player.
The remaining time display (countdown display) until the next music performance effect displayed on this menu screen is displayed in order to prompt the player to start the music performance effect together with the remaining time display of the customer waiting effect described later. This corresponds to the second remaining time notification (countdown notification).

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player code issued from the external server is obtained by the player registering with the portable terminal in advance on the external server operated in association with the gaming machine 1. By entering the obtained player code into the gaming machine, the personal game history from the start of the game to the end of the game can be browsed, game points according to the game content can be added, or the player's preference Customization such as fluctuating effects can be performed.
The login display in the menu is an input screen display for inputting the obtained player code to the gaming machine, and the logout display is for inputting to the gaming machine that the game is to be ended when the player ends the game. Is an input screen display.
By logging in, it is possible to customize game effects, start collecting personal game histories, accumulate game points, and logout to generate information corresponding to the personal game history and game points (for example, 2 (Dimensional code information) is output, and the personal game history and game points can be browsed by receiving this information by the portable terminal. This will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 78 to 84 described later.

[Command reception processing by effect control unit 1150]
Hereinafter, the command reception process executed in the effect control unit 1150 will be described with reference to FIGS. 36-1 to 36-3. Here, FIGS. 36A to 36C are detailed flowcharts of the command reception process in S3501 of FIG. The CPU 1151 determines whether or not the hold command transmitted from the main control unit 1100 has been received (S3601). If it is determined that a hold command has been received (S3601: YES), the number of holds for the first special symbol determination stored in the RAM 1153 is updated to a value obtained by adding “1” (S3603). Then, a hold display command for instructing the update of the hold display image indicating that the first special symbol determination is held is set in the RAM 1153 (S3605). This hold display command is transmitted to at least the image sound control unit 1160 by the command transmission process of S3515.

  When the CPU 1151 executes the process of S3605 or determines that the hold command has not been received (S3601: NO), the CPU 1151 determines whether or not the changing effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol is being executed ( S3607). Specifically, for example, the variation time of the special symbol is specified based on the information indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol included in the variation start command transmitted from the main control unit 1100, and the variation start command is received. Based on whether or not the variation time has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol is being executed.

  If the CPU 1151 determines that the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol is not being executed (S3607: NO), the CPU 1151 determines whether a variation start command has been received from the main control unit 1100 (S3609). If it is determined that a change start command has been received (S3609: YES), a retry process is executed (S3611). Details of the retry process will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, the CPU 1151 executes an input device abnormality detection process after the retry process (S3613). Details of the input device abnormality detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36-5. When the input device abnormality detection process ends, the CPU 1151 analyzes the change start command (S3615).

In the variation start command, as described above, the determination symbol setting information indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination processing, the setting information indicating whether the effect with reach or the effect without reach is performed, and the setting information of the variation pattern The information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is included. Therefore, by analyzing the variation start command, the result of the special symbol determination is identified, whether it is necessary to perform the effect with reach or the effect without reach, and the variation time during which the special symbol is variably displayed is identified. The gaming state of the gaming machine 1 can be specified.
When the change start command is analyzed, the CPU 1151 executes a change effect pattern selection process based on the analysis result (S3617).

  Although not shown in the figure, the ROM 1152 has at least four effects, namely, a jackpot effect table, an effect table with lose reach, an effect table without lose reach, and an effect table with respect to the change effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol. The table is stored. Each of these effect tables is provided with a plurality of tables corresponding to variation patterns (variation times) determined by the main control unit 1100. For example, tables for 4 seconds, 8 seconds, and 12 seconds are provided in the effect table without losing reach, and tables for 1 minute, 1 minute 30 seconds, and 2 minutes are provided in the jackpot effect table. ing. The CPU 1151 selects one table from the plurality of tables based on the setting information included in the change start command. For example, when the setting information includes information indicating “losing”, information indicating that “reaching-free production” is performed, and information on a variation pattern indicating that the “variation time” of the special symbol is 4 seconds, The CPU 1151 selects the loss-less reach effect table for 4 seconds.

  In the effect table, effect random numbers and effect patterns are associated with each other. CPU1151 acquires the value at the time of receiving a change start command about the production | generation random number updated whenever the random number update process mentioned above is performed, and among many production | generation patterns stored in the selected production | presentation table. Thus, one effect pattern is selected by reading the effect pattern corresponding to the effect random number acquired in advance.

  As a result, a production pattern (such as a decorative pattern variation pattern) of a fluctuating effect performed using the main liquid crystal display device 108, whether or not to activate the logo accessory 107, and operation when the logo accessory 107 is activated. The contents of effects by each effect means such as the pattern, the light emission pattern of the frame lamp 141, and the output pattern of the sound output from the speaker 138 with respect to the variable effect are determined.

  As described above, the effect content and the start / end timing are set in the effect control unit 1150 based on the game information (various commands) transmitted from the main control unit 1100 for the change effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol. . On the other hand, the type of new song (music) to be reproduced in the above-mentioned music performance production, the time during which the music performance production is performed, the screen configuration of the main liquid crystal display device 108 during the music performance production or the performance announcement production, etc. Regardless of the game information, the image sound control unit 1160 sets it. The processing in the image sound control unit 1160 will be described in detail later.

Subsequently, the CPU 1151 sets a variation effect start command for instructing the start of the variation effect of the effect pattern selected in the process of S3617 in the RAM 1153 (S3619).
This variation effect start command is transmitted to the image sound control unit 1160 and the lamp control unit 1170 by the command transmission process of S3515. Thereby, the fluctuating effect in which the effect pattern is determined in the effect control unit 1150 is realized by the image sound control unit 1160 and the lamp control unit 1170.

  Subsequent to S3619, the CPU 1151 updates the number of suspensions of the first special symbol determination stored in the RAM 1153 to a value obtained by subtracting “1” (S3621).

  On the other hand, if the CPU 1151 determines that the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol is being executed (S3607: YES), the CPU 1151 determines whether or not a symbol determination command has been received from the main control unit 1100 (step 111). . If it is determined that the symbol confirmation command has not been received (S3623: NO), the process proceeds to S3505.

If the CPU 1151 determines that the symbol confirmation command has been received (S3623: YES)
), The change effect end command for instructing the end of the change effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol is set in the RAM 1153 (S3625).

  This variation effect end command is transmitted to the image sound control unit 1160 and the lamp control unit 1170 by the command transmission process of S3515. As a result, the fluctuating effect started in accordance with the process of S3619 is finished, and the decorative symbol indicating the result of the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 108.

  If the CPU 1151 executes the process of S3621 or determines that the change start command has not been received (S3609: NO), the CPU 1151 executes the following process related to the special game. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 36B, the CPU 1151 determines whether or not an opening command has been received from the main control unit 1100 (S3627).

  When it is determined that the opening command has been received (S3627: YES), the CPU 1151 executes a retry process (S3629). Details of the retry process will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, the CPU 1151 executes an input device abnormality detection process after the retry process (S3631). Details of the input device abnormality detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36-5.

  When the input device abnormality detection process ends, the CPU 1151 analyzes the opening command (S3633). Specifically, based on information included in the opening command, a process of determining whether the opening performed this time is related to a long hit game or a short hit game is performed.

  Based on the analysis result of S3633, the CPU 1151 determines whether or not the current opening is related to a long hit game (S3635). Here, if it is determined that the game pertains to a long hit game (see FIGS. 29A and 29C) (S3635: YES), an effect pattern of an opening effect to be performed during the opening is selected (S3637) and selected. An opening effect start command for instructing execution of the opening effect of the effect pattern thus set is set in the RAM 1153 (S3639).

  This opening effect start command is transmitted to the image sound control unit 1160 and the lamp control unit 1170 by the transmission process of S3515. As a result, an opening effect including an effect of notifying that the long hit game is started and an effect of prompting a right strike are performed.

  In the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, an effect using the latest song performed in the music performance effect is performed as the opening effect. Specifically, for example, when the performance performance of the new song A has already been performed but the performance performance of the new song B has not yet been performed, a part of the video of the new song A reproduced in the performance performance is used. Opening performance is performed. Further, for example, when the performance performance of the new song D has already been performed but the performance performance of the new song E has not yet been performed, the opening performance using a part of the video of the new song D reproduced in the performance performance of the song is performed. Done.

  In this way, since the opening effect is configured based on the video of the new song played in the music performance effect performed independently of the normal performance, the player can perform the opening effect every time the first music performance effect is performed. You can enjoy watching the content change. The processing performed by the image sound control unit 1160 in order to realize such a change in opening effect will be described in detail later.

  When the CPU 1151 determines that the current opening does not relate to the long win game (S3635: NO), that is, relates to the short win game (see FIG. 29B), the CPU 1151 starts from the short hit game opening. An effect pattern of a short hit effect performed until the end of ending is selected (S3641), and a short hit effect start command for instructing execution of the short hit effect of the selected effect pattern is set in the RAM 1153 (S3643).

This short hit effect start command is transmitted to the image sound control unit 1160 and the lamp control unit 1170 by the transmission processing of S3515, and a short hit effect including an effect for prompting a right-handed strike is performed.
As for the short win effect, as with the long hit game opening effect, each time the first music performance effect is performed, the effect is switched so as to use the video corresponding to the latest song, in order to realize this The processing performed by the image sound control unit 1160 will also be described in detail later.

  When the CPU 1151 determines that the opening command has not been received (S3627: NO), when the process of S3639 is executed, or when the process of S3643 is executed, it is transmitted from the main control unit 1100 at the start of the long open round game. It is determined whether a round start command to be received has been received (S3649).

When determining that the round start command has not been received (S3649: NO), the CPU 1151 determines whether a round end command has been received (S3645).
If it is determined that a round end command has been received (S3645: YES), an in-round effect end command is set (S3647).
On the other hand, if it is determined that a round start command has been received (S3649: YES), the received round start command is analyzed (S3651), and based on the analysis result, the current long open round game is the first in the game per 15R length. It is determined whether it is a long open round game (2R in FIG. 29C) (S3653).

  If the CPU 1151 determines that the game is the first long open round game (S3653: YES), it sets a music selection screen display command for instructing the image sound control unit 1160 to display a music selection screen in the RAM 1153 (S3655). . Here, the music selection screen is a screen that displays the music to be played during the period from the start of the 3R of the long hit game to the start of the ending effect, and the player operates the effect key 144. Thus, a desired new song can be selected. The music selection screen display command is transmitted to the image sound control unit 1160 by the command transmission process of S3515, whereby the music selection screen is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 108.

  When the CPU 1151 executes the process of S3655 or determines that it is not the first long open round game (S3653: NO), the round start command received this time is the next long open round game (FIG. 29C). It is determined whether or not to notify the start of 3R) (S3657). Here, when it is determined that the round start command is to notify the start of the next long open round game (S3657: YES), the player operates and selects the effect key 144 during the first long open round game. A music playback command for instructing the start of playback of the played music is set in the RAM 1153 (S3659).

  This music reproduction command is transmitted to the image sound control unit 1160 by the command transmission process of S3515. Thereby, the music selected by the player is played from the third round of the game per 15R length.

When the CPU 1151 executes the process of S3659 or determines that it is not the next long open round game (S3657: NO), the CPU 1151 responds to the number of continuations of the special game (number of consecutive changs) or the currently received round start command. The number of rounds is determined and an effect pattern during the round is selected (S3661), and an effect start command during round instructing the image sound control unit 1160 to execute the effect during the round of the selected effect pattern is set in the RAM 1153 (S3663). . As a result, the display indicating the current number of rounds displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 108 is updated.

  When the CPU 1151 determines that the round end command has not been received (S3645: NO), when the process of S3647 is executed, or when the process of S3663 is executed, as illustrated in FIG. Next, it is determined whether an ending command has been received from the main control unit 1100 (S3665). If it is determined that an ending command has been received (S3665: YES), a retry process is executed (S3666). Details of the retry process will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, the CPU 1151 executes an input device abnormality detection process after the retry process (S3667). Details of the input device abnormality detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36-5.

  When the input device abnormality detection process ends, the CPU 1151 analyzes the received ending command (S3668), and determines whether or not the ending is related to the end of the long hit game (S3669). Here, when it is determined that the game pertains to a long game (S3669: YES), an effect pattern for the ending effect is selected (S3670), and an ending effect for instructing execution of the ending effect of the selected effect pattern is started. The command is set in the RAM 1153 (S3671).

  This ending effect start command is transmitted to the image sound control unit 1160 by the command transmission process of S3515. Thus, as will be described in detail later, an ending effect using the same music image as the music used in the opening effect is performed.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 1151 determines that the ending is not related to the long win game (S3669: NO), that is, if it is an ending related to the short win game, the short hit effect started in accordance with the process of S3643 above. A short hit effect end command for instructing the end is set in the RAM 1153 (S3672).

This short win effect end command is transmitted to the image sound control unit 1160 by the command transmission process of S3515. As a result, the short win effect ends after the ending time has elapsed.

  When it is determined that the CPU 1151 has not received the ending command (S3665: NO), when the process of S3671 is executed, or when the process of S3672 is executed, whether or not a customer waiting command is received from the main control unit 1100 Is determined (S3673). If it is determined that the customer waiting command has been received (S3673: YES), measurement of the elapsed time since the customer waiting command was received is started (S3674), and the measurement flag stored in the RAM 1153 is set to “ON”. (S3675). This measurement flag is a flag indicating whether or not the elapsed time since reception of the customer waiting command is being measured.

  When determining that the customer waiting command has not been received (S3673: NO), the CPU 1151 determines whether or not the measurement flag is set to “ON” (S3676). If it is determined that the measurement flag is not set to “ON” (S3676: NO), a series of command reception processing ends, and the process proceeds to S3505.

When the CPU 1151 determines that the measurement flag is set to “ON” (S367).
6: YES), or when the process of S3675 is executed, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting determination time that defines the start timing of the customer waiting effect has elapsed (S3777). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time when the measurement is started in the process of S3674 has reached a customer waiting determination time (for example, 30 seconds) stored in the ROM 1152. If it is determined that the customer waiting determination time has not elapsed (S3777: NO), the process proceeds to S3505.

  If the CPU 1151 determines that the customer waiting determination time has elapsed (S3777: YES), the CPU 1151 sets the measurement flag to “OFF” (S3678), resets the elapsed time (S3679), and instructs the start of the customer waiting effect. A customer waiting effect start command is set in the RAM 1153 (S3680).

  This customer waiting effect start command is transmitted to the image sound control unit 1160 by the command transmission process of S3515. Thereby, a predetermined demonstration screen display waiting for the customer is started.

  In the command reception process of FIGS. 36-1 to 36-3, when any one of the illegal prize error 4 commands from the illegal prize error 1 command is received, each illegal prize error command is received. In response to this, an illegal prize display 1 command, an illegal prize display 2 command, an illegal prize display 3 command, or an illegal prize display 4 command is transmitted to the image sound control unit 1160 by command transmission processing. Further, an error light emission command is transmitted to the lamp control unit 1170, and the CPU of the lamp control unit 1170 that has received this error light emission command executes error light emission control according to this command.

[Retry processing and input device error detection processing]
FIG. 36-4 is a flowchart of the retry process performed by the CPU 1151. FIG. 36-5 is a flowchart of input device abnormality detection processing performed by the CPU 1151. 36-6 is a diagram for explaining the movable accessory abnormality occurrence information 3698 and the input device abnormality occurrence information 3699 stored in the FRAM 1155. FIG. First, the retry process executed in S3611, S3629, and S3666 of the command reception process in FIGS. 36-1 to 36-3 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 36-4 and 36-6.

  First, in S3681, the CPU 1151 performs abnormality determination. Here, based on the outputs of the position detection sensors 1157 (upper position detection sensor 1157a and lower position detection sensor 1157b), all the movable combinations (cup-shaped movable combination 196, sub liquid crystal display device 106, and logo combination) The origin position detection is performed to check whether or not the object 107) is at the origin position (home position). If one or more movable accessories are not at the origin position, it is determined that there is an abnormality, and all the movable combinations are at the origin. If it is in the position, it is determined that there is no abnormality.

  Specifically, as described with reference to FIG. 15-2 described above, when both the upper position detection sensor 1157a and the lower position detection sensor 1157b are in the light shielding state, the cup-shaped movable accessory 196 is It is considered that it is arranged at the origin position. Further, even when the upper position detection sensor 1157a is in the light shielding state, if the lower position detection sensor 1157b is in the light receiving state, it is considered that the cup-shaped movable accessory 196 is not disposed at the origin position. Therefore, when the CPU 1151 receives the signal indicating the light shielding state from the upper position detection sensor 1157a and the lower position detection sensor 1157b in the origin position detection of the cup-shaped movable accessory 196, the cup-shaped movable accessory 196 is the origin. When it is determined that the cup-shaped movable accessory 196 is not disposed at the origin position when it is determined that the cup-shaped movable accessory 196 is received from the lower position detection sensor 1157b. Similarly, the CPU 1151 also detects the origin position of the sub liquid crystal display device 106 and the logo accessory 107, and performs abnormality determination based on the origin position detection results of the three movable accessories.

When CPU 1151 does not determine that there is an abnormality in S3681, that is, when it is determined that all the movable combinations (cup-shaped movable combination 196, sub liquid crystal display device 106, and logo combination 107) are at the origin position. In (S3682: NO), the flow proceeds to S3683. In S3683, the CPU 1151 permits the operation of all movable accessories. Specifically, the accessory movable flag stored in the RAM 1153 is set to “ON”. Thereafter, the retry process is terminated.
On the other hand, if the CPU 1151 determines that there is an abnormality in S3681, that is, if it is determined that one or more movable accessories are not at the origin position (S3682: YES), the process proceeds to S3684.

  In S3684, CPU1151 performs a return process about the movable accessory determined not to be in an origin position in S3681. Specifically, the CPU 1151 controls the lamp control unit 1170 (movable accessory driving unit 1191) to drive the corresponding movable accessory by a predetermined amount in the advance position direction (see FIG. 15-1), and then the position. Driving in the home position direction (see FIG. 15-1) until the input value from the detection sensor 1157 is the home position (that is, the upper position detection sensor 1157a and the lower position detection sensor 1157b are both shielded). Let Thereafter, the process proceeds to S3585.

  In step S3685, the CPU 1151 performs abnormality determination again. That is, as in S3681, the CPU 1151 determines that there is an abnormality when even one movable accessory is not at the origin position based on the input value from the position detection sensor 1157, and all the movable accessories are at the origin position. It is determined that there is no abnormality.

When CPU 1151 does not determine that there is an abnormality in S3685, that is, when it is determined that all movable accessories (cup-shaped movable accessory 196, sub liquid crystal display device 106, and logo accessory 107) are at the origin position. In (S3686: NO), the process proceeds to S3683.
On the other hand, if the CPU 1151 determines that there is an abnormality in S3686, that is, if it is determined that one or more movable accessories are not at the origin position (S3686: YES), the process proceeds to S3687.

  In S3687, the CPU 1151 prohibits the operation of all the movable combinations and stops all the movable combinations. Specifically, the CPU 1151 sets the accessory movable flag stored in the RAM 1153 to “OFF”. In this case, the CPU 1151 has a drive amount larger than that required when the movable accessory moves from the maximum advanced position to the origin position with respect to the lamp controller 1170 (movable accessory drive unit 1191). The movable accessory retraction control may be performed in which the movable accessory is driven and stopped at a position exceeding the origin position from the advance direction. In other words, the CPU 1151 controls the lamp control unit 1170 (movable accessory driving unit 1191) to drive each movable accessory by a distance equal to or greater than the distance from the maximum advance position of the movable accessory to the origin position. Object evacuation control may be performed.

  Subsequently, in S3688, the CPU 1151 executes a movable accessory abnormality occurrence information storage process. Specifically, the CPU 1151 acquires current time information from the RTC 1154. The CPU 1151 obtains the acquired current time information (that is, abnormality occurrence time information indicating the time at which an abnormality has occurred in the movable accessory), all the movable accessories (the cup-shaped movable accessory 196, the sub liquid crystal display device 106, and the logo). Among the accessory 107), the movable accessory abnormality information 3698 indicating that there is a movable accessory that does not return to the origin position by the origin position detection is associated and stored in the FRAM 1155 as the movable accessory abnormality occurrence information 3698 ( (See FIG. 36-6). Thus, in the FRAM 1155, the accumulated movable accessory abnormality occurrence information 3698A in which the movable accessory abnormality occurrence information 3698 is accumulated is stored. After the process of S3688 ends, the retry process ends.

Subsequently, the input device abnormality detection process executed in S3613, S3631, and S3667 of the command reception process in FIGS. 36-1 to 36-3 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 36-5 and 36-6. To do.
First, in S3689, the CPU 1151 performs abnormality determination. Specifically, CPU 1151 determines whether or not there is an input signal from input device 145 (effect button 142 or effect key 144) for a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds). When there is an input signal continuously from the input device 145 for a predetermined time, the CPU 1151 determines that the input device 145 having the input signal is abnormal. For example, if there is an input signal from the effect button 142 for a predetermined time, the CPU 1151 determines that the effect button 142 is abnormal. On the other hand, if there is no input signal from the input device 145 for a predetermined time, the CPU 1151 determines that there is no abnormality.

If the CPU 1151 does not determine that there is an abnormality in S3690 (S3690: NO), the process proceeds to S3691. In S3691, the CPU 1151 permits the operation of the input device. Specifically, the input device movable flag stored in the RAM 1153 is set to “ON”. Thereafter, the input device abnormality detection process is terminated.
On the other hand, if the CPU 1151 determines that there is an abnormality in S3690 (S3690: YES), the CPU 1151 proceeds to S3692.

  In S3692, CPU 1151 prohibits the operation of input device 145 (effect button 142 and effect key 144). Specifically, the CPU 1151 sets the input device movable flag to “OFF”.

Subsequently, in S3693, the CPU 1151 executes input device abnormality occurrence information storage processing. Specifically, the CPU 1151 acquires current time information from the RTC 1154. The CPU 1151 inputs the acquired current time information (that is, abnormality occurrence time information indicating the time when an abnormality has occurred in the input device 145) and the input device 145 indicating an abnormality in the input device 145 determined to be abnormal in S3690. In association with the apparatus abnormality information, it is stored in the FRAM 1155 as input apparatus abnormality occurrence information 3699 (see FIG. 36-6). Thus, the FRAM 1155 stores the accumulated input device abnormality occurrence information 3699A in which the input device abnormality occurrence information 3699 is accumulated. After the process of S3693 ends, the input device abnormality detection process ends.

[Configuration Example of Control ROM 1244]
FIG. 37 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the control ROM 1244 of the image sound control unit 1160. As shown in FIG. 37, the control ROM 1244 stores a performance management table, a music performance performance order management table, a display list creation table, and a priority management table in addition to the program executed by the overall CPU 1241. .

  The performance management table is a table that defines the date and time for each new song to be shifted to a state in which execution of the first performance performance of the new song is permitted. The performance management table will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  The music performance performance order management table is a table that is referred to in order to perform the music performance performance while switching the music every hour after completion of the music performance performance of all new songs performed weekly. The music performance performance order management table will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. In the following description, the state in which this music performance performance order management table is used is referred to as “all songs open state”.

The display list creation table is stored in the main liquid crystal display device 108 or the sub liquid crystal display device 1.
It is an effect pattern table used for the process which determines the effect pattern of the effect performed in 06. Here, the process of determining the production pattern is to determine what image data is actually used to implement the production when the production of the production content decided by the production control unit 1150 is executed. It is processing.

  The display list creation table is a table used to create a display list stored in the display list storage area 1291. Mainly, the normal effect performed using the main liquid crystal display device 108 and the sub liquid crystal display device 106 are displayed. It is referred to to control the announcement effect performed using. In this embodiment, the display list creation table is a default table, a new song A main table, a new song B main table, a new song C main table, a new song D main table, a new song E main table, a new song F main table, a new song G main table, A new song H main table, a new song I main table, a new song J main table, a new song K main table, a new song L main table, and a dot effect table.

  The default table is a table used before the initial performance performance of the new song A is performed. The new song A main table is a table used until the first song performance effect of the new song B is performed after the first song performance effect of the new song A is performed. The new song B main table is a table that is used after the first song performance effect of the new song B is performed until the first song performance effect of the new song C is performed. The new song C main table is a table used until the first song performance effect of the new song D is performed after the first song performance effect of the new song C is performed. The new song E main table is a table used until the first song performance effect of the new song F is performed after the first song performance effect of the new song E is performed. The new song F main table is a table used until the first song performance effect of the new song G is performed after the first song performance effect of the new song F is performed. The new song G main table is a table that is used until the first song performance effect of the new song H is performed after the first song performance effect of the new song G is performed. The new song H main table is a table used until the first song performance effect of the new song I is performed after the first song performance effect of the new song H is performed. The new song I main table is a table that is used from when the first song performance effect of the new song I is performed until the first song performance effect of the new song J is performed. The new song J main table is a table that is used until the first song performance effect of the new song K is performed after the first song performance effect of the new song J is performed. The new song K main table is a table that is used after the first song performance effect of the new song K is performed until the first song performance effect of the new song L is performed. The new song L main table is a table used for one week from when the first song performance performance of the new song L is performed until all songs are released. Thus, the new song A main table to the new song L main table are tables that are used for a predetermined week. In the all-music release state, a normal performance is performed while switching these display list creation tables every hour.

The dot effect table is a table used when performing a normal effect in dot display in the lower area A2. In other words, the dot effect table is a table used during a performance announcement effect or a music performance effect.
The overall CPU 1241 creates a display list using any of the 14 tables constituting the performance management table and the display list creation table before all songs are released. Then, in a state where all songs are released, a display list is created using either the music performance performance order management table or the 14 tables. A method for creating such a display list will be described in detail later.

The priority management table shown in FIG. 37 sets priorities for various effects (or various displays) executed in the special effect mode (mode in which the performance announcement effect or the music performance effect is executed). By giving priority to the performance (or display) with the highest priority over other performances or notifications, it is optimal for the player (in some cases, the game hall staff) at that time. It is a table used in order to preferentially execute a possible presentation (or display).
The priority management table includes an image output control process, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 71, a sound output control process, which will be described later with reference to FIG. Used in processing.
Since the CPU of the lamp control unit 1170 is not directly connected to the overall CPU 1241, the CPU 1151 that has transmitted the data indicating the priority through the CPU 1151 of the effect control unit 1150 and has received the data indicating the priority is S3515. The data indicating the priority is transmitted to the CPU of the lamp control unit 1170 by a data transmission process different from the command transmission process.

This priority management table is composed of eight layers from the first layer, which is the lowest layer with the lowest priority, to the eighth layer, which is the highest layer with the highest priority. It is a table in which effects or displays belonging to each layer are defined in association with each other.
Basically, the priority is defined based on an effect or display that the player (in some cases, a game hall staff member) is most interested in at that time.

  Here, the priority output processing of an image based on the priority of each layer from the lowest first layer to the highest eighth layer defined in the priority management table will be described. As an image output control process executed based on the priority management table, there is an image output control pattern shown below. This process corresponds to priority determination means.

  First, in the case where the time for displaying an image related to an effect (or display) belonging to one layer and an image related to an effect (or display) belonging to another (one or more) layers overlap, An image output control pattern 1 for performing image output control only on an image related to an effect (or display) belonging to a layer having the highest priority.

  Next, in the case where the time for displaying the image related to the effect (or display) belonging to one layer and the image related to the effect (or display) belonging to another (one or more) layers overlap, An image related to an effect (or display) belonging to the highest priority layer is displayed prominently when viewed from the player (in some cases, a game hall staff), and an effect belonging to a layer other than the highest priority layer An image output control pattern 2 for performing image output control on the image relating to (or display) with a simplified image using a dot image.

  And when the time which displays the image concerning the production (or display) belonging to one layer and the image concerning the production (or display) belonging to the other (one or more) layers overlaps, An image related to an effect (or display) belonging to the layer with the highest priority is displayed conspicuously when viewed from the player (in some cases a game hall staff), and an effect belonging to a layer other than the layer with the highest priority ( Or an output control pattern 3 for performing output control with a reduced image or a simplified image by displaying only a minimum image.

Therefore, in the case where an image related to an effect (or display) belonging to one layer and an image related to an effect (or display) belonging to another (one or more) layers overlap, each selected layer By comparing the priorities of the images, the image related to the production (or display) belonging to the layer with the highest priority among them is displayed conspicuously from the player, while belonging to the layer with the lower priority There are cases where the image related to the effect (or display) is not displayed at all (image output control pattern 1), and the case where the image is displayed as a simplified image (image output control patterns 2 and 3).
The simplified image by the dot image and the simplified image by displaying only the reduced image or the minimum image correspond to the second mode, and modes other than the second mode correspond to the first mode.

The priority management table shown in FIG. 37 includes the effects (or display) contents belonging to the first layer,
[1] Customer waiting effect [2] There is a variable effect stop display when the number of reserved memories is 0, and both the image related to [1] and the image related to [2] are basically effects belonging to the upper layer (Or display) is set to a non-display state (image output control pattern 1). However, when the image related to [2] overlaps with an image related to an effect (or display) belonging to a fourth layer (special effect) described later, it is displayed as a simplified image as a dot image in the lower area A2 ( Image output control pattern 2). At this time, the image output control pattern 3 may be adopted.

As production (or display) contents belonging to the second layer,
[1] There is a menu screen display in the normal effect mode, and an image (control pattern 1) that is in a non-display state by an image related to an effect (or display) belonging to the higher layer is an effect (or a fourth layer described later) (or The menu screen image in the case where it overlaps with the image related to (display) (special effect image) may be a higher layer than the image related to effect (or display) belonging to the fourth layer (special effect image) under a predetermined condition. is there. This case will be described later.

As production (or display) contents belonging to the third layer,
[1] Fluctuation effect that starts changing after the start of the special effect, and display of the number of reserved memories at that time [2] There is an effect during the round that does not include the promotion effect during the jackpot game, and the image related to [1] will be described later When the image (special effect image) related to the effect (or display) belonging to the fourth layer to be overlapped is displayed as a simplified image as a dot image in the lower area A2 (image output control pattern 2). At this time, the image output control pattern 3 may be adopted.
When the image related to [2] overlaps with the image (special effect image) related to the effect (or display) belonging to the fourth layer described later, it is a simplified image with an image of the minimum information (round number image). Displayed (image output control pattern 3). At this time, the image output control pattern 1 may be adopted.

As production (or display) contents belonging to the fourth layer,
[1] Performance announcement effect [2] There is a music performance effect, and the image according to [1] and the image according to [2] are basically displayed in the upper area A1. However, when it overlaps with an image related to the effect (or display) belonging to the fifth layer, which will be described later, the image related to the effect (or display) belonging to the fifth layer is hidden (image output control pattern 1).
Further, when the image overlaps with an image related to an effect (or display) belonging to the sixth layer described later, it is displayed as a simplified image as a reduced image (image output control pattern 3).
In the present embodiment, special effect images (performance announcement effect images, music performance effect images) relating to special effects (performance announcement effects, music performance effects) that are effects during these special effect modes are executed during the special effect mode. Even in the production, the priority is not always set at the highest level.

As production (or display) contents belonging to the fifth layer,
[1] The menu screen display during the special effect mode and when the variable effect is stopped. Even in the same menu screen display, as described above, the normal effect mode is set to the lower second layer while the special effect mode. The mode is in progress and the change is stopped (the number of stored memories is 0)
In this case, the image (special effect) related to the effect (or display) belonging to the fourth layer is set because the layer is set higher than the image (special effect image) related to the effect (or display) belonging to the fourth layer. When the image related to the effect (or display) belonging to the fifth layer overlaps, the image (special effect image) related to the effect (or display) belonging to the fourth layer is not displayed (image output control pattern 1). At this time, the image output control pattern 3 may be adopted.

As production (or display) contents belonging to the sixth layer,
[1] Opening effect during jackpot game [2] Round effect including promotion effect during jackpot game [3] Fluctuation effect that has started to fluctuate before the start of special effect + Hold memory number display, The image related to the effect (or display) belonging to the image is executed only with the image (special effect) related to the effect (or display) belonging to the fourth layer among the images related to the effect (or display) belonging to the lower layer. Time may overlap.
In this case, when the image related to [1] and the image related to [2] overlap, the image (special effect image) related to the effect (or display) belonging to the fourth layer is displayed as a simplified image as a reduced image. (Image output control pattern 3).
In addition, when an image related to [3] overlaps, or when a later-described partition is set for the image related to [3], an image (special effect) related to an effect (or display) belonging to the fourth layer after the partition ) Is displayed as a simplified image as a reduced image (image output control pattern 3). On the other hand, if no delimiter is set, the effect (or display) belonging to the fourth layer until the image display according to [3] is completed. ) Related images (special effects) are not displayed (image output control pattern 1).
The effect (or display) belonging to the sixth layer corresponds to the second effect.

As production (or display) contents belonging to the seventh layer,
[1] Jackpot confirmation effect [2] Jackpot end display in ending effect during jackpot game [3] CI display in ending effect during jackpot game [4] Card return promotion display in ending effect during jackpot game The image related to the effect (or display) belonging to the seventh layer is only executed with the image (special effect) related to the effect (or display) belonging to the fourth layer among the images related to the effect (or display) belonging to the lower layer. May overlap.
In this case, an image (special effect) related to the effect (or display) belonging to the fourth layer
Is not displayed until the image display related to the effect (or display) belonging to the seventh layer is completed (image output control pattern 1). At this time, the image output control pattern 3 may be adopted.
The effect (or display) belonging to the seventh layer corresponds to the second effect.

As production (or display) contents belonging to the eighth layer,
[1] There are various error indications due to radio wave detection, magnetic detection, fraudulent winning, etc., and all the images related to the effect (or display) belonging to the eighth layer have the highest priority in the layer, and the effect belonging to the lower layer (or The image related to (display) is not displayed until the image display related to the effect (or display) belonging to the eighth layer ends (image output control pattern 1). At this time, the image output control pattern 3 may be adopted.
Thus, since the image related to the effect (or display) belonging to the eighth layer is an image related to various error displays, it belongs to the highest layer.
In addition to the method of displaying the dot image, the reduced image, or the minimum information image as the simplified image, for example, a part of the game effect image displayed during the normal effect mode (for example, the background image) Alternatively, an image (for example, only the decorative pattern P12) thinned out may be displayed as a simplified image.

[Timer interrupt processing by image sound control unit 1160]
Next, timer interrupt processing executed in the image sound control unit 1160 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interruption processing executed in the image sound control unit 1160. The image sound control unit 1160 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 38 at regular intervals (for example, 33 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on and when the power is turned off. To do.

  First, the overall CPU 1241 of the image sound control unit 1160 executes RTC information acquisition processing for acquiring RTC information from the RTC 1154 of the effect control unit 1150 and storing it in the control RAM 1245 (S3801). The RTC information stored in the control RAM 1245 is rewritten to the newly acquired RTC information every time the process of S3801 is performed.

Subsequent to the process of S3801, the overall CPU 1241 executes a measurement process for measuring an elapsed time since the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on (S3805). The overall CPU 1241 starts a performance announcement effect and a music performance effect based on the measurement result of S3805. This measurement process will be described in detail later based on FIG.
Subsequent to the process of S3805, the overall CPU 1241 executes a state control process for determining whether or not the execution of the initial music performance effect of each new song is permitted (S3810). This state control process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the process of S3810, the overall CPU 1241 executes a notification effect control process for controlling the notification effect performed using the sub liquid crystal display device 106 (S3815). The notification effect control process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the process of S3815, the overall CPU 1241 executes a performance notification effect control process for controlling the performance notification effect performed prior to the music performance effect using the main liquid crystal display device 108 (S3820). This performance announcement effect control process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 45 and FIG.

  Subsequent to the process of S3820, the overall CPU 1241 executes a music performance effect start process for starting a music performance effect performed using the main liquid crystal display device 108 (S3825). This music performance effect start processing is performed separately from the game information from the main control unit 1100 on the main liquid crystal display device 108 that is executing a normal effect (a variation effect associated with a special symbol variation display or a hit effect associated with a special game). This is a process for starting the above-mentioned music performance effect based on information stored in advance in the control ROM 1244. The music performance production start process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the process of S3825, the overall CPU 1241 executes a normal effect control process for controlling a normal effect performed using the main liquid crystal display device 108 (S3830). This normal effect control process is a process for causing the main liquid crystal display device 108 to execute a normal effect in accordance with the game controlled by the main control unit 1100 based on the game information from the main control unit 1100. The normal effect control process will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

Subsequent to the process of S3830, the overall CPU 1241 executes a music performance effect end process for ending the music performance effect started in response to the music performance effect start process of S3825 (S3835). This music performance effect end processing will be described in detail later based on FIG.
Following the processing of S3835, the overall CPU 1241 creates the main liquid crystal display list and / or the sub liquid crystal display list based on the results of the processing of S3815 to S3835 and sets them in the display list storage area 1291. The process is executed (S3840). The image output control process will be described later in detail based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the process of S3840, the overall CPU 1241 executes an audio output control process for outputting music, audio, or the like from the speaker 138 so as to be synchronized with a display effect performed in the main liquid crystal display device 108 or the sub liquid crystal display device 106. (S3845). This audio output control process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the process of S3845, the overall CPU 1241 executes a data transmission control process (S3850). Specifically, data related to image sound control performed by the image sound control unit 1160 is transmitted to the effect control unit 1150. In response to this, the effect control unit 1150 transfers the data received from the image sound control unit 1160 to the lamp control unit 1170. Accordingly, the frame lamp 141 and the logo accessory 107 are controlled so as to be synchronized with the effects performed by the main liquid crystal display device 108, the sub liquid crystal display device 106, and the speaker 138.

[Measurement Processing by Image Sound Control Unit 1160]
FIG. 39 is a detailed flowchart of the measurement process in S3805 of FIG. Subsequent to the RTC information acquisition process in S3801, the overall CPU 1241 updates the interrupt processing count N in the image sound control unit 1160 stored in the control RAM 1245 to a value obtained by adding “1” as illustrated in FIG. (S3901). By performing the process of S3901 every time an interrupt process is performed in the image sound control unit 1160, the elapsed time since the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on is measured.

  Subsequent to S3901, the overall CPU 1241 determines whether or not it is the start time of the performance announcement effect (S3905). Specifically, in this embodiment, the first set time for determining whether or not a predetermined time before the start time of the music performance effect (1 minute before in this embodiment) is set to 59 minutes. Therefore, the elapsed time is calculated by multiplying the interrupt processing time interval (33 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in the image sound control unit 1160 by the interrupt processing count N stored in the control RAM 1245 to calculate the elapsed time. It is determined whether or not it is the start time of the performance announcement effect based on whether or not has reached 59 minutes.

  Here, the start time of the performance announcement effect is not necessarily the time at which the performance announcement effect is started, but is the time to permit the start of the performance announcement effect. That is, the performance announcement effect may be started immediately when the start time is reached, or may be started after 40 seconds elapses from the start time, depending on the execution state of the normal effect. Also, depending on the execution status of the normal performance, the performance announcement performance may not be performed. The performance announcement effect control process for controlling such a performance announcement effect will be described in detail later.

  If the overall CPU 1241 determines that it is the start time of the performance announcement effect (S3905: YES), the overall CPU 1241 sets the performance notification flag stored in the control RAM 1245 to “ON” (S3910). This performance notification flag is a flag indicating whether or not the start time of the performance announcement effect has been reached, and is set to “ON” when the start time of the performance notification effect is reached, and “OFF” when the music performance effect is started. Set to

When the overall CPU 1241 executes the process of S3910 or determines that it is not the start time of the performance announcement effect (S3905: NO), the overall CPU 1241 determines whether it is the start time of the music performance effect (S3915). Specifically, in the present embodiment, since the second set time for determining whether or not it is the start time of the music performance effect is set to 1 hour, the calculation is performed by the same method as the process of S3905. Based on whether or not the elapsed time has reached 1 hour, it is determined whether or not it is the start time of the musical performance performance. If it is determined that the start time of the music performance effect is not reached (S3915: NO), the process proceeds to the state control process of S3810.

  If the overall CPU 1241 determines that it is the start time of the music performance effect (S3915: YES), the overall CPU 1241 sets the music performance flag stored in the control RAM 1245 to “ON” (S3920). Here, the music performance flag is a flag indicating whether or not the music performance production start time has come, and is set to “ON” when the music performance production start time is reached, and “OFF” when the music performance production is started. "Is set.

  In this way, the overall CPU 1241 has a second set time (1 hour in the present embodiment) that defines the elapsed time during measurement and the start timing of the performance of the music performance, regardless of the various commands transmitted from the main control unit 1100. The start timing of the music performance effect is determined based on whether or not the music performance effect has been reached, and the music performance effect is started on the main liquid crystal display device 108 and the speaker 138 by setting the music performance flag to “ON” at the determined start timing. Let The music performance production start control process for starting the music performance production will be described in detail later.

Subsequent to the processing of S3920, the overall CPU 1241 resets the interrupt processing count N stored in the control RAM 1245 (S3925). As described above, in this embodiment, when the elapsed time measured by repeating the process of S3901 reaches 1 hour, the elapsed time is measured again after the interrupt processing count N is returned to “0”. For this reason, a musical performance performance is performed every hour.
In the present embodiment, the case where the second set time is set to 1 hour has been described, but the second set time may be a time other than 1 hour. Further, the second setting time is not necessarily one, and for example, different second setting times may be set according to the type of new song used for the music performance performance. By adopting this configuration, the time interval at which the music performance performance is performed can be made different for each new song. Also, the first set time may be a time other than 59 minutes.

  Subsequent to S3925, the overall CPU 1241 determines whether or not all songs are open (S3930). Specifically, all songs will be released on February 22, 2014, one week after February 15, 2014 (see FIG. 40), when the first song performance of the new song L, which will be the last performance of the song, will be performed. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the current date indicated by the RTC information acquired from the RTC 1154 is a date after February 22, which is the start date of the transition to the all-music release state. Here, when it is determined that the state is not the all-music release state (S3930: NO), the process proceeds to the state control process of S3810.

  If the overall CPU 1241 determines that all songs are released (S3930: YES), the overall CPU 1241 updates the reset processing count P stored in the control RAM 1245 to a value obtained by adding “1” (S3935). The number of reset processes P indicates the number of times the reset process of S3925 has been performed. In the present embodiment, since the process of S3925 is performed every time one hour has elapsed with respect to the time when the power is turned on, the reset process count P is the same as that of the gaming machine 1 at the timing when the reset process count P is updated. This is the same as the elapsed time since the power was turned on. For this reason, for example, if the reset processing count P is “1”, it can be determined that one hour has elapsed since the power was turned on, and if it is “2”, it can be determined that two hours have elapsed. . This reset processing count P is used in the music performance effect start process of S3825 in order to determine the type of new music used for the music performance effect that is started every hour in the state where all songs are released.

[Performance management table]
FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the performance management table. As illustrated in FIG. 40, the performance management table includes a new song type indicating the type of new song, a first song performance production date that is a date for performing the first song performance production, and a new song corresponding to the first song performance production date. Are stored in association with each new song, which is the time at which the first song performance effect is permitted to be executed.

  For example, for the new song A, at 12:00 (noon) on November 30, 2013, the internal state related to the music performance production is shifted to the music performance production permission state, and then the first music performance production of the new song A is started. Is stipulated. Also, for example, for new song B, at 12 o'clock (noon) on December 7, 2013, the internal state related to the song performance production is shifted to the song performance production permission state, and then the first song performance production of the new song B is started. It is stipulated that In the present embodiment, since the music performance flag is set to “ON” every hour based on the time when the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the music performance performance permission state of the new music A is set to 12 on November 30, 2013. The music performance effect of the new song A is repeated every hour for one week from 12:00 to 12:00 on December 7 of the same year when the song performance effect of the new song B is permitted. This is the same for the new songs B to L, except that the periods in which the music performance effect is permitted differ.

  Note that the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment uses the normal liquid crystal display device 108, the performance announcement effect, and the sub liquid crystal display device 106, triggered by the first performance of the music performance. There is a feature that the content of the effect of the announcement effect to be performed changes.

  For example, when the first performance performance of the new song A is performed, the content of the performance of each performance changes as follows. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 40, as the background image displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 108, only the default background image appeared until the first song performance performance of the new song A was performed. After the first music performance effect is performed, a new song A background image created using image data related to the new song A appears. The same applies to new songs after the new song B.

  Also, in the opening of the long hit game, the default opening production was performed until the first song performance production of the new song A. The first song performance of the new song B after the first song performance production of the new song A was performed. Until the performance performance is performed, an opening performance using image data and sound data related to the new song A is performed. The same applies to the ending effect of the long hit game. In this way, the opening effect and the ending effect in the long hit game are fixed to those based on the new song used for the current music performance effect until the first music performance effect of the next new song to be performed is performed. . That is, for example, after the first music performance effect of the new song C is performed until the first music performance effect of the new song D is performed, the opening effect and the ending effect of the new song C specification are performed.

  In addition, in the selection of the music to be played in the 15R long game, only the default music can be selected until the first music performance performance of the new music A, but the first music performance performance of the new music A is performed. After that, the new song A can be selected. The same applies to new songs after the new song B, and every time the first song performance effect is performed, new songs that can be selected by the player in the song selection increase. For this reason, for example, the first song performance of the new song L is that only three songs, the default song, the new song A, and the new song B, can be selected for one week after the first song performance performance of the new song B is performed. After the performance is performed, it is possible to select a default song and 13 songs including the new songs A to L.

  In addition, the performance announcement announcement was not performed until the start of the first song performance production of the new song A, but the document video of the new song A is played immediately before the start of the first song performance production of the new song B. The performance announcement effect to be performed is executed prior to the performance of the music performance every time the performance performance of the new song A is performed. The same applies to the new songs after the new song G. When the performance of the music performance is performed, the performance announcement effect corresponding to the new music used for the performance of the music performance is performed.

  In addition, the performance of the new song A is performed every other hour for one week after the first performance of the new song A is performed, and the performance of the new song B is performed when one week elapses. For this reason, during the period from the initial performance performance of the new song A until the initial performance performance of the new song B is performed, the sub liquid crystal display device 106 displays the notification performance related to the performance performance of the new song A (for example, FIG. 9). (See (C)), or a notification effect (see FIG. 9D) regarding the performance of the new song B is performed. The same applies to new songs after the new song C.

  Up to this point, how the production changes with the first music performance production has been briefly described. However, in the present embodiment, the change in the production is a display list creation table (used to create a display list) ( This is realized by switching (see FIG. 37).

In the present embodiment, a case is described in which the intervals from the first performance performance date to the first new performance performance date of the next new song are all set to one week, but this interval is an interval other than one week. Alternatively, a plurality of types of intervals may be set. Moreover, although this embodiment demonstrates the case where the first music performance production permission time is unified about 12:00 regarding all the new music, you may set different first music performance performance permission time for every new music. Also, the order of performance of the new music may be the order of performance other than the order of performance of the music illustrated in the performance management table.
On November 30, 2013, the musical performance performance (new song A) is in a musical performance performance permission state, and on December 7, 2013, the musical performance performance (new song B) is in a musical performance performance permission state. In addition, since the contents of the special performance differ depending on the week, it is difficult to get the player bored.

[State Control Processing by Image Sound Control Unit 1160]
FIG. 41 is a detailed flowchart of the state control process in S3810 of FIG. Subsequent to the measurement process of S3805, the overall CPU 1241 determines whether or not all songs are released, similar to the process of S3930 (S4101). Here, if it is determined that all songs are released (S4101: YES), the process proceeds to the notification effect control process in S3815.

  If the overall CPU 1241 determines that all songs are not open (S4101: NO), the overall CPU 1241 determines whether the current date is the first performance performance date (S4102). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current date indicated by the RTC information coincides with any of the initial performance performance dates of the new songs A to L defined in the performance management table. Here, when it is determined that it is not the first music performance effect date (S4102: NO), that is, when it is not the first music performance effect date of any new song, the process proceeds to the notification effect control process in S3815.

If the overall CPU 1241 determines that it is the first musical performance performance date (S4102: YES), it determines whether or not the current time is the first musical performance performance permission time (S4103). Specifically, the first musical performance performance permission time corresponding to the current date corresponding to the first musical performance performance date of any new song is read from the performance management table, and the current time indicated by the RTC information is read. It is determined whether or not the production permission time has come. In this embodiment, since the first music performance effect permission time is set to 12:00 for all new songs, it is determined in this S4103 whether or not the time indicated by the RTC information is 12:00. become. If it is determined in S4103 that the first music performance effect permission time has not come (S4103: NO), the process proceeds to the notification effect control process in S3815.

  If the overall CPU 1241 determines that the first performance performance permission time has come (S4103: YES), it sets the performance performance permission flag stored in the control RAM 1245 to “ON” (S4104). This music performance directing permission flag is a flag indicating whether or not the music performance directing permission state is set to permit execution of the first music performance directing of the new music to be performed next to the new music currently being performed. It is set to “ON” when the first music performance production permission time of any of the first music performance production dates specified in the table is reached, and “OFF” when the music performance production is started with “ON” set. "Is set.

[Music performance performance permission status]
FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a musical performance performance permission state. In the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, as described above, the elapsed time is measured based on the time when the power is turned on. Therefore, assuming that the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on around 8:00 am and the pachinko hall opens at 10:00 am, for example, on the first song performance production date on July 7, which is the first song performance production date for the new song A The count of the reset process in S3925 (see FIG. 39) is counted, and the first song performance performance of the new song A is triggered when the counted number reaches “4” (4 hours have passed since the power was turned on). By adopting the configuration of starting, it is possible to perform the first performance performance of the new song A around 12:00 (noon) (see FIG. 42A).

  However, this configuration causes the following problems. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 42B, when the hall clerk turns on the power at around 5 am, the first song of the new song A at around 9 am before 10 am when the pachinko hall opens. As a result, there is a problem that the player cannot enjoy the first music performance performance of the new song A, which is a trigger for newly appearing various effects related to the new song A. In addition, the same problem may occur when the gaming machine 1 is still turned on from the day before the first performance performance date.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the music performance effect permission flag is set to “ON” on condition that the current time indicated by the RTC information is a preset time (first music performance effect permission time), and the music performance effect is set. On the condition that the music performance flag is set to “ON” while the permission flag is set to “ON”, the first performance performance is performed, while the music performance flag is set to “OFF”. When “ON” is set to “ON”, the first music performance effect is not executed (if there is a new song that has already been performed, the music performance effect of the new song is executed).

  With this configuration, as illustrated in FIG. 42 (C), even if the gaming machine 1 is turned on at about 5 am, which is different from the assumption, First, when the music performance flag is “ON”, the first music performance effect of the new music A can be started. In addition, control of such a music performance directing permission state is performed similarly about new music other than the new music A.

[Music performance stage management table]
FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram for describing a music performance performance order management table. The music performance performance order management table is a table for managing the type of new music used for the music performance performance in the open state of all music. In the music performance performance order management table, as illustrated in FIG. 43, for each date after 2/22, which is the first day of the state where all songs are open, the elapsed time from the power-on of the gaming machine 1 and the music performance performance. The type of new song to be used is associated. In the present embodiment, a case where the music performance performance order management table is configured assuming that the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on around 8:00 am will be described as an example.

When all songs are released, the period during which the performance of each song is performed is shortened from one week to one hour. As a result, the performance performances of the new songs A to L performed over 84 days (= 1 week × 12 songs) before the entire song is released are performed in one day.
For example, if the power is turned on at around 8 am on February 22, the performance of the new song A will be performed at about 10 am 2 hours later, and the new song B will be produced at 11 am 3 hours later. A musical performance performance is performed, and a musical performance performance of the new song C is performed around 12:00 four hours later. Then, the performance of the new song J will be performed at around 19:00, 11 hours later, the performance of the new song K will be performed at around 20:00, 12 hours later, and the song of the new song L will be performed at 21:00, 13 hours later. Performance performance will be performed.

  By the way, after February 23, if the performance of the music performance is performed on the same schedule as February 22, no matter what day the player plays, the game continues from the opening to closing of the pachinko hall. If so, you can enjoy the performance performance of all new songs. However, some players can only play during a specific time period. On the other hand, if you perform music performances with the same schedule as described above, even if you continue to play every day, The problem arises that it is not possible to enjoy the performance performance of all new songs. For example, on February 22, if a player starts playing at about 18:00, he can enjoy the performances of the new songs I to L, but cannot enjoy the performances of the new songs A to H. .

  For this reason, in this embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 43, the song order of the new song is defined in advance so that the song order of the new song used for the performance of the song is regularly shifted one by one. Yes. For this reason, for example, the performance performance of the new song A and the new song B, which could only be enjoyed in the morning of February 22, will be performed after 18:00 on February 24. For this reason, even a player who can play only during a specific time period as described above can enjoy the performance performance of all new songs by continuing to go to the pachinko hall to some extent. The control of the music performance effect in such a state where all songs are released will be described in detail later based on FIG.

As described above with reference to FIG. 43, when 2/22 is reached and all songs are released, new songs to be performed in the music performance production are changed every time based on the music performance production order management table. . Therefore, the special performance is changed every time.
In addition, in the music performance production order management table, the content of the new song is changed every time the performance of the music performance production is performed, but this is not limiting, for example, 2/22 performs the music performance production of the new song A every time, On 2/23, the performance performance of the new song B is performed every time, and the content of the performance of the performance performance may be changed daily. In addition, in 2/22, a new song A flows every time during the performance of the music performance, but the image of the new music A is changed only in a part of the performance performance of the music performance such as A-1, A-2. May be. Further, although the new song is changed every time, the image of the new song A may be displayed every time.

  Also, on 2/22, the first music performance production starts with the new song A, and the last music performance production ends with the new music L. On 2/23, the first music performance production starts with the new music B, and the last music performance production. Even if all songs are released, such as ending with a new song A, the contents (schedule) of special effects differ depending on the date, making it difficult for the player to get bored.

  In addition, when all songs are released, the next performance announcement performance is performed for 5 seconds as part of the performance performance after the performance performance is finished and then the next performance performance (1 hour later) is announced. Become so. Therefore, the player can recognize the contents of the performance of the next music performance effect after the end of the current music performance effect.

[Notification Effect Control Processing by Image Sound Control Unit 1160]
FIG. 44 is a detailed flowchart of the notification effect control process in S3815 of FIG. The notification effect control process is a process for controlling the notification effect performed using the sub liquid crystal display device 106.

  Subsequent to the state control process in S3810, the overall CPU 1241 determines whether or not all songs are released as in the process in S3930 as illustrated in FIG. 44 (S4401). Here, when it is determined that all songs are in an open state (S4401: YES), specific processing for executing the notification effect is not performed, and the process proceeds to the performance notification effect control process of S3820. This is illustrated in FIG. 9 because in a state where all the songs are open, the performance of the music performance is performed every hour, the new music used is changed each time, and there is no new music that has not been performed yet. This is because it is not always necessary to perform a notice presentation.

  If the overall CPU 1241 determines that it is not in the state where all songs are released (S4401: NO), for example, based on the processing status of the VDP 1242, it determines whether or not the music performance effect is being executed (S4402). Here, when it is determined that the music performance effect is not being executed (S4402: NO), for example, based on the processing status of the VDP 1242, a notification effect including a countdown display of the remaining time until the music performance effect is started (FIG. 9 (C)) is determined (S4403). If it is determined that the notification effect including the countdown display is being executed (S4403: YES), the process proceeds to the performance notification effect control process in S3820.

  If the overall CPU 1241 determines that the announcement effect including the countdown display is not being executed (S4403: NO), for example, based on the interrupt processing count N counted up in the process of S3901, the start time of the music performance effect is determined. It is determined whether it is a predetermined time before (for example, 15 minutes before) (S4404).

  If the overall CPU 1241 determines that it is a predetermined time ago (S4404: YES), it controls setting information (including information indicating the remaining time) for causing the sub liquid crystal display device 106 to start a notification effect including a countdown display. The RAM 1245 is set (S4405). Based on this setting information, a display list for the sub liquid crystal is created and stored in the display list storage area 1291, so that the title of the new song to be performed is announced, and the performance of the new song is started. The remaining time until the display is counted down (see FIG. 9C).

  If the overall CPU 1241 determines that it is not a predetermined time before the music performance effect (S4404: NO), the overall CPU 1241 executes the following processing in order to perform a notification effect related to the new song to be performed next to the current latest song. That is, the overall CPU 1241 determines whether or not it is the first musical performance performance date as in the process of S4102 (see FIG. 41) (S4406).

If the overall CPU 1241 determines that it is not the first performance performance date (S4406: NO), the sub-liquid crystal display device displays a notification effect including an effect to notify the remaining days until the first performance performance date of the new song to be performed next. Setting information to be executed by the CPU 106 is set in the control RAM 1245 (S4407). Specifically, first, the current date is specified based on the RTC information. Then, the performance management table (see FIG. 40) is referred to, and the first music performance performance date that is later than the current date and closest to the current date is specified. The first performance performance date specified in this way is the first performance performance date of the new song to be performed next. For example, if the current date is November 29, 2013, the first performance performance date corresponding to the above-mentioned conditions is November 30, 2013, and it is determined that the next new performance is the new song A. can do. When the overall CPU 1241 specifies the first music performance stage date in this way, the overall CPU 1241 calculates the number of days from the current date to the specified first music performance stage date. In the example described here, the number of days “1” is calculated. In this way, the overall CPU 1241 acquires the type of the new song to be performed next (the name of the song here) and the number of days until the first performance performance of the new song is performed based on the RTC information and the performance management table. To do. And the setting information of the notification effect corresponding to these acquired information is set. Based on this setting information, a display list for the sub liquid crystal is created and stored in the display list storage area 1291 so that the title of the new song to be performed next and the remaining days until the first music performance stage date of the new song Will be notified (see FIG. 9A).

  If the overall CPU 1241 determines that it is the first music performance effect date (S4406: YES), the sub-liquid crystal display displays a notification effect including an effect that informs that the first music performance effect, which is an unperformed music performance effect, will be performed today. Setting information to be executed by the device 106 is set in the control RAM 1245 (S4408). Specifically, the same processing as in S4406 described above is performed to acquire the type (song name) of the new song to be performed next, and the setting information of the notification effect corresponding to this information is set. Based on this setting information, a display list for the sub liquid crystal is created and stored in the display list storage area 1291, so that the title of the unperformed song and the performance performance of the unperformed song are announced today. (See FIG. 9B).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the music performance effect is being executed (S4402: YES), the overall CPU 1241 determines whether or not the music performance effect has ended (S4410) based on the processing status of the VDP 1242, for example. If it is determined that the music performance effect has not ended (S4410: NO), the process proceeds to the performance notification effect control process in S3820.

  If the overall CPU 1241 determines that the music performance effect has ended (S4410: YES), the overall CPU 1241 determines whether or not the completed music performance effect is the first music performance effect (S4411). Specifically, since the performance performance permission flag is set to “ON” at the start of the first performance performance, whether or not the performance performance permission flag is set to “ON” at the start of the performance performance. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not it is the first performance performance. Here, when it is determined that it was not the first music performance effect (S4411: NO), the process proceeds to the performance notification effect control process in S3820.

If the overall CPU 1241 determines that the performance is the first performance of the music (S4411: YES), for example, the new performance to be performed is identified with reference to the performance management table of the performance of the music, and the first performance of the new performance is performed. Setting information for causing the sub liquid crystal display device 106 to execute the notification effect image P47 including the effect of notifying the remaining number of days until it is released (in this embodiment, 7 days regardless of the type of the new song) is set in the control RAM 1245 ( S4412). The display list for the sub liquid crystal is created based on this setting information and stored in the display list storage area 1291, so that the title of the unperformed song and the number of days until the first performance performance of the unperformed song is performed Is notified (see FIG. 9D).
In the present embodiment, the case where the sub liquid crystal display device 106 is used only for the notification effect has been described. However, for example, the sub liquid crystal display device 106 is caused to perform an effect synchronized with the effect performed in the main liquid crystal display device 108. As described above, the sub liquid crystal display device 106 may be used for purposes other than the notification effect.

[Performance announcement effect control processing by image sound control unit 1160]
45 and 46 are detailed flowcharts of the performance announcement effect control process in S3820 of FIG. Subsequent to the notification effect control process in S3815, the overall CPU 1241 determines whether or not the performance notification flag stored in the control RAM 1245 is set to “ON” as illustrated in FIG. 45 (S4501). ). This performance notification flag is set to “ON” by performing S3910 (see FIG. 39) described above. If it is determined that the performance notification flag is not set to “ON” (S4501: NO), the process proceeds to the music performance production start process of S3825.

  If the overall CPU 1241 determines that the performance notification flag is set to “ON” (S4501: YES), the control RAM 1245 sets setting information related to the performance notification in response to setting the performance notification flag to “ON”. It is determined whether or not the process of setting to has been completed (S4502). If it is determined that the process for setting the setting information has been completed (S4502: YES), the process proceeds to a music performance effect start process in S3825.

  If the overall CPU 1241 determines that the process of setting the setting information has not been completed (S4502: NO), for example, based on the reception status of the command related to the special game from the effect control unit 1150, the big hit game It is determined whether or not (S4503). Here, if it is determined that the special game is not being played (the jackpot game is not being played) (S4503: NO), it is determined whether or not a customer waiting effect is being performed (S4504). Specifically, since the customer waiting effect is performed from the reception of the customer waiting effect start command from the effect control unit 1150 to the reception of the changing effect start command, for example, the customer waiting effect start command is received. After that, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting effect is being performed based on whether or not the change effect start command is received (S4504).

  By the way, during the customer waiting effect, the normal effect accompanying the game using the game ball is not performed. For this reason, even if a performance announcement effect unrelated to the normal performance is performed, there is no possibility of impairing the interest of the normal performance. For this reason, if it is determined that the customer waiting effect is being performed (S4504: YES), the overall CPU 1241 identifies a new song to be performed in the music performance effect (S4505). Specifically, the current date and time (date and time) is specified based on the RTC information, and the start time of the music performance effect that is performed following the current performance announcement effect is specified based on the specified current date and time. More specifically, the current interrupt processing count N is subtracted from the interrupt processing count N when the music performance flag is set to “ON”, and the value obtained by this subtraction is used as the interrupt processing time interval (this implementation In the embodiment, the remaining time until the start time of the musical performance performance is calculated by multiplying by 33 mm). Then, the start time of the music performance effect is specified by adding the remaining time calculated to the specified current date and time. When the general CPU 1241 specifies the start time of the music performance effect, the overall CPU 1241 specifies a new song used for the music performance effect with reference to the table. That is, when the current state is not the state of all songs released, the performance management table (see FIG. 40) is referred to determine which new song is used at the start time of the specified music performance effect. On the other hand, when the current state is an all-song open state, it is determined which new song is used at the start time of the specified music performance production with reference to the music performance production order management table (see FIG. 43). .

  Subsequent to the processing of S4505, the overall CPU 1241 sets setting information for starting a performance announcement effect relating to the specified new song in the control RAM 1245 (S4506). When the setting information is set, a display list for the main liquid crystal is created based on the setting information, and the created display list is stored in the display list storage area 1291. As a result, the performance announcement effect is started.

In this way, when the general CPU 1241 is in the stage of waiting for the customer when the predetermined time (1 minute in the present embodiment) of the start time of the music performance effect, that is, when the start time of the performance announcement effect is reached, Immediately start the performance announcement performance.
On the other hand, if the overall CPU 1241 determines that it is not the customer waiting effect (S4504: NO), for example, at the elapsed time after receiving the changing effect start command instructing the start of the normal effect accompanying the changing display of the special symbol. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is being changed (S4507).

  If the overall CPU 1241 determines that the special symbol is being changed (S2407: YES), any of the development start flag, the prohibition flag, and the post-end start flag stored in the control RAM 1245 is “ Based on whether or not the flag is set to “ON”, it is determined whether or not the flag setting process has been completed (S4508). These three flags will be described later.

  If the overall CPU 1241 determines that the flag setting process has not been completed (S4508: NO), that is, if all the three flags are set to “OFF”, the current special symbol variation display ends. The remaining time until is calculated (S4509). Specifically, for example, the variation time of the special symbol is specified based on the variation production start command received from the production control unit 1150, and the elapsed time from the reception of the variation production start command to the current time is identified. The remaining time is calculated by subtracting.

  By the way, if the variation effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol ends before the start time of the music performance effect, the end timing of the end of the current variation effect or the change effect accompanying the change display of the next special symbol starts. The switching timing of the fluctuation effect such as the start timing to be performed exists before the start time of the music performance effect. In such a case, if the performance announcement effect is started at the end timing or the start timing, it is possible to prevent the interest of the variation effect from being impaired by the performance notification effect.

  For this reason, the overall CPU 1241 determines whether or not the time obtained by adding the remaining time calculated to the current time is the time before the start time of the music performance effect following the processing of S4509. It is determined whether or not the variation effect being executed with the special symbol variation display ends before the music performance effect is started (S4510). Here, if it is determined that the music performance effect is to be ended before the start of the performance of the music performance (S4510: YES), the after-start flag is set to “ON” (S4511). This after-start flag is a flag indicating whether or not the performance announcement effect is to be started after the change effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol this time is ended. For this reason, when the after-start flag is set to “ON”, the performance announcement effect is started at the timing when the current variation effect ends or when the next variation effect starts.

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 1241 determines that the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol this time is not finished before the music performance effect is started (S4510: NO), the overall performance performance is started. It is determined whether or not there is a development timing in the variation effect before (S4512). Specifically, the variation production start command received from the production control unit 1150 is analyzed, and there is a development timing such as development from normal reach to super reach, for example, in the variation production being executed along with the special symbol variation display. Determine whether or not. If it is determined that the development timing exists, it is determined whether or not the time corresponding to the development timing is before the start time of the specified music performance effect.

By the way, in order to prevent the performance announcement effect from damaging the interest of the variation production accompanying the variation display of the special symbol this time, it is preferable to start the performance announcement production after the variation production ends. However, if such a configuration is adopted when the variation production accompanying the variation display of the special symbol this time is not finished before the music performance production starts, the performance announcement production will be performed during the music performance production. The problem arises. For this reason, it is preferable not to perform the performance announcement effect when the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol this time does not end before the music performance effect starts. On the other hand, if the variation effect of one time performed from the start to the end of the special symbol variation display has the development timing, that is, the switching timing of the production, the variation production at the development timing. If the image is switched to the reduced display and the performance announcement effect is started, it is possible to prevent the performance announcement effect from damaging the interest of the variation effect.

  Therefore, if the overall CPU 1241 determines that there is a development timing in the variable performance before the music performance performance is started (S4512: YES), the general CPU 1241 sets the development start flag to “ON” (S4513). Here, the development start flag is a flag indicating whether or not the performance announcement effect is started at the development timing of the effect in the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 1241 determines that there is no development timing in the variable production before the music performance production is started (S4512: NO), the general CPU 1241 is from the start time of the performance announcement production to the start time of the music performance production. Since there is no development (separation) timing of the variation effect, the prohibition flag is set to “ON” in order to prevent the performance announcement effect from being performed and the interest of the variation effect being impaired (S4514). Here, the prohibition flag is a flag indicating whether or not execution of the performance announcement effect is prohibited.

  When the overall CPU 1241 executes the process of S4511, executes the process of S4513, executes the process of S4514, or determines that the flag setting process has been completed (S4508: YES), the prohibition flag is set. It is determined whether or not “ON” is set (S4517). If it is determined that the prohibition flag is set to “ON” (S4517: YES), the process proceeds to the music performance effect start process of S3825. In this way, when the prohibition flag is set to “ON”, the process cannot proceed to S4505 and S4506 described above, and the performance announcement effect is not performed.

  On the other hand, when determining that the prohibition flag is not set to “ON” (S4517: NO), the overall CPU 1241 determines whether the development start flag is set to “ON” (S4518). If it is determined that the development start flag is not set to “ON” (S4518: NO), the process proceeds to the music performance effect start process of S3825.

If the overall CPU 1241 determines that the development start flag is set to “ON” (S4518: YES), has the development timing been reached based on the analysis result of the variable production start command related to the current regular production? It is determined whether or not (S4519). If it is determined that the development timing is not reached (S4519: NO), the process proceeds to the music performance production start process of S3825.
If it is determined that the development timing has come (S4519: YES), the overall CPU 1241 executes the processes of S4505 and S4506 described above.

  As described above, the overall CPU 1241 specifies the development timing of the dynamic production (production switching timing) based on the variable production start command received from the production control unit 1150, and determines that the performance announcement production start time has come. The performance announcement effect in the upper region A1 is started at the specified development timing before the start time of the music performance effect.

On the other hand, after the current special symbol variation display is completed, the following processing is performed. That is, if the overall CPU 1241 determines that the special symbol variation display is not in progress (S4507: NO), the overall CPU 1241 determines whether or not the after-start flag is set to “ON” (S4521). If it is determined that the start flag after completion is not set to “ON” (S
4521: NO), the process proceeds to the music performance production start process of S3825.

  When the overall CPU 1241 determines that the after-start flag is set to “ON” (S4521: YES), for example, based on the reception status of the hold display command and the variable effect start command from the effect control unit 1150, It is determined whether or not one special symbol determination is suspended (S4522). Here, when it is determined that the first special symbol determination is not suspended (S4522: NO), it is determined whether or not a variable effect end command is received from the effect control unit 1150 (S4523). Here, when it is determined that the variation effect end command has not been received (S4523: NO), the process proceeds to the music performance effect start process of S3825.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation effect end command has been received (S4523: YES), the process proceeds to S4505 and S4506 described above. When the first special symbol determination is not suspended at the end of the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol this time, the end timing of the variation effect associated with the variation display of the special symbol this time is the switching timing of the effect. For this reason, in such a case, the performance announcement effect is started at the timing when the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol this time ends.

  When determining that the first special symbol determination is suspended (S4522: YES), the overall CPU 1241 determines whether or not a variation effect start command is received from the effect control unit 1150 (S4524). Here, when it is determined that the variation effect start command has not been received (S4524: NO), the process proceeds to the music performance effect start process of S3825.

  By the way, when the variation effect start command is received immediately after the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol is completed, the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the next special symbol is started accordingly. . For this reason, the timing at which the variation display of the special symbol is started after the variation display of the special symbol is finished, that is, the timing at which the next variation effect is started in response to the variation effect start command is also the switching timing of the effect Become. For this reason, when the overall CPU 1241 determines that the change effect start command has been received (S4524: YES), the overall CPU 1241 executes the processes of S4505 and S4506 described above.

  As described above, when the special symbol is variably displayed at the start time of the performance announcement effect, the overall CPU 1241 causes the main liquid crystal display device 108 to start the performance announcement effect after the variability display ends.

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 1241 determines that a special game is being played (a jackpot game is being played) (S4503: YES), as illustrated in FIG. 46, the overall CPU 1241 determines whether a long game is being played (S4626). . When a long win game is performed, an opening effect start command, an in-round effect start command, and an ending effect start command are transmitted from the effect control unit 1150 as commands for instructing the execution of the hit effect accompanying the long win game. On the other hand, when a short hit game is performed, a short hit effect start command and a short hit effect end command are transmitted from the effect control unit 1150. For this reason, the overall CPU 1241 determines whether or not the long hit game is in progress based on which command of these commands is being executed.

  If the overall CPU 1241 determines that a long game is being played (S4626: YES), it determines whether it is before the start of the final round (S4627). Here, when it is determined that it is not before the start of the final round (S4627: NO), the process proceeds to S4635 described later.

By the way, during a long hit game, an in-round production start command is transmitted from the production control unit 1150 each time a long open round game is started, and an in-round production of each round is performed. In the in-round effect, at least a part of the display content (for example, a display indicating the current number of rounds) is updated each time the in-round effect start command is received by the image sound control unit 1160. In other words, every time an effect start command during round is received by the image sound control unit 1160, the winning effect associated with the long hit game is switched.

  Therefore, if the overall CPU 1241 determines that it is before the final round is started (S4627: YES), the overall CPU 1241 determines whether or not an in-round effect start command is received from the effect control unit 1150 (S4628). Here, when it is determined that the in-round effect start command has not been received (S4628: NO), the process proceeds to the music performance effect start process in S3825.

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 1241 determines that the command for starting the production during the round has been received (S4628: YES), the general CPU 1241 identifies a new song to be performed in the music performance production (S4629), and performs a performance notification production on the identified new song. Setting information for starting is set in the control RAM 1245 (S4630). The processes in S4629 and S4630 are performed in the same manner as the processes in S4505 and S4506 described above.

  As described above, the general CPU 1241 causes the main liquid crystal display device 108 to start the performance announcement effect after the long release round game is ended when the start time of the performance announcement effect is reached during the long release round game. In this embodiment, the case where the performance announcement effect is started at the timing when the next long open round game is started after the long release round game being executed at the start time of the performance announcement effect is described. For example, the performance notification effect may be started at the timing when the long open round game being executed ends at the start time of the performance notification effect.

  Here, the relationship between the start time of the performance announcement effect and the time required for the long open round game will be described with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, the start time, which is the time from the start time of the performance announcement effect to the start time of the music performance effect, is set to 1 minute. On the other hand, as illustrated in FIG. 47A, if the start time is set to 20 seconds, the in-round effect that is being executed when the start time of the performance announcement effect is reached, The music performance may end after the performance start time. That is, since there is no timing for switching the hit effect associated with the long hit game at the start time, if the performance announcement effect is started somewhere during the start time, the interest of the hit effect is surely lost.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the start time of the performance announcement effect is set to a time sufficiently longer than the time required for digesting one long open round game (up to 29 seconds). In other words, the start time of the performance announcement effect is set to be longer than the longest time during which the effect during one round is executed. For this reason, as illustrated in FIG. 47 (B), the in-round production that is being executed when the start time of the performance announcement production ends ends before the start time of the music performance production, and the next round Production will be started during the round. In the present embodiment, since the performance notification effect is started at the start of the production during the round, the performance notification effect can be started without impairing the interest of the music performance effect.

By the way, in the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, the music selected by the player during the long hitting game may be played. When the performance announcement effect or the music performance effect is started during the reproduction of such music, it is necessary to stop the reproduction of the music. However, if the player selects a desired piece of music but that piece of music is not played to the end, the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the performance announcement effect or the music performance effect is started during the reproduction of the music, the reproduction of the music is stopped and the reproduction of the music is restarted from the beginning after the music performance effect is finished. I am going to do that. In order to realize such control, the following processing is performed following the processing of S4630.

  That is, following S4630, the overall CPU 1241 determines whether or not the selected music is being played based on, for example, whether or not the VDP 1242 is executing a drawing process related to music playback (S4631). . If it is determined that the music is not being played back (S4631: NO), the process proceeds to the music performance effect start process in S3825.

  If it is determined that the music is being played back (S4631: YES), the overall CPU 1241 causes the VDP 1242 and the sound DSP 1243 to stop playing the music (S4632). Then, the music information that can specify the type of the music for which reproduction has been stopped is stored in the control RAM 1245 (S4633), and the replay flag stored in the control RAM 1245 is set to “ON” (S4634). This replay flag is a flag indicating whether or not to start playing the music corresponding to the music information after the music performance effect is finished.

  By the way, when the start time of the performance announcement effect is reached after the last round in the long hit game is started, a process for changing the effect during the round by receiving the in-round production start command is performed before the long hit game ends. There is no. For this reason, in such a case, the performance announcement effect is started at the timing when the ending of the long hit game is completed.

  Further, the short win effect associated with the short hit game is a series from the start of the short hit game to the end of the ending, and there is no switch timing of the output in the middle. For this reason, when it becomes the start time of the performance announcement effect during the short hit game, the performance announcement effect is started at the timing when the ending of the short hit game ends.

  For this reason, when the general CPU 1241 determines that the game is not long hit (S4626: NO), and determines that it is not before the final round (S4627: NO), for example, an ending effect start command (or short hit effect end) Whether or not the ending of the long hit game (or short hit game) has ended is determined based on the elapsed time since receiving the command (S4635). Here, when it is determined that the ending has not ended (S4635: NO), the process proceeds to the music performance production start process of S3825. Conversely, if it is determined that the ending has ended (S4635: YES), the process proceeds to S4629 and the performance announcement effect is started.

  As described above, when the start time of the performance announcement effect is reached after the long release round game of the last round in the long hit game is started, the performance notification effect is started after the end of the long release round game is ended. In addition, if it is the start time of the performance announcement during the short opening round game in the short hit game, the performance announcement effect will be performed after all the short opening round games executed continuously with this short opening round game are completed. Let it begin.

  Here, the relationship between the start time of the performance announcement effect and the time required for the short hit game will be described with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, the start time related to the performance announcement effect is set to 1 minute. On the other hand, as illustrated in FIG. 48 (A), if the start time is set to 20 seconds, the short hit effect that is being executed when the start time of the performance announcement effect is reached, The music performance will end after the start time of the performance. In other words, since there is no timing for switching the short win effect associated with the short hit game at the start time, if the performance announcement effect is started somewhere during the start time, the interest of the win effect is surely lost. .

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the start time of the performance announcement effect is set to a time sufficiently longer than the time (for example, 30 seconds) required to digest one short hit game. In other words, the start time of the performance announcement effect is set to a time sufficiently longer than the total time required to digest a plurality of continuous (15 times in this embodiment) short open round games. For this reason, as illustrated in FIG. 48B, the short hit effect that is being executed when the start time of the performance announcement effect is reached ends before the start time of the music performance effect. And in this embodiment, since the performance announcement effect is started with the start of the variation display of the special symbol resumed after the short winning effect accompanying this short winning game is ended, the interest of the winning effect and the variable effect is impaired. The performance announcement can be started without any problems.

[Music Performance Production Start Processing by Image Sound Control Unit 1160]
FIG. 49 is a detailed flowchart of the music performance presentation start process in S3825 of FIG. Subsequent to the performance notification effect control process in S3820, the overall CPU 1241 determines whether or not the music performance flag is set to “ON” as illustrated in FIG. 49 (S4901). If it is determined that the music performance flag is not set to “ON” (S4901: NO), the process proceeds to the normal performance control process of S3830.

  If the overall CPU 1241 determines that the music performance flag is set to “ON” (S4901: YES), the overall CPU 1241 sets all the flags related to the performance announcement effect to “OFF” (S4902). Here, all the flags relating to the performance announcement effect are specifically the performance announcement flag, the after-start flag, the development start flag, and the prohibition flag shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to the processing of S4902, the overall CPU 1241 identifies the current date based on the latest RTC information stored in the control RAM 1245 (S4903), and the current state is an all-music release state, similar to the processing of S3930. It is determined whether or not (S4904).

  If the overall CPU 1241 determines that all songs are not released (S4904: NO), it sets the performance management table (see FIG. 40) stored in the control ROM 1244 in the control RAM 1245 (S4905), and sets the current date. A corresponding new song is selected (S4906). For example, when the current date is December 3, 2013, this date is November 30, 2013, which is the first song performance stage date of the new song A, and December 7, 2013, which is the first song performance stage date of the new song B. Since the date is between the dates, the new song A is selected. For example, when the current date is December 7, 2013, this date is December 7, 2013, which is the first musical performance performance date of the new song B, so the new song B is selected.

  By the way, when the date of performing the music performance effect is a date other than the first music performance effect date, there is one type of new music used for the music performance effect on that day. On the other hand, if the date on which the performance of the music performance is performed is a day corresponding to the date of the performance of the first music performance, the type of the new song changes before and after the transition to the musical performance performance permission state, There are two types of new songs. For this reason, when the current date is the first performance performance date, it is necessary to determine which of the two types of new songs is used.

Therefore, after the processing of S4906, the general CPU 1241 is the first music performance performance date based on whether the current date corresponds to one of the first music performance performance dates specified in the performance management table. It is determined whether or not (S4907). Here, when it is determined that it is not the first music performance effect date (S4907: NO), setting information for executing the music performance effect of the new song selected in the process of S4906 is set in the control RAM 1245 (S4908). When the setting information related to the musical performance performance is set in the control RAM 1245 in this way, a display list for the main liquid crystal is created based on the setting information and set in the display list storage area 1291. Thereby, the musical performance performance selected in the process of S4906 is started.

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 1241 determines that it is the first performance performance date (S4907: YES), it determines whether or not the performance performance permission flag stored in the control RAM 1245 is set to “ON”. (S4907).

  As illustrated in FIG. 40, when the current date is, for example, December 7, 2013 corresponding to the first song performance stage date of the new song B and the song performance stage permission flag is set to “ON”, It is necessary to set setting information for executing the first performance performance of the new song B. On the other hand, when the current date is, for example, December 7, 2013 corresponding to the initial performance performance date of the new song B and the performance performance permission flag is set to “OFF”, it is not the new song B. It is necessary to set setting information for executing the performance performance of the new song A immediately before the new song B.

  Therefore, if the overall CPU 1241 determines that the music performance directing permission flag is set to “ON” (S4909: YES), the overall CPU 1241 selects in the process of S4906, similarly to the case where it is determined that it is not the first music performance directing date. Setting information for executing the performance performance of the new song is set (S4908). On the contrary, when it is determined that the music performance effect permission flag is not set to “ON” (S4909: NO), that is, when the music performance effect permission flag is set to “OFF”, the new song selected in the process of S4906. The setting information for executing the musical performance performance of the previous new song is set in the control RAM 1245 (S4910).

  As described above, the overall CPU 1241 determines that the initial music performance effect permission time specified in the performance management table has passed and sets the music performance effect permission flag to “ON”, and then the elapsed time reaches 1 hour. If it is determined that the time condition is satisfied, the main liquid crystal display device 108 is caused to start the first music performance effect of the new song (new song B in the above example). On the other hand, if it is determined that the above time condition is satisfied in a state where it has not been determined that the first musical performance performance permission time has passed, the first musical performance that has already been performed is performed without performing the first musical performance performance of the new song. Execute the performance of the new song.

  Subsequent to S4908, the overall CPU 1241 determines whether or not the performance performance permission flag is set to “ON” (S4911). Here, when it is determined that the music performance effect permission flag is set to “ON” (S4911: YES), the music performance effect permission flag is set to “OFF” (S4912).

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 1241 determines that all songs are released (S4904: YES), the overall performance performance order management table (see FIG. 43) is set in the control RAM 1245 (S4914). Then, based on the reset processing count P stored in the control RAM 1245, the elapsed time from the power-on of the gaming machine 1 is specified (S4915). Here, the reset processing count P is set to “0” when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, and is incremented by “1” every time the processing of S3935 (see FIG. 39) is performed. For this reason, the overall CPU 1241 specifies the reset processing count P immediately after determining that the music performance flag is set to “ON” as the elapsed time. For example, when the number of reset processing is updated to “1”, it can be determined that 1 hour has passed at the update timing, and when updated to “3”, 3 hours have passed at the update timing. It can be judged.

Subsequent to the process of S4915, the overall CPU 1241 selects a new song corresponding to the current date specified in the process of S4903 and the elapsed time specified in the process of S4915 (S491).
6). Specifically, the type of the new song corresponding to the specified current date and the elapsed time since the power is turned on is read from the music performance presentation order management table. For example, if the current date is February 23 and three hours have passed since the power is turned on, the new song C is selected. For example, if the current date is February 27 and 10 hours have passed since the power is turned on, the new song B is selected.

  Then, following the processing of S4916, the overall CPU 1241 sets setting information for executing the performance performance of the selected new song in the control RAM 1245, similarly to the processing of S4908 (S4917). These processes of S4914 to S4917 are performed every time one hour elapses with reference to the time when the power is turned on in the state where all songs are released.

When it is determined in the process of S4911 that the music performance effect permission flag is not set to “ON”, or after the process of S4912 or after the process of S4917, the music performance flag is set to “OFF” (S4918). ), The process proceeds to the normal performance control process of S3830.
In this way, the overall CPU 1241 individually sets the execution timings of the music performance effects of the new songs A to L on the current date, and causes the music performance effects of each new song to be executed at the set execution timing.

  In addition, although this embodiment demonstrated the case where the execution timing of the music performance effect of each new music in an all-song open state was set using the music performance effect order management table illustrated in FIG. 43, as other embodiment, The following configuration may be adopted. That is, in the present embodiment, the case where the execution timings of all new songs are defined in the music performance presentation order management table has been described, but this is used for the performance performances that are executed first on the execution date and the execution date. A new song type may be stored in association with the new song, and the new song may be regularly selected, for example, as a new song D, a new song E, or a new song F based on the new song.

Also, a configuration is adopted in which information indicating a new song (for example, new song F) used for the first performance performance of the previous day is held, and the next day (for example, new song G) is selected in order from the next song. May be.
Also, instead of storing information that prescribes the execution timing, such as the music performance production order management table, for example, a random selection using random numbers in a state where all songs are open, and a new song used for the music performance production is randomly selected. It may be determined. In this case, information indicating the type of a new song already used in the performance of the music performance is retained so that the performance of the same music is not performed more than once a day, and the song is selected by the selection lottery. Then, a configuration of redoing the selection lottery may be added.

  As described above, the overall CPU 1241 controls the start timing of the music performance effect and the type of the new song to be used based on the elapsed time measurement result, the RTC information, the performance management table, and the music performance effect order management table. That is, regardless of whether the special symbols are variably displayed by the special symbol indicators 41 and 42 or not during the special game (during the big hit game), the main liquid crystal display device 108 is caused to perform the music performance effect. .

  As described above with reference to FIG. 49, if it is determined in S4904 that all songs are in an open state, the song performance management table is set in S4914, and new songs to be performed in the song performance stage are changed every time in S4916. It becomes like this. Therefore, the special performance is changed every time.

[Flow of productions when transitioning from normal production mode to special production mode]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 50 to 55, the flow of each effect will be described when shifting from the normal effect mode to the special effect mode (performance announcement effect and music performance effect).

[When changing to the special performance mode when the variable performance is not performed]
FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the production when the start time of the performance announcement effect is reached when the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol is not performed in the normal effect mode.
FIG. 50A shows the start time of the performance announcement effect which is a special effect executed in the special effect mode when the customer power-waiting state is in the normal effect mode in the normal power mode in which the power saving mode is not in operation. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the effect in case of becoming.
As shown in FIG. 50A, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the customer waiting command is transmitted from the main control unit 1100, the state shifts to the customer waiting state. In this customer waiting state, a customer waiting effect is executed, and as shown in FIG. 50A, a customer waiting effect image consisting of the model name of the gaming machine 1 and a promotional video of this model is displayed in the entire area. (See FIG. 50A-1).

Also, in this customer waiting effect, the remaining time from the end of the previous music performance until the start of the next music performance effect is always counted down at the top of the customer waiting effect image. Appeal the start time of the next performance performance. Therefore, the player who will play a game from now on can recognize the start time of the next musical performance performance. In addition, when a new song to be performed next time is introduced together with displaying the remaining time until the next performance performance of the music is displayed, the appeal effect for the player who will play the game is further enhanced.
The remaining time display (countdown display) until the start of the next music performance effect displayed in the customer waiting effect is to prompt the player the start time of the music performance effect together with the remaining time display on the menu screen described above. This corresponds to the second remaining time notification (countdown notification).

  When the start time of the performance announcement effect is reached with such a waiting-to-stand performance, the variation effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol is not performed, so it is normal even if the performance announcement effect is started immediately There is no risk of impairing the entertainment of the production. For this reason, when the start time of the performance announcement effect is reached while the customer waiting effect is being performed, the entire region display is shifted to the region division display, and the performance announcement effect image P47 is displayed in the upper region A1 of the region division display. As a result, the performance announcement effect is immediately started (see FIG. 50A-2).

In this case, since the start time of the performance announcement effect is the same as the actual start time, the countdown display is started from 60 seconds. In addition, since it was a customer waiting state at the time of the start of a performance notification production | presentation, the decoration pattern P22 of the stop display state in the last change production | generation is dot-displayed in lower area A2.
In the customer waiting state, a display may be made so that the player can recognize that the customer is waiting in the lower area A2.
The countdown display for 60 seconds displayed in this performance notification effect corresponds to a first remaining time notification (countdown notification) for prompting the player to start the music performance effect.

  Thereafter, when the start time of the music performance effect is reached, the music performance effect is started by displaying the music performance effect image P48 in the upper area A1 that has been used for the performance announcement effect until then (FIG. 50A-3). )reference). If the right to determine the special symbol is not generated even when the music performance effect end time is reached, the display of the customer waiting effect image using the entire area is resumed (see FIG. 50 (A-4)). .

In addition, regarding FIG. 50 (A), the flow of the production when the start time of the performance announcement production, which is a special production executed in the special production mode, is in the customer waiting state in the normal production mode in the power saving mode. As mentioned above, “Under power saving performance until XX minutes XX seconds” (Standby production) → “Performance until XX seconds” (performance announcement production) → “Now until △△△ performance is over ○ “Minute XX seconds” (music performance production) “→“ During power saving XX minutes XX seconds ”(waiting for customers).

FIG. 50B is an explanatory diagram for describing the flow of the effect when the start time of the performance announcement effect is reached when the variable effect is being stopped and displayed.
As shown in FIG. 50 (B), the right to determine the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is not held (there is no hold memory and the fluctuation associated with the special symbol fluctuation display) In the state where the effect is stopped and displayed), the change stop image of the change effect accompanying the previous change display of the special symbol is displayed in the entire area (see FIG. 50B-1).
In such a state, when the start time of the performance announcement effect is reached, there is no change effect accompanying the game using the game ball, so there is a possibility that even if the performance announcement effect is started immediately, the interest of the change effect will be impaired. Absent. For this reason, when the start time of the performance announcement effect is reached while the customer waiting effect is being performed, the entire region display is shifted to the region division display, and the performance announcement effect image P47 is displayed in the upper region A1 of the region division display. Thus, the performance announcement effect using the upper region A1 is immediately started (see FIG. 50 (B-2)).
In this case, since the start time of the performance announcement effect is the same as the actual start time, the countdown display is started from 60 seconds. In addition, since it was a stop display state at the time of the start of a performance announcement effect, the decoration pattern P22 of the stop display state in the last change effect is displayed in the lower area A2.

Thereafter, when the right to determine the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is generated, the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol is displayed by the decorative symbol P22 displayed in a dot display stopped in the lower area A2. Start (see FIG. 50 (B-3)).
Then, when the start time of the music performance effect is reached during the fluctuating effect that has started to change to the performance announcement effect, the music performance effect using the upper region A1 is displayed by displaying the music performance effect image P48 in the upper region A1. The process is started (see FIG. 50 (B-4)).

  And, when the end time of the music performance effect is reached, if the fluctuating effect of the decorative pattern P22 that has started to fluctuate before the end time of the music performance effect is performed in the lower area A2, this variable effect ends. Up to the above, area division display is performed (see FIG. 50 (B-5)), and after this variation effect is completed, the transition effect is changed to the variation effect using the entire region in the normal effect mode (see FIG. 50 (B-6)). ).

As shown in FIG. 50 (B-6), there are the following four methods for switching from area division display to whole area display.
The first method is based on the fact that the CPU 1151 has received the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the CPU 1101, and at the timing when the general CPU 1241 has received the variable rendering end command transmitted from the CPU 1151, A method of switching from area division display to whole area display (method 1 based on a symbol determination command transmitted from the CPU 1101).

  The second method is to start the fluctuation before the end of the music performance effect, and when the change storage is stopped and displayed after the end of the music performance effect, the stored memory is stored. Until the variation effect for is finished, the area division display is continued. Based on the fact that the CPU 1151 receives the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the CPU 1101 in the variation effect for the last reserved memory among all the reserved memories, A method of switching from region division display to whole region display at the timing when the central CPU 1241 receives the change effect end command transmitted from the CPU 1151 (method 2 based on the symbol determination command transmitted from the CPU 1101).

  The third method is based on the fact that the CPU 1151 receives the next variation start command transmitted from the CPU 1101, and at the timing when the general CPU 1241 receives the variation effect start command transmitted from the CPU 1151, A method of switching to display (method 1 based on a change start command transmitted from the CPU 1101).

The fourth method is to start the fluctuation before the end of the music performance effect, and when the change effect is stopped and displayed after the end of the music performance effect, the stored memory is stored. Until the variation effect for is finished, the area division display is continued, and after the last variation effect of all the stored memories is stopped and displayed, the CPU 1151 receives the next variation start command transmitted from the CPU 1101. Based on the above, a method of switching from area division display to entire area display at the timing when the central CPU 1241 receives the change effect start command transmitted from the CPU 1151 (method 2 based on the change start command transmitted from the CPU 1101).
By using any of these methods, it is possible to shift from the area division display to the entire area display after the end of the variation effect.
As described above, when switching from the area division display to the entire area display after the end of the variation effect, the CPU 1151 receives a new command transmitted from the CPU 1101 after the end of the variation effect. It is based on.

In the case of adopting the second method and the fourth method described above, when the number of reserved memories related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved and stored when the performance of the music performance is finished, the stored information is reserved and stored. The special effect mode is extended until the variable effects for all the stored memory numbers are stopped and displayed. In the special effect mode extension period, the second special effect that is a special effect peculiar to the special effect mode extension period is displayed. You may make it perform. In addition, during the special effect mode extension period, a mini game that is not related to the variable effect may be played. By doing in this way, gameability can be improved.
Note that this special effect mode extension period may be provided as part of the normal effect mode. That is, the normal effect mode may be provided with a first normal effect mode and a second normal effect mode, and the special effect mode extension period may be the second normal effect mode. In this case, after the special effect mode is finished, if the reserved memory number is reserved, the process shifts to the second normal effect mode, and when all the variable effects of the reserved memory number are ended, the process shifts to the first normal effect mode. become.
In the second method and the fourth method described above, “if the variation starts before the music performance effect ends, and when the variation effect is stopped and displayed after the music performance effect ends, the hold memory is stored. "If the number of reserved memories related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved and stored when the musical performance performance ends," can be considered.

[When transitioning to special production mode during variable production]
FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the flow of the production in the normal production mode when the start time of the performance announcement production, which is a special production executed in the special production mode, during the production of the fluctuation accompanying the fluctuation display of the special symbol. It is explanatory drawing.

FIG. 51A is an explanatory diagram in the case where the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol is finished by the music performance effect start time, but this variation effect is not finished by the performance notification effect start time.
As shown in FIG. 51 (A), the change effect (see FIG. 51 (A-1)) accompanying the change display of the special symbol started to change before the start time of the performance announcement effect is the start time of the performance announcement effect. In the case of ending before the start time of the music performance effect, the whole region display is shifted to the region division display after the variation effect is ended.
Then, the performance announcement effect image P47 is displayed in the upper area A1 of the divided area display, and the decorative pattern P22 displayed in dots is displayed in the lower area A2 (see FIG. 51 (A-2)). Thereafter, at the stage when the start time of the music performance effect is reached, the music performance effect image P48 is displayed in the special effect area A1 of the divided area display (see FIG. 51 (A-3)).

  In FIG. 51A-2, there are two methods for shifting from the whole area display to the area division display after the end of the changing effect.

  The first method is based on the fact that the CPU 1151 has received the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the CPU 1101, and the general CPU 1241 has received the variable effect end command transmitted from the CPU 1151, so that the overall area display is changed to the area division display. A method of transition (a method based on a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the CPU 1101).

The second method is based on the fact that the CPU 1151 receives the next variation start command transmitted from the CPU 1101, and at the timing when the general CPU 1241 receives the variation effect start command transmitted from the CPU 1151, the region is divided from the entire region display. A method of shifting to display (a method based on a change start command transmitted from the CPU 1101).
By using any of these methods, it is possible to shift from the entire area display to the area division display after the end of the change effect.
As described above, when the whole region display is shifted to the region division display after the end of the variation effect, the CPU 1151 receives a new command transmitted from the CPU 1101 after the end of the variation effect. It is based on what has been done.

FIG. 51 (B) shows a case where the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol does not end even if it becomes the start time of the music performance effect, and a break is provided in this variable effect until the start time of the music performance effect. FIG. For example, if the start time of the performance announcement effect is reached during the execution of the change effect accompanying the long change in which the change time of the special symbol exceeds 1 minute in the normal effect mode, the change effect is generated even if the start time of the music performance effect is reached. May not end.
In addition, as an example of the break provided during the fluctuating production, it accompanies a series of special symbols that change from a normal reach with a relatively low jackpot expectation to a so-called super reach with a relatively high jackpot expectation. For example, the point of scene change in the variable production.

  For example, [variation start → pseudo continuous notice (big hit notice) → normal reach (expected degree: low) → SP reach (expected degree: medium) → SPSP reach (expected degree: high) → stop display (result of success / failure)] In this case, any one or a plurality of locations indicated by “→” can be set as a segment of the variation effect. Needless to say, if it is a variation production that does not develop to SPSP reach like this variation production, any one or more of them may be used as long as it is a break provided so far, and it develops more than SPSP reach. As long as it is a fluctuating effect, any one or more of them may be used as long as it is a break provided so far. Further, the content of the variation effect is not limited to the illustrated variation effect.

  As shown in FIG. 51 (B), the variation performance (see FIG. 51 (B-1)) accompanied by the variation display of the special symbol that has started to vary in the normal performance mode before the start time of the performance announcement performance is the music performance. If it does not end by the start time of the production, and there is a break in this variation production by the start time of the performance of the music performance, the timing of the division of the change production (for example, the timing of development to reach, the big hit in the reach) At the time of development to a super-reach with high expectation, etc.), the reduced performance announcement effect image P47 is superimposed on the variation effect image of the change effect that is continuously displayed (FIG. 51 (B-2)). reference).

Thereafter, the music performance effect image P48 reduced in place of the reduced performance announcement effect image P47 is superimposed and displayed on the variation effect image of the variable effect that is continuously displayed at the start time of the music performance effect (FIG. 5). 51 (B-3)).
After that, at the timing when the variation effect is finished, the display screen is shifted from the whole area display to the area division display. Then, the music performance effect image P48 is displayed in the special effect region A1, and the decorative pattern P22 displayed in dots is displayed in the lower region A2 (see FIG. 51 (B-4)).

  Note that even after the start of the music performance effect, the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol does not end, but there is a break in the variation effect (a break is set between FIGS. 51B-3 and 51B-4). In this case, the display screen is shifted from the whole area display to the area division display at the timing of the division, the music performance effect image P48 is displayed in the special effect region A1, and the ongoing variation effect is displayed in dots. The decorative pattern P22 may be displayed in the lower area A2.

FIG. 51 (C) shows a variation effect (see FIG. 51 (C-1)) with a variation display of a special symbol started to vary in the normal performance mode before the start time of the performance announcement effect. It is explanatory drawing in case the variation production accompanying the variation display of a special symbol is not complete | finished by time and there is also no division | segmentation of a variation production.
As shown in FIG. 51C, when the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol does not end by the start time of the music performance effect, and there is no break in the variation effect, the display of the performance announcement effect image P47 is displayed. Is not performed (see FIG. 51C-1).
Then, at the start time of the music performance effect, the reduced music performance effect image P48 is superimposed and displayed on the variation effect image of the variable effect that is continuously displayed (see FIG. 51 (C-2)).
Thereafter, after the variation effect is finished, the whole area display is shifted to the area division display. Then, the music performance effect image P48 is displayed in the upper area A1 of the divided area display, and the decorative design P22 displayed in dots is displayed in the lower area A2 (see FIG. 51 (C-3)).

  In FIGS. 51B and 51C, the timing for shifting from the entire area display to the area division display is the timing based on the CPU 1151 receiving the symbol confirmation command transmitted by the CPU 1101 or the timing transmitted from the CPU 1101. The timing based on the CPU 1151 receiving the next fluctuation start command can be considered.

  As described above, when the variation effect does not end by the set time of the special effect mode, the decorative pattern P12 displayed in the normal effect mode before the transition to the special effect mode is completed until the change effect ends. The game effect image is continuously displayed as it is. As a result, the variation effect can be displayed without interruption, so that the player can enjoy the lottery game. On the other hand, since the special effect image is also displayed, the player can enjoy both effects.

  In the present embodiment, the music performance performance is configured to always start at a predetermined time. On the other hand, the performance announcement effect is a notification of the music performance effect, and the priority as the effect to be executed is set lower than that of the music performance effect. For this reason, the performance announcement effect is executed as much as possible within a range in which there is no influence on the effect of the symbol variation, such as after the symbol variation is completed or from the timing of the symbol variation delimiter. Thus, in this embodiment, the player can enjoy both the game effect and the special effect in a well-balanced manner.

51 (B) and 51 (C), when there is a delimiter, the timing of demarcation of the variation effect (for example, the timing to develop to reach, the timing to develop to super reach with a high jackpot expectation in reach, etc.) ), The reduced performance announcement effect image P47 (or the music performance effect image P48) is superimposed and displayed on the variation effect image of the variation effect that is continuously displayed (FIGS. 51B-2, C). -2))), but in such a case, the interest may be reduced for a player who wants to enjoy the variable effects such as reach.

  As an example in this case, the performance announcement effect (a super-reaching or more, three or more pseudo-continuous notices, a notice with a high degree of expectation, etc.) that is a jackpot expectation degree of a certain level or more is executed first ( Alternatively, when the music performance effect is started, the performance notification effect (or music performance effect) may not be executed (interrupted) or the image may not be displayed until the variation effect ends.

As another example, the change setting selected when the change pattern specified from the change start command received from the CPU 1101 has a jackpot expectation level of a certain level or more may not be provided with a delimiter setting. . As a result, when the variation effect of the jackpot expectation degree of a certain level or more is executed first, the performance notification effect image P47 (or the music performance effect image P48) is not displayed until this variation effect is finished. The performance announcement effect image P47 (or the music performance effect image P48) is displayed after the end of the change effect.
By adopting these exemplified methods, the interest of the player who wants to enjoy the variable effects such as reach is not reduced.

[Processing of the game effect performed when shifting to the special effect mode]
Subsequently, a game effect performed when the mode is shifted to the special effect mode will be described.
FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a timing chart of symbol variation, jackpot effect, and special effect, which are variation effects.
In the present embodiment, even when the special effect is executed in the special effect mode, the special effect and the game effect are performed. Then, during the transition to the special effect mode, the decorative symbols P22 are all stopped (at the time of the arrow “A” in the figure), and the jackpot game effect is generated (at the time of the arrow “I” in the figure). ).
This aspect has a large profit for the player and a high priority as an effect. Therefore, in this embodiment, in these aspects, the game effect is given priority over the special effect.
Hereinafter, an effect performed at the time point of arrow A in FIG. 52 and an effect based on the time point of arrow A in FIG. 52 will be described in order.

[Processing of the game effect performed when shifting to the special effect mode]
FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect when the decorative symbols P22 are aligned in the special effect mode. For comparison, FIG. 53 (A) shows the effect when the decorative pattern P12 is aligned in the normal effect mode, and FIG. 53 (B) shows the effect when the decorative pattern P12 is aligned in the special effect mode. An effect mode is displayed.
As shown in FIG. 53 (A), in the normal effect mode, a game that prompts the player to operate the effect button 142 while displaying the operation valid period of 3 seconds when 5 seconds before the decorative symbols P12 are aligned. Person participation production. When the effect button 142 is operated by the player within the operation effective period, or when the operation effective period elapses without the operation button 142 being operated, the sub liquid crystal display device 106 and the logo accessory 107 are movable. The accessory moves to the front of the image display unit 114. Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main liquid crystal display device 108 displays an effect image P51 that displays the periphery of the movable accessory brightly so as to emphasize the movable accessory.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 53 (B), in the special effect mode as well as in the normal effect mode, when the decorative symbol P12 is 5 seconds before, the operation effective period 3 seconds is displayed in a countdown manner, and the player is informed. A player participation effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 142 is performed. When the effect button 142 is operated by the player within the operation effective period, or when the operation effective period elapses without the operation button 142 being operated, the sub liquid crystal display device 106 and the logo accessory 107 are movable. The accessory moves to the front of the image display unit 114. Further, even in the special effect mode, an effect image P51 for displaying the periphery of the movable accessory brightly so as to emphasize the movable accessory is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 108. At this time, the effect image P51 is displayed so as to overlap the performance notification effect image P47 and the music performance effect image P48. That is, at this timing, the game effect image is displayed with priority over the special effect image.

As described above, when the transition is made to the special effect mode, the game effect image such as the decoration symbol P22 is displayed smaller than the game effect image such as the decoration symbol P12 displayed in the normal effect mode. On the other hand, special effect images such as the performance announcement effect image P47 and the music performance effect image P48 are displayed relatively large. Therefore, in the special effect mode, it is difficult for the player to notice the alignment of the decorative symbols P22.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, even after the transition to the special effect mode, as in the normal effect mode, the effect image P51 that operates the movable accessory and further emphasizes the movable accessory is displayed on the screen of the image display unit 114. By displaying it, the player can easily understand that the decorative pattern P22 has been prepared.
The movable accessory composed of the sub liquid crystal display device 106 and the logo accessory 107 is a movable accessory for the jackpot finalizing effect, and is used for the effect when the decorative symbols P22 are aligned as described above. When the object moves to the front of the image display unit 114, the jackpot is determined.
This jackpot finalizing effect is subjected to motion control processing by the CPU of the lamp control unit 1170 for the movement of the movable accessory, and the effect image P51 associated with the jackpot finalizing effect is subjected to image output control processing by the overall CPU 1241. Production contents belonging to
As another jackpot finalizing effect executed by the gaming machine 1, there is a jackpot finalizing sound effect composed of a jackpot finalizing light emission pattern by a light emitting element and a jackpot finalizing sound by voice. It is an effect that is executed at a plurality of points from when the change effect is stopped to displayed.

Next, an effect in the case of shifting to the jackpot gaming state when shifting to the special effect mode will be described as an effect based on the time point of arrow A in FIG.
FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display image in the case of shifting to the jackpot gaming state in the normal performance mode. FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display image in the case of shifting to the jackpot gaming state in the special effect mode.
In the following description, the images used to produce the jackpot gaming state are collectively referred to as “jackpot gaming images”. The jackpot game image includes a round display image P61, an information image P62, a lively image P63, and a game effect image P64. These images will be specifically described later.

First, for comparison, a jackpot game image in the normal effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 54 shows an example in which there is a time reduction per 8R.
As shown in FIG. 54, a round display image P61 for displaying the number of rounds in each round is displayed. Here, the round display images P61 displayed as “Round 1” to “Round 8” are sequentially displayed for each round.

By winning the jackpot, the opening is displayed first. In the example of FIG. 54, “Right-handed!” Is used to indicate to the player that the lottery result is a big hit and that a game ball is launched toward the right half of the game area 114. The information image P62 informing the instruction information “is displayed.
Then, from round 1 to round 3, an effect is made using a lively image P63 having a content that enlivens the big hit. In the example of FIG. 54, the lively image P63 displays a message celebrating the jackpot by the character.

  In addition, from round 4 to round 7, a game is executed in which the type of jackpot is notified. This game is played using the game effect image P64. For example, the game effect image P64 displays “challenge chance” in the round 4 and notifies that the game will be started. In addition, the game effect image P64 displays the message “Press the button to clear it!” In round 5 and, in this embodiment, the game is played by pressing the effect button 142 (see FIG. 1-1). Will be explained. Then, the game effect image P64 causes the game to be actually played in round 6. Further, the game effect image P64 informs that, in this example, the game effect image P64 is “a big hit where a short-time gaming state occurs” by a display such as “determined short-time”.

Then, in the final round 8, an information image P62 is displayed that clearly indicates the shift to the time-saving mode in which the time-saving gaming state is reached after the end of the big hit game, and after the round 8 is finished, the ending information image P62 is displayed.
The ending information image P62 includes a jackpot end notification information image for notifying that the jackpot game is ended, and a CI (corporate identity) such as a manufacturer name or a manufacturer name of the gaming machine 1 following this information. This information is composed of a display information image and a card return promotion display information image for prompting the player to return the card following this information.
The jackpot effect ends when the ending effect ends. When the special effect mode is in effect even after the jackpot effect ends, the divided area display shown in FIG.

[If you are in a jackpot game when you are in special performance mode]
On the other hand, when the jackpot game is performed when the mode is shifted to the special effect mode, the main liquid crystal display device 108 displays the special effect images such as the performance notice effect image P47 and the music performance effect image P48.
Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot effect is performed when shifting to the special effect mode, a specific image is selected from the images constituting the jackpot game image according to a predetermined condition as the main liquid crystal. The entire display device 108 is displayed, or the display of a specific image among the images constituting the jackpot game image is omitted. Further, the performance notification effect image P47 and the music performance effect image P48 are displayed in a reduced size or the performance notification effect image P47 and the music performance effect image P48 as a whole are displayed according to the display mode of the jackpot game image.
Here, among the images constituting the jackpot game image, the condition for selecting a specific image to be displayed or omitted as a whole is, for example, an image including information that affects the number of balls for the player (right Whether it is a hitting notification image or the like, or an image including information that gives an accent to the game or information indicating that the game state is changed (a time-decision game effect, opening, ending image, etc. during a big hit) Set based on.

  FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display image when the game state is shifted to the jackpot gaming state in the special effect mode. FIG. 55 shows a case where, for example, a big hit (long win) gaming state is achieved when the special effect mode is entered, and a big hit (long win) effect is performed.

First, in the opening effect, the information image P62 informs that the lottery result is a big hit with the characters “big hit !!”. In addition, the information image P62 presents “right-handed” information in order to inform the player that a game ball is to be fired toward the right half of the game area 114.
These opening effect information images P62 are in a big hit gaming state where the big prize opening 120 is opened, and a game ball is launched toward the big prize opening 120 located on the right side of the gaming area 114. It contains information that affects the number of balls that are played by a person. Therefore, the information image P62 is displayed in a large size on the main liquid crystal display device 108 as a whole.
On the other hand, the music performance effect image P48 is reduced and displayed superimposed on the information image P62.
In this opening effect, the type of jackpot or name of the jackpot that has occurred may be displayed.

Note that if the transition to the special effect mode has not yet been made before the opening effect is started (the performance announcement effect or the music performance effect has not been executed), the opening effect shown in FIG. 54 is displayed.
Subsequent to the opening effect, during the long open round effect, the mid-round display image P61 is displayed in each round. The round display image P61 indicates the number of rounds that the special winning opening 120 opens, and includes information that influences the number of balls to be played by the player. Accordingly, the round display image P61 is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device.

However, in rounds 1 to 3 during the long opening round effect, the boost image P63 (see FIG. 54) that excites the jackpot displayed in the normal effect mode is not displayed. The player recognizes that the game has already shifted to the jackpot gaming state due to the opening effect, and can directly confirm that the round display image P61 and the big prize opening 120 are opened for a certain period of time. For this reason, the smashing image P63 that simply raises the jackpot does not include information that influences the number of balls for the player.
That is, it is considered that the display priority of the lively image P63 is lower than that of other jackpot game images. Therefore, in this embodiment, the display of the raised image P63 is omitted. At this time, conversely, the music performance effect image P48 is displayed large overall on the main liquid crystal display device 108.

When the long opening round effect is not started yet, the transition to the special effect mode has not yet been made (when the performance announcement effect or the music performance effect is not executed), each long opening round shown in FIG. Each long open round effect is displayed.
In addition, when a transition is made to a special effect mode during a certain long open round effect (when a performance announcement effect or a music performance effect is executed), the long open round effect shown in FIG. 55 is changed from the start timing of the next long open round effect. Switch.

  In addition, the game effect image P64 (promotion effect image) in the “challenge chance” game effect as the promotion effect performed from round 4 to round 7 in the long open round effect and the short time state in round 8 are notified. The information image P62 (short time notification effect image) is considered to include information that influences the number of balls for the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, the game effect image P64 and the information image P62 are displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 108 as a whole. On the other hand, the music performance effect image P48 is reduced and displayed superimposed on the game effect image P64.

When the “Challenge Chance” game production is not started yet, the transition to the special production mode has not yet been made (the performance announcement production or the music performance production has not been executed), and the “Challenge Chance” shown in FIG. A game effect is displayed.
In addition, when a transition is made to the special effect mode during the “challenge chance” game effect in a long open round (the performance announcement effect or the music performance effect is executed), from the start timing of the next long open round effect, FIG. Switch to “Challenge Chance” game production in the long open round shown in.

Then, after the final round 8, the jackpot end notification information image for notifying that the jackpot game is ended, and the CI (corporate name) such as the manufacturer name or the manufacturer name of the gaming machine 1 following this information (Identity) Display information image and an ending information image P62 composed of this information and a card return promotion display information image for prompting the player to return the card are displayed in the entire area of the main liquid crystal display device 108. .
The information image P62 of the ending effect informs the player of the change of the gaming state in which the jackpot gaming state is terminated and the subsequent gaming state (time-short gaming state (or non-time-short gaming state)) is notified to the player. And includes information for impressing the maker of the CI display to the player, and information for preventing card theft such as a card return promotion display, which is highly important for both the player and the maker. Since it is information, the music performance effect image P48 is not displayed.

After the jackpot gaming state is finished (after the ending is finished), the music performance effect image P48 is displayed in the upper area A1, and the decorative design P22 is displayed in the lower area A2.
Note that if the transition to the special effect mode has not yet been made before the ending effect is started (the performance announcement effect or the music performance effect has not been executed), the ending effect shown in FIG. 54 is displayed. In addition, in FIG. 55, when a special performance mode is entered in the middle of a certain round and a performance announcement effect that is a special performance is started, the performance announcement effect is displayed on the entire area (rounds 1 to 3) or divided into areas ( There are two methods for displaying in rounds 4-8.

The first method is based on the fact that the CPU 1151 has received the round start command related to the next round transmitted from the CPU 1101, and displays the entire area from the timing at which the overall CPU 1241 has received the in-round production start command transmitted from the CPU 1151. (1) A method for shifting from a region display to a region division display (a method based on a round start command transmitted from the CPU 1101).
The second method is based on the fact that the CPU 1151 has received the round end command related to the current round transmitted from the CPU 1101, and displays the entire area display from the timing when the overall CPU 1241 has received the during-round production end command transmitted from the CPU 1151. (1) A method for shifting from a region display to a region division display (a method based on a round end command transmitted from the CPU 1101).
By using any of these methods, if the special performance mode is entered in the middle of a round and the performance announcement performance is started as a special performance, the performance announcement performance is displayed in the whole area display or the area division display after the round ends. Can do.
As described above, when a special performance mode is entered in the middle of a certain round, and the performance announcement performance that is a special performance is started, the performance announcement performance is displayed in the entire area (rounds 1 to 3) or divided into areas (round) after this round. The timing displayed in 4 to 8) is based on the fact that the CPU 1151 has received a new command transmitted from the CPU 1101 after the end of the round.

Also, in FIG. 55, when the special effect mode ends in the middle of a certain round and becomes the normal effect mode, there are three methods for displaying the jackpot game image in the normal effect mode in the whole area display.
The first method is based on the fact that the CPU 1151 receives the round start command related to the next round transmitted from the CPU 1101, and the normal effect mode from the timing when the general CPU 1241 receives the during-round effect start command transmitted from the CPU 1151. A method of displaying the entire area of the jackpot game image in (a method based on a round start command transmitted from the CPU 1101).

The second method is based on the fact that the CPU 1151 has received the round end command related to the current round transmitted from the CPU 1101, and the normal effect mode from the timing at which the overall CPU 1241 has received the during-round effect end command transmitted from the CPU 1151. A method of displaying the entire area of the jackpot game image in (a method based on a round end command transmitted from the CPU 1101).

The third method is based on the fact that the CPU 1151 has received the round end command related to the current round transmitted from the CPU 1101, and the normal effect mode from the timing at which the overall CPU 1241 has received the in-round effect end command transmitted from the CPU 1151. A method of displaying the entire area of the jackpot game image in (a method based on a round end command transmitted from the CPU 1101).
By using any of these methods, when the special effect mode is ended and the normal effect mode is set in the middle of a certain round, the big hit game image in the normal effect mode can be displayed in the whole area display.

As another method, the jackpot effect ends when the ending effect of FIG. 55 ends, but when the special effect ends before the jackpot effect ends, the hold stored until the special effect ends. If there is a memory (or a hold memory stored until the end of the jackpot effect), the special effect mode is extended until the variable effects of all the stored memories are completed, and the special effect specific to the extended special effect mode is used. A second special effect may be executed. As the second special effect, for example, when the variable effect is a variable effect that is a big hit, a special jackpot finalizing effect different from the normal jackpot finalizing effect is performed, or a mini game unrelated to the game is performed. Also good. By doing in this way, gameability can be improved.
In this case, when the transition is made to the normal performance mode, the transition may be made based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command for the last variation effect in the extended special effect mode, or the next variation You may make it transfer based on having received the start command.

  As described above, when the special effect mode ends in the middle of a round and becomes the normal effect mode, when the jackpot game image in the normal effect mode is displayed in the entire area display, the timing for displaying in the entire area display is special. This is based on the fact that the CPU 1151 has received a new command transmitted from the CPU 1101 after the end of the effect mode.

  Here, in the special effect mode shown in FIG. 55, when a big hit (long hit) occurs when the performance announcement effect or the music performance effect is performed, and in the special effect mode not shown in FIG. When a short hit occurs when a performance announcement effect or a music performance effect is being performed, the display mode of the effect is arranged.

  [1] The opening effect is performed during the opening of the long hit effect, and this opening effect includes the display of the effect image for informing the type of jackpot and the effect image for urging to the right. For this reason, when performing the performance announcement effect or the music performance effect during the opening effect, the opening effect image or the music performance effect image is reduced while displaying the opening effect image in the upper area A1. Overlay the image.

  [2] During the long-opening round production of the long-performing production, the production during the round is performed. When this production during the round is a normal production during the round that does not include the promotion production, the performance announcement is made during the long-opening round game. The effect image or the music performance effect image is displayed large in the entire area, and the image of the effect during the round is superimposed on one of these two images.

  [3] When the production during the long open round includes the promotion production, since the importance of the production during the round is higher than the production during the round not including the promotion production, in the promotion production execution round during the long opening round game, While the round effect is displayed large in the entire area, the performance notification effect image or the music performance effect image is reduced and superimposed.

  [4] When the effect during the long open round includes the time notification effect, the effect during the round is higher than the effect during the round that does not include the time notification effect. , The effect during the round is displayed large in the entire area, and the performance notification effect image or the music performance effect image is reduced and superimposed.

  [5] During the short opening round production of the short hit game, as a short hit production, a short rushing production effect is performed, in which the player's expectation for entering the short-time gaming state is envisaged. Because it is highly important for the player, during the short open round game, the performance announcement effect image or the music performance effect image is reduced and the time entry is reduced while the image of the time entry entry effect is displayed in the upper area A1. Superimposed display on the image of the effect.

  [6] During the ending production, since the ending production performed during the ending is highly important for the player and the manufacturer, the ending production image is displayed in the entire area, and the performance announcement production image or the music performance production is displayed. The image is not displayed.

  As described above, when shifting to the jackpot game state in the special effect mode, basically, the jackpot game image is displayed as a whole and the special effect image is reduced and displayed. Further, depending on the contents of the images constituting the jackpot game image, the display of a part of the image constituting the jackpot game image to be displayed when shifting to the jackpot game state in the normal performance mode is omitted, and the special effect image is displayed as a whole. To be displayed. Thereby, the player can enjoy both the game effect and the special effect as appropriate. In addition, since necessary information for the game using the game ball is appropriately notified, the performance announcement performance and the music performance performance will not interfere with the game, so the player plays the game smoothly. be able to.

  In the above description, the jackpot effect is described as an example of the game effect executed in the special effect mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the present invention can also be applied to a case where a game effect such as a probability change notification that is performed in the state of transitioning to the special effect mode is performed. That is, for example, when performing a game effect such as performing a mini game and notifying the probability variation state according to the result of the game, the special effect image is reduced and displayed while the game effect screen is displayed as a whole. In addition, in the state where the game and the probability change notification are not performed, the special effect is displayed as a whole. Even with this configuration, the player can appropriately enjoy both the game effect and the special effect.

Note that the information image P62 or the game effect image P64 is entirely displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 108 in the opening and the rounds 4 to 8 in FIG. On the other hand, the music performance effect image P48 has been reduced and superimposed on the game effect image P64, but it may be less interesting for a player who wants to enjoy a promotion effect or the like. During the promotion effect, the music performance effect (or performance announcement effect) may not be executed (interrupted), or an image may not be displayed.
As a result, the interest of the player who wants to enjoy promotion and the like is not reduced.

[Normal production control processing by image sound control unit 1160]
56 to 60 are detailed flowcharts of the normal performance control process in S3830 of FIG. In this normal effect control process, setting information related to the normal effect is set in the control RAM 1245. The display on the main liquid crystal display device 108 is controlled based on the display list for the main liquid crystal created based on the setting information, thereby realizing a normal effect.

Subsequent to the music performance production start process in S3825, the overall CPU 1241 determines whether or not a command from the production control unit 1150 has been received as shown in FIG. 56 (S5601). If it is determined that a command has not been received (S5601: NO), the process proceeds to a music performance effect end process in S3835.

  When determining that the command from the effect control unit 1150 has been received (S5601: YES), the overall CPU 1241 determines whether the command is a customer waiting effect start command (S5602). If it is determined that the command is a customer waiting effect start command (S5602: YES), setting information for starting display of the predetermined customer waiting effect image is set in the control RAM 1245 (S5603). However, when the performance announcement effect or the music performance effect is executed at the timing when the image sound control unit 1160 receives the customer waiting effect start command, the general CPU 1241 changes to the customer waiting effect after the music performance effect ends. Set the setting information.

  In addition, although this embodiment demonstrated the case where a predetermined | prescribed customer waiting effect was performed, every time the first music performance effect of a new music is performed like a long hit game opening effect and an ending effect, it becomes a customer waiting effect. The video used may be changed as appropriate based on the latest song, or the latest song may be output from the speaker 138 during the customer waiting effect. Thereby, before the player starts the game, it is possible to grasp to what new music the performance of the music performance has been performed or to predict the new music to be performed next.

  When the overall CPU 1241 executes the process of S5603 or determines that the command from the effect control unit 1150 is not a customer command (S5602: NO), whether the command from the effect control unit 1150 is a hold display command or not. Is determined (S5605).

  The variation effect in the present embodiment is performed using the entire area when the performance announcement effect or the music performance effect is not performed, and is performed using the lower region A2 when these effects are performed. Therefore, the hold display image indicating that the first special symbol determination is put on hold is displayed in the entire area when these effects are not performed (see, for example, FIG. 51A), and these effects are performed. When displayed, it is displayed in the lower area A2 (see, for example, FIGS. 51A-2 and A-3). Further, since the special symbol determination is not performed during the special game, the hold display image is not displayed during the special game (see, for example, FIG. 55). In order to realize such display control of the hold display image, the overall CPU 1241 executes the following processing.

  That is, if the overall CPU 1241 determines that the command from the effect control unit 1150 is a hold display command (S5605: YES), for example, based on the processing status of the VDP 1242, determines whether or not the performance announcement effect is being performed. (S5606). If it is determined that the performance announcement effect is not being executed (step 2606: NO), it is determined whether or not the music performance effect is being executed (S5607). If it is determined that the music performance effect is not being executed (S5607: NO), setting information for additionally displaying the hold display image in the entire area is set in the control RAM 1245 (S5608).

If the overall CPU 1241 determines that the performance announcement effect is being executed (S5606: YES) or if it is determined that the music performance effect is being executed (S5607: YES), for example, the special game from the effect control unit 1150 Whether or not a special game is in progress is determined based on the reception status of the command related to the command, the elapsed time since the command was received, and the like (S5609).
When determining that the special game is not being played (S5609: NO), the overall CPU 1241 sets setting information for additionally displaying the hold display image in the lower area A2 in the control RAM 1245 (S5610).

The overall CPU 1241 executes the process of S5608, executes the process of S5610, determines that the command from the effect control unit 1150 is not a hold display command (S5605: NO), or is in a special game. When it determines (S5609: YES), it is determined whether the command from the production control part 1150 is a change production start command (S5612).

  If the overall CPU 1241 determines that the command from the effect control unit 1150 is a change effect start command (S5612: YES), the overall CPU 1241 determines whether or not the performance performance of the music performance has never been performed (No). S5613). Specifically, whether or not the current date and time indicated by the RTC information is the date and time before the first song performance stage date and the first song performance stage time of the new song A defined in the performance management table (see FIG. 40). It is determined whether or not the performance is in an unperformed state.

If the overall CPU 1241 determines that the performance has not been performed (S5613: YES), the overall CPU 1241 sets a default table in the control RAM 1245 as a display list creation table (S5614).
On the other hand, if the overall CPU 1241 determines that it is not in the unperformed state (S5613: NO), it determines whether or not the performance announcement effect is being executed (S5615), similarly to the process of S5606. If it is determined that the performance announcement effect is not being executed (S5615: NO), it is determined whether or not the music performance effect is being executed (S5616), similarly to the process of S5607.

  If the overall CPU 1241 determines that the performance announcement effect is being executed (S5615: YES) or if it is determined that the music performance effect is being executed (S5616: YES), the display list creation table is used for dot effects. The table is set in the control RAM 1245 (S5617).

  If it is determined that the music performance effect is not being executed (S5616: NO), the overall CPU 1241 identifies a new song used for the previous music performance effect (S5618). For example, if the new song information indicating the new song used for the performance of the music performance is stored in the control RAM 1245 and the new song information is updated each time the performance of the music performance is performed, it is used for the previous performance of the music performance. Can be identified.

  Subsequent to the processing of S5618, the overall CPU 1241 sets a main table corresponding to the specified new song in the control RAM 1245 (S5619). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 37, in the present embodiment, twelve main tables of the new song A main table to the new song L main table are stored in the control ROM 1244. The main table of the new song specified in the process of S5618 is selected and set in the control RAM 1245.

  The overall CPU 1241 acquires a random number for selection when the process of S5617 is executed, when the process of S5614 is executed, or when the process of S5619 is executed (S5620). Specifically, the image sound control unit 1160 performs a random number update process for updating the selection random number or the like at a predetermined cycle shorter than the interrupt process, and the overall CPU 1241 performs the effect control on the selection random number. The value at the time of receiving the change effect start command from the unit 1150 is acquired.

Then, the overall CPU 1241 determines the display content in the normal effect based on the acquired selection random number and the set display list creation table (S5621). In the display list creation table, a special symbol variation pattern and a plurality of effect patterns of normal effects are associated with each other. Then, for each of the plurality of effect patterns of the normal effect, the type of image data used as a material when generating images of each effect (decorative symbol effect, background image effect, character effect, etc.) constituting the normal effect, A random number for selection is associated. The overall CPU 1241 first analyzes the change effect start command and specifies the effect pattern of the current normal effect. Then, the type of image data used for the normal effect is determined by specifying the type of image data corresponding to the random number for selection acquired in the process of S5620 for the specified effect pattern. The types of image data include default, new song A, new song B, new song C, new song D, new song E, new song F, new song G, new song H, new song I, new song J, new song K, and new song L. For example, when the default is selected as the type of image data for the background image effect, the default background image generated using the default image data is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 108, and the new song A is selected. A new song A background image generated using the image data of the new song A is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 108.

  The overall CPU 1241 sets setting information for starting display of the game effect image having the display content determined in S5621 in the control RAM 1245 (S5622). The display list generated based on the setting information is set in the display list storage area 1291, so that the changing effect as the normal effect using the main liquid crystal display device 108 is started.

  In this way, the overall CPU 1241 causes the main liquid crystal display device 108 to perform a normal effect when the special symbols are variably displayed on the first special symbol display 201 or the second special symbol display 202. At this time, it is determined which music performance effect of the new song has been executed by the main liquid crystal display device 108, and a display list creation table is selected based on the determination result.

  Here, a change in the background image during the normal production triggered by each display list creation table and the music performance production will be described. Here, the change in the normal effect will be described by taking an example of the change in the background image triggered by the music performance effect. However, the character displayed on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 108, the BGM output from the speaker 138, and the like are also described. It changes with the performance of music performance.

  FIG. 61 is a schematic diagram of a default table. As illustrated in FIG. 61, the default table defines two types of image data for generating a background image: a first default background and a second default background. For example, when the selection random number is 100, in the default table, 50 different selection random numbers are assigned to these two types of backgrounds. For this reason, in S5621, the ratio is selected at a rate of 50%. This default table is used from the time when the gaming machine 1 is introduced into the pachinko hall until the first performance performance of the new song A is performed, and thereafter, it is not used even in the state where all songs are released.

  FIG. 62 is a schematic diagram of the new song A main table. As illustrated in FIG. 62, the new song A main table defines three types of image data for generating a background image: a first default background, a second default background, and a new song A background. . For example, if the selection random number is 100, in the new song A main table, 25 selection random numbers are assigned to the first default background, and 25 similarly to the second default background. Random numbers for selection are assigned, and 50 random numbers for selection are assigned to the background of the new song A. Therefore, in S5621, the new song A background is selected at a rate of 50%, the second default background is selected at a rate of 25%, and the first default background is selected at the rate of 25%.

  The new song A main table is used for one week from the start of the first song performance effect of the new song A to the start of the first song performance effect of the new song B before shifting to the open state of all songs. When the first song performance of the new song A is performed, the background image of the new song A is most likely to appear at 50% for one week, so the player can produce the new song A even after the song performance of the new song A is performed. Can also enjoy the performance of the new song A after the first time.

  The new song A main table is different from the default table in that the new song A background can be newly selected. Here, for example, if the selection ratios of the first default background, the second default background, and the new song A background are set to be the same, the appearance rate of the normal effect based on the new song A is lowered. As a result, the opportunity for the player to enjoy the normal performance based on the new song A is reduced, and it is clearly recognized that the normal production has been switched by the first song performance production of the new song A (the production related to the new song A has been newly added). There is a possibility of disappearing. Thus, in the present embodiment, the selection rate of the new song A background is increased by lowering the selection rates of the first default background and the second default background compared to the default table.

  As is clear from the above description, the general CPU 1241 selects the default table until the first music performance effect of the new song A is performed, and uses the normal effect data stored in the CGROM 1248 as the normal effect. The main liquid crystal display device 108 is executed. On the other hand, after the first performance performance of the new song A is performed, the selection rates of the first default background and the second default background are set lower than the default table, and instead, the selection rate of the new song A background. The new song A main table set with the highest is selected. Thereby, the main liquid crystal display device 108 is caused to execute the effect using the special effect data (here, the image data of the new song A) stored in the CGROM 148 as the normal effect.

  FIG. 63 is a schematic diagram of the new song B main table. As illustrated in FIG. 63, the new song B main table defines three types of image data for generating a background image: a second default background, a new song A background, and a new song B background. For example, if the selection random number is 100, in the new song B main table, 15 selection random numbers are assigned to the second default background, and 35 selections are made for the new song A background. A random number for use is assigned, and 50 selection random numbers are assigned to the background of the new song B. For this reason, in S5621, the new song B background is selected at the rate of 50%, the new song A background is selected at the rate of 35%, and the second default background is selected at the rate of the remaining 15%.

  This new song B main table is used for one week from the start of the first song performance effect of the new song B until the start of the first song performance effect of the new song C before the transition to the all songs open state. When the initial performance performance of the new song B is performed, the background image of the new song B is most likely to appear at 50%, so that the player can enjoy the performance of the new song B even after the performance performance of the new song B is performed. In addition, before the transition to the state in which all songs are released, it is possible to further enjoy the performance performance of the new song B after the first time.

  The new song B main table is different from the new song A main table in that the new song B can be newly selected and the first default background is excluded. Here, if the first default background is not excluded, the selectable backgrounds are the first default background, the second default background, the new song A background, and the new song B background. The problem arises that the background selection rate cannot be set too high. Further, when trying to further increase the selection rate of the new song B background, there arises a problem that not only the default background but also the selection rate of the new song A background must be lowered. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the new song B is excluded by excluding the first default background included in the new song A main table (the selection rate is “0”) and lowering the selection rate of the second default background. While the background selection rate is increased, the selection rate of the new song A background is suppressed from being unnecessarily low.

  FIG. 64 is a schematic diagram of the new song C main table. As illustrated in FIG. 64, in the new song C main table, three types of new song A background, new song B background, and new song C background are defined as types of image data for generating a background image. For example, if the selection random number is 100, in the new song C main table, 20 selection random numbers are assigned to the new song A background, and 30 selection random numbers are used for the new song B background. A random number is assigned, and 50 selection random numbers are assigned to the new song C background. Therefore, in S5621, the new song C background is selected at a rate of 50%, the new song B background is selected at a rate of 30%, and the new song A background is selected at a rate of 20%.

  This new song C main table is used for one week from the start of the first song performance performance of the new song C to the start of the first song performance performance of the new song D before the transition to the all songs release state. When the first song performance performance of the new song C is performed, the background image of the new song C is most likely to appear at 50%. Therefore, the player can enjoy the performance of the new song C even after the performance performance of the new song C is performed. In addition, before the transition to the state in which all songs are released, it is possible to further enjoy the performance performance of the new song C after the first time.

  The new song C main table is different from the new song B main table in that the new song C is newly selectable and the second default background is excluded. That is, the second default background is excluded in order to set the appearance rate of the new song C background image to the highest and set the appearance rate of the new song A and the new song B as high as possible. That is, when the new song C main table is used, the normal effect data stored in the CGROM 1248 is not used, and only the special effect data is used.

  FIG. 65 is a schematic diagram of the new song D main table. As illustrated in FIG. 65, in the new song D main table, four types of new song A background, new song B background, new song C background, and new song D background are defined as types of image data for generating a background image. ing. For example, if the selection random number is 100, in the new song D main table, 10 selection random numbers are assigned to the new song A background, and 20 selections are used for the new song B background. Random numbers are assigned, 30 selection random numbers are assigned to the new song C background, and 40 selection random numbers are assigned to the new song D background. For this reason, in S5621, the new song D background is selected at a rate of 40%, the new song C background is selected at a rate of 30%, the new song B background is selected at a rate of 20%, and the remaining 10% is selected. New song A background is selected.

  The new song D main table is used for one week from when the first song performance effect of the new song D is started to when the first song performance effect of the new song E is started before shifting to the open state of all songs. When the first song performance production of the new song D is performed, the background image of the new song C is most likely to appear at 40%. Therefore, the player can enjoy the production of the new song D even after the song performance production of the new song D is performed. In addition, before the transition to the state in which all songs are released, it is possible to further enjoy the performance performance of the new song D after the first time.

  The new song D main table is different from the new song C main table in that the new song D can be newly selected. In addition, when comparing by the selection rate, the selection rate of the first default background and the second default background is set to 0% in both main tables, so that the appearance rate of the default background is lowered in the new song D main table. Instead of the method, the selection rate of the new song D is set to the highest value by lowering the selection rate of the previously performed new song (here, new songs A to C). The same applies to the tables after the new song E main table.

FIG. 66 is a schematic diagram of the new song E main table. As illustrated in FIG. 66, the new song E
The main table defines five types of image data for generating a background image: new song A background, new song B background, new song C background, new song D background, and new song E background. For example, if the selection random number is 100, in the new song E main table, five selection random numbers are assigned to the new song A background, and ten selection random numbers are used for the new song B background. Random numbers are assigned, 20 selection random numbers are assigned to the new song C background, 25 selection random numbers are assigned to the new song D background, and 40 selections are assigned to the new song E background. Random numbers are assigned. Therefore, in S5621, the new song E background is selected at a rate of 40%, the new song D background is selected at a rate of 25%, the new song C background is selected at a rate of 20%, and the new song is selected at a rate of 10%. B background is selected, and the new song A background is selected at the remaining 5%.

  FIG. 67 is a schematic diagram of the new song L main table. As illustrated in FIG. 67, in the new song L main table, twelve types of new song A background to new song L background are defined, and as with the other main tables, the selection rate of the latest song is the highest. A random number for selection is assigned (20% in the example shown in FIG. 67). In this new song L main table, the background images of all new songs used for the performance of the music performance are defined, so until one week has passed since the first performance performance of the new song L was performed, the player Can enjoy the normal effects of all new songs, centering on the normal effects using the new song L.

  FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram for describing a change in image data used for drawing a background image. FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram for describing changes in the appearance rate of various background images. In FIG. 68 and FIG. 69, “◎” indicates the background that is most likely to appear, “◯” indicates the background that may not appear to have the highest appearance rate, and “×” indicates the possibility that it may appear. There is no background.

  From the time when the gaming machine 1 is introduced to the pachinko hall until one week elapses, a display list is created using the default table (see FIG. 61) described above for the normal performance. For this reason, the background image that appears in the normal performance until one week has passed since the introduction is the first default background or the second default background. In the second week of introduction, a display list is created using the above-described new song A main table (see FIG. 62). For this reason, in the normal production in the second week of introduction, the new song A background is most likely to appear, the second default background is likely to appear next, and the first default background is least likely to appear.

  In the third week of introduction, a display list is created using the new song B main table (see FIG. 63). For this reason, in the normal performance in the third week of introduction, the new song B background appears newly at the highest appearance rate, and the first default background does not appear. In the fourth week after introduction, a display list is created using the new song C main table (see FIG. 64). For this reason, in the normal performance in the fourth week of introduction, the new song C background newly appears at the highest appearance rate, and the second default background also does not appear. Thereafter, every time one week elapses, a background image of a new new song is added and the number of types of background images finally becomes twelve. Therefore, variations of normal effects increase.

  Up to this point, the background image in the normal performance before the release of the entire song has been described. However, when the release of the entire song is performed, the type of the new song that is performed every hour based on the power-on is the performance of the song performance. It is changed every time it is performed (see FIG. 43). For this reason, the selection switching of the display list creation table was performed every week before the release of all songs, but the selection switching of the display list creation table is performed every hour when the release of all songs is performed. become.

By the way, in the main table (for example, the new song L main table and the new song K main table) corresponding to the new song used for the last song performance production before all songs are released, the new song used for the initial song performance production. The appearance rate of the background image of the initial new song is extremely low (see, for example, FIG. 62 and FIG. 67) compared to the main table corresponding to (new song A main table and table on the new song B side). For this reason, for example, during the first week after the performance of the first song performance of the new song L, the background images of the new song A and the new song B are very unlikely to appear, and some players cannot see these background images. It is also possible.

  On the other hand, in the all-music release state, the selection switching of the display list creation table is performed every hour. For this reason, for example, the new song A main table and the new song B main table are used. As a result, it is possible to enjoy a background image that has been limited to only one hour of the day, but has been less visible.

  By the way, as described above, the time required for one variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol is longer than the start time of the performance announcement effect, and the variation effect develops before the start time of the music performance effect. In this case, the performance effect image P47 is displayed in the entire region display at the development timing, and the performance announcement effect image P47 is displayed in a reduced size and superimposed on the entire region display (see FIG. 51B). In addition, if the time required for one variation production accompanying the variation display of the special symbol is longer than the start time of the performance announcement production, and the variation production does not develop before the start time of the music performance production, the performance The announcement effect is not performed, and at the timing when the musical performance performance is started, the variation performance image remains in the entire area display, and the musical performance performance image P48 is displayed in a reduced size and superimposed on the entire area display (FIG. 51 (C )reference). In order to realize such control, the overall CPU 1241 executes the following processing regarding the change effect.

  That is, when the overall CPU 1241 executes the process of S5622 or determines that the variable effect start command has not been received (S5612: NO), the development timing of the effect in the variable effect is exemplified as shown in FIG. It is then determined whether or not the development start flag indicating whether or not to start the performance announcement effect is set to “ON” (S5726). If it is determined that the development start flag is set to “ON” (S5726: YES), it is determined whether or not the development timing is reached (S5727) as in the process of S4519 (see FIG. 45). ).

  If the overall CPU 1241 determines that it is the development (separation) timing (S5727: YES), it sets setting information for reducing the display of the special effect image in the control RAM 1245 (S5728). When the display list generated based on the setting information set in S5728 is set in the display list storage area 1291, the drawing process as described above based on FIG. 14-2 is performed.

  The overall CPU 1241 executes the process of S5728, determines that the development start flag is not set to “ON” (S5726: NO), or determines that it is not the development timing (S5727: NO). For example, based on whether or not the music performance flag is set to “ON”, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the music performance effect (S5729).

When the overall CPU 1241 determines that it is the start timing of the music performance effect (S5729: YES), the overall CPU 1241 determines whether or not a prohibition flag indicating whether or not to prohibit execution of the performance announcement effect is set to “ON”. (S5730). If it is determined that the prohibition flag is set to “ON” (S5730: YES), the setting information for reducing the display of the special effect image is displayed in the control RAM 1245 in the same manner as in the process of S5728. It is set (S5731). Thereby, as illustrated in FIG. 51C, the special effect image is reduced and displayed simultaneously with the start of the music performance effect.

  The overall CPU 1241 executes the process of S5731, determines that it is not the start timing of the music performance effect (S5729: NO), or determines that the prohibition flag is not set to “ON” (S5730: NO). ), It is determined whether or not the command from the effect control unit 1150 is a change effect end command (S5733). Here, if it is determined that the command is a variation effect end command (S5733: YES), the variation effect being executed by the main liquid crystal display device 108 and the speaker 138 is terminated (S5734).

  By the way, when the after-end start flag indicating whether or not to start the performance announcement effect after the variation effect accompanying the variation display of this special symbol is ended is set to “ON”, the variation display of this special symbol It is necessary to start the performance announcement after the variation production accompanying the end. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the first special symbol determination is not suspended, the variation of the special symbol next to the variation display of the special symbol of this time is not immediately started. At the timing when the display ends, the performance announcement effect is started, and at the same time, the variable effect image including the decorative symbols in the stopped display state is displayed in dots in the lower area A2. In order to realize such control, the overall CPU 1241 executes the following processing regarding the change effect.

  That is, the overall CPU 1241 determines whether or not the after-start flag is set to “ON” following the processing of S5734 (S5735). If it is determined that the start flag after the end is set to “ON” (S5735: YES), whether or not the first special symbol determination is suspended as in the process of S4522 (see FIG. 45). Is determined (S5736). Here, when it is determined that the first special symbol determination is not suspended (S5736: NO), setting information for dot-displaying the variable effect image including the stopped decorative symbol in the lower area A2 is stored in the control RAM 1245. It is set (S5737).

  If the overall CPU 1241 executes the process of S5737 and determines that the command from the effect control unit 1150 is not a variable effect end command (S5733: NO), the start flag after the end is not set to “ON”. When it is determined (S5735: NO), or when it is determined that the first special symbol determination is suspended (S5736: YES), the following processing is executed regarding the winning effect related to the long win game.

  That is, as illustrated in FIG. 58, the overall CPU 1241 determines whether or not the command from the effect control unit 1150 is an opening effect start command related to a long hit game (S5840). Here, if it is determined that the command is an opening effect start command (S5840: YES), whether or not it is an unperformed state in which a music performance effect has never been performed, as in the process of S5613 (see FIG. 57). Is determined (S5841). Here, when it is determined that the performance has not been performed (S5841: YES), a default opening effect image is selected (S5842), and conversely, when it is determined that the performance has not been performed (S5841: NO), An opening effect image based on the new song used for the music performance effect is selected (S5843).

Next, the overall CPU 1241 sets setting information for starting display of the entire area of the opening effect image selected in the process of S5842 or S5843 in the control RAM 1245 (S5844).
Next, the overall CPU 1241 determines whether or not the performance announcement effect is being executed (S5845), similarly to the processing of S5606 (see FIG. 57). Here, when it is determined that the performance announcement effect is not being executed (S5845: NO), it is determined whether or not the music performance effect is being executed (S5846), similarly to the process of S5607 (see FIG. 57). ).

If the overall CPU 1241 determines that the music performance effect is not being executed (S5846: NO), the overall CPU 1241 proceeds to the process of S5849. On the other hand, when it is determined that the performance announcement effect is being executed (S5845: YES), or when it is determined that the music performance effect is being executed (S5846: YES), the special effect image is displayed in a reduced manner. Setting information is set in the control RAM 1245 (S5847).
Thereby, as illustrated in the opening display of FIG. 55, the opening effect image is displayed in the entire area, and the special effect image (music performance effect image P48) is reduced and displayed superimposed on the opening effect image. Become.

Subsequently, if the overall CPU 1241 determines that the command from the effect control unit 1150 is not an opening command (S5840: NO), whether the command from the effect control unit 1150 is an in-round effect start command related to a long hit game. It is determined whether or not (S5849).
The determination process in S5849 can be replaced with “determine whether or not the command from the effect control unit 1150 is an in-round effect end command (S5849)”.
Here, when it is determined that the command is an in-round production start command (S5849: YES), it is determined whether or not the performance announcement production is being executed (S5849-1), similarly to the process of S5845. Here, when it is determined that the performance announcement effect is not being executed (S5849-1: NO), it is determined whether or not the music performance effect is being executed (S5849-2), similarly to the process of S5846. .

If the overall CPU 1241 determines that the music performance effect is not being executed (S5849-2: NO), the general CPU 1241 sets setting information for displaying the effect image during the round according to the number of rounds in the control RAM 1245 ( S5850).
On the other hand, when it is determined that the performance announcement effect is being executed (S5849-1: YES), or when it is determined that the music performance effect is being executed (S5849-2: YES), this is indicated by the round effect start command. It is determined whether the number of rounds performed is 4 to 8 (S5849-3). When it is determined that the number of rounds is 4 to 8 (S5849-3: YES), setting information for reducing the display of the special effect image is set in the control RAM 1245 (S5849-4).
Thereby, as illustrated in the R4 display to R8 display of FIG. 55, the challenge chance game effect image that is a game effect image, the time-determined (or non-time-determined) image, and the time-lapse entry image are displayed in the entire area. At the same time, the special effect image (music performance effect image P48) is reduced and displayed in a superimposed manner on these game effect images.

  When the overall CPU 1241 determines that the command from the effect control unit 1150 is not the effect start command during round (S5849: NO), or when the process of S5849-4, S5849-5, or S5850 is executed, the effect control is performed. It is determined whether the command from the unit 1150 is a music selection screen display command (S5951). If it is determined that the command is a music selection screen display command (S5951: YES), the latest music is specified (S5952). For example, if the new song information indicating the new song used for the performance of the music performance is stored in the control RAM 1245 and the new song information is updated each time the performance of the music performance is performed, it is used for the previous performance of the music performance. It is possible to specify a new song (latest song) that has been made.

  Subsequent to the process of S5952, the general CPU 1241 sets setting information for displaying a music selection screen in which all new songs already performed including the latest music specified in the process of S5952 can be selected in the control RAM 1245. (S5953).

If the overall CPU 1241 determines that the command from the effect control unit 1150 is not a music selection screen display command (S5951: NO), or executes the process of S5953, it is a command music playback command from the effect control unit 1150. It is determined whether or not (S5954). If it is determined that the command is a music playback command (S5954: YES), setting information for starting the music of the selected new music is set in the control RAM 1245 (S5955). Note that it is possible to specify which music is selected based on an operation command that is set in the RAM 1153 in the process of S3510 (see FIG. 35) and is transmitted from the effect control unit 1150 in the transmission process of S3515. .

  If the overall CPU 1241 determines that the command from the effect control unit 1150 is not a music reproduction command (S5954: NO), or when the process of S5955 is executed, the effect control unit 1150 receives the command as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not this command is an ending effect start command related to the long hit game (S5958). If it is determined that the command is an ending effect start command (S5958: YES), setting information for starting display of the entire area of the ending effect image based on the same new song used for the opening effect is set in the control RAM 1245. (S5959).

Next, the overall CPU 1241 determines whether or not the performance announcement effect is being executed (S5959-1), similarly to the process of S5849-1. If it is determined that the performance announcement effect is not being executed (S5959-1: NO), it is determined whether or not the music performance effect is being executed (S5959-), similarly to the process of S5849-2. 2).
If the overall CPU 1241 determines that the music performance effect is not being executed (S5959-2: NO), the overall CPU 1241 proceeds to the process of S6060.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the performance announcement effect is being executed (S5959-1: YES), or when it is determined that the music performance effect is being executed (S5959-2: YES), a special effect image is displayed. Setting information for reduced display is set in the control RAM 1245 (S5959-3).
Thereby, as illustrated in the ending display of FIG. 55, the ending effect image which is a game effect image is displayed in the entire area, and the special effect image (music performance effect image P48) is reduced and superimposed on the ending effect image. Will be displayed.
When the overall CPU 1241 determines that the command from the effect control unit 1150 is not an ending effect start command (S5958: NO), or when the process of S5959-2 or S5959-3 is executed, The following processing is executed for the production.

  That is, the overall CPU 1241 determines whether or not the command from the effect control unit 1150 is a short hit effect start command (S6060). Here, when it is determined that the command is a short hit effect start command (S6060: YES), it is determined whether or not the performance is in an unperformed state, similar to the process of S5613 (S6061). If it is determined that the performance has not been performed (S6061: YES), a default short win effect image is selected (S6062). On the contrary, when it is determined that the performance is not in the unperformed state (S6061: NO), the short hit effect image based on the new song used for the last music performance effect is selected (S6063).

  When executing the process of S6062 or executing the process of S6063, the overall CPU 1241 determines whether or not the performance announcement effect is being executed, similarly to the process of S5606 (S6064). If it is determined that the performance announcement effect is not being executed (S6064: NO), it is determined whether or not the music performance effect is being executed (S6065), similarly to the process of S5607.

If the overall CPU 1241 determines that the music performance effect is not being executed (S6065: NO), the control CPU 1241 uses the setting information for starting the entire area display of the short hit effect image selected in the process in S6062 or the process in S6063 for control. It is set in the RAM 1245 (S6066). On the other hand, when it is determined that the performance announcement effect is being executed (S6064: YES), or when it is determined that the music performance effect is being executed (S6065: YES), the short time selected in the processing of S6062 or the processing of S6063 Setting information for starting the reduced display of the winning effect image is set in the control RAM 1245 (S6067).

  Next, when the overall CPU 1241 determines that the command from the effect control unit 1150 is not the short hit effect start command (S6060: NO), when the process of S6066 is executed, or when the process of S6067 is executed, It is determined whether or not the command from the control unit 1150 is a short hit effect end command (S6068). Here, when it is determined that the command is a short hit effect end command (S6068: YES), the short hit effect being executed is ended (S6069). When the process of S6069 is performed, or when it is determined that the command from the effect control unit 1150 is not the short hit effect end command (S6068: NO), the process proceeds to the music performance effect end process of S3835.

  Although not shown in the detailed flowchart of the normal effect control process of FIGS. 56 to 60, the illegal prize display 1 command, the illegal prize display 2 command transmitted by the command transmission process by the CPU 1151 described above, or the When the overall CPU 1241 receives either the illegal prize display 3 command or the illegal prize display 4 command, if it is an illegal prize display 1 command, setting information for starting the first start port error display is set. If it is an illegal prize display 2 command, setting information for starting the second start opening error display is set, and if it is an illegal prize display 3 command, setting information for starting the specific prize opening error display is set. If it is a winning display 4 command, setting information for starting a large winning opening error display is set.

[Music Performance Performing End Process by Image Sound Control Unit 1160]
FIG. 70 is a detailed flowchart of the music performance effect end processing in S3835 of FIG. Following the normal performance control process of S3830, the overall CPU 1241 determines whether or not the elapsed time since the start of the music performance effect has reached the time required for the music performance effect, for example, as illustrated in FIG. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the musical performance performance has ended (S2701). If it is determined that the music performance effect has not ended (S2701: NO), the process proceeds to the image output control process of S3840.

  If the overall CPU 1241 determines that the music performance effect has ended (S2701: YES), it is determined whether or not the music performance effect end process for returning the game effect image and the customer waiting effect image to the entire area display has been completed. Determination is made (S7001). Here, when it is determined that the end processing has not been completed (S7001: NO), for example, the customer is determined based on whether or not the variable production start command is received after receiving the customer waiting production start command from the production control unit 1150. It is determined whether it is in a waiting state (S7003). If it is determined that the customer is waiting (S7003: YES), setting information for returning to the normal screen mode is set in the control RAM 1245 (S7004).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the general CPU 1241 is not in the customer waiting state (S7003: NO), for example, based on the reception status of the command related to the special game from the effect control unit 1150, it is determined whether or not the long hit game is in progress. Is determined (S7005). If it is determined that the game is not long hit (S7005: NO), it is determined whether a start command (for example, a variable effect start command) is received (S7006). If it is determined that the start command has not been received (S7006: YES), the process proceeds to the image output control process of S3840.

When determining that the start command has been received (S7006), the overall CPU 1241 sets setting information for returning to the normal screen mode in the control RAM 1245 (S7007).
In other words, when the music performance effect is finished and the customer is waiting, the process of S7004 is performed and immediately returned to the normal screen mode. If not, for example, the screen is returned to the normal screen mode at the timing when the variation effect is started in response to reception of the variation effect start command.

  Subsequent to the processing of S7007, the overall CPU 1241 determines whether or not the replay flag related to music playback is set to “ON” (S7008). If it is determined that the replay flag is not set to “ON” (S7008: NO), the process proceeds to the image output control process of S3840.

  If the overall CPU 1241 determines that the replay flag is set to “ON” (S7008: YES), the control CPU 1241 uses the setting information for starting playback of the new song indicated by the song information stored in the control RAM 1245 for control. The RAM 1245 is set (S7009). As a result, a new song that has not been played to the end due to the interruption of the performance announcement effect or the music performance effect, despite being selected by the player during the long hit game, is played from the beginning. Then, following the processing of S7009, the overall CPU 1241 sets the replay flag to “OFF” (S7010).

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 1241 determines that a long game is being played (S7005: YES), based on whether or not an effect start command for the last round is received from the effect control unit 1150, whether or not the start of the last round It is determined whether or not (S7011). If it is determined that it is before the start of the final round (S7011: YES), the process proceeds to S7006. In this case, the process proceeds to S7007 at the timing when the in-round production start command is received as the start command.

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 1241 determines that it is not before the start of the final round (S7011: NO), for example, whether or not the ending effect has ended based on the elapsed time since the reception of the ending effect start command. Is determined (S7012). If it is determined that the ending effect has not ended (S7012: NO), the process proceeds to the image output control process of S3840. Conversely, if it is determined that the ending effect has ended (S7012: YES), the process proceeds to S7007.

By the way, in the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the performance of the music performance is finished, the main liquid crystal display device 108 notifies that the performance of the music performance using the new song to be performed next (unperformed music) is performed next. The song preview will be performed. For example, when the performance performance of the new song A is finished, the next song notice effect related to the new song B, which is the next unperformed song, is performed. For example, when the performance performance of the new song F is finished, the next song related to the new song G to be performed next is performed. Perform a notice effect. In order to realize such a next song notice effect, when the music performance effect end process is completed, the following process is performed.
That is, if the overall CPU 1241 determines that the music performance effect end processing has been completed (S7001: YES), the overall CPU 1241 determines whether there is an unperformed performance (S7014). Specifically, with reference to the performance management table (see FIG. 40), it is determined whether or not there is a new song whose first music performance effect date is later than the new song used for the music performance effect performed this time.

When determining that there is an unperformed song (S7014: YES), the overall CPU 1241 determines whether or not the next song notice effect has been completed (S7015). If it is determined that the next song notice effect has not been completed (S7015: NO), setting information for executing the next song notice effect is set in the control RAM 1245 (S7016). Specifically, the first song performance stage date of each unperformed song is compared, and the new song whose earliest song performance stage date is the first is identified as the new song to be performed next, for example, the title of the identified new song, Setting information for displaying on the main liquid crystal display device 108 an effect image including the remaining days until the first music performance effect of the new song is performed is set in the control RAM 1245. The title of the new song and the remaining days can be determined based on the information stored in the performance management table and the RTC information.

[Image Output Control Processing by Image Sound Control Unit 1160]
FIG. 71 is a detailed flowchart of the image output control process in S3840 of FIG. Subsequent to the music performance effect end processing in S3835, the overall CPU 1241 determines whether or not setting information related to the main liquid crystal is stored in the control RAM 1245 (S7101). In the present embodiment, the normal effect (variation effect or winning effect), performance announcement effect, music performance effect, music playback effect, and error display are performed using the main liquid crystal display device 108. Whether or not at least one of setting information for executing, setting information for executing a performance announcement effect, setting information for executing a music performance effect, and setting information for starting music playback is stored Determine.

  If the overall CPU 1241 determines that the setting information related to the main liquid crystal is stored (S7101: YES), the overall CPU 1241 starts from the lowest level first layer defined in the stored setting information and the priority management table described above. It is determined which image is preferentially displayed based on the priority of each layer of the uppermost eighth layer, and which output control pattern among the output control patterns 1 to 3 is used to execute image output control. Then, it is determined what screen configuration should be constructed, and a display list for the main liquid crystal is created based on the determination result (S7102). The created display list is set in the display list storage area 1291 (S7103).

  When the overall CPU 1241 executes the process of S7103 or determines that the setting information related to the main liquid crystal is not stored (S7101: NO), it determines whether or not the setting information related to the sub liquid crystal is stored in the control RAM 1245. Determination is made (S7104). In this embodiment, since the notification effect related to the music performance effect is performed using the sub liquid crystal display device 106, it is determined in this S7104 whether or not setting information for executing the notification effect is stored.

  If the overall CPU 1241 determines that the setting information regarding the sub liquid crystal is stored (S7104: YES), it creates a display list for the sub liquid crystal (S7105), and sets the created display list in the display list storage area 1291. (S7106). When the process of S7106 is executed, or when it is determined that the setting information regarding the sub liquid crystal is not stored (S7104: NO), the process proceeds to the audio output control process of S3845.

[Audio Output Control Processing by Image Sound Control Unit 1160]
FIG. 72 is a detailed flowchart of the audio output control process in S3845 of FIG. Subsequent to the image output control process of S3840, the overall CPU 1241 executes the following process to synchronize the sound output from the speaker 138 with the effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 108 in accordance with the image output control process. To do.

That is, for example, the overall CPU 1241 displays the variation effect image related to the variation effect based on whether or not the display list for the main liquid crystal including the instruction to start the variation effect is set in the display list storage area 1291 in the process of S7103. It is determined whether or not the process has been started (S7201).
In the determination of S7201, a determination is made as to which audio is to be preferentially output based on the priority of each layer from the lowest first layer to the highest eighth layer specified in the priority management table. The

  If the overall CPU 1241 determines that display of the variation effect image is started (S7201: YES), the overall CPU 1241 determines whether or not the variation effect image is displayed in dots in the lower area A2 (S7202). Here, when it is determined that dots are not displayed (S7202: NO), that is, when the entire area display of the fluctuation effect image is started, the sound output regarding the fluctuation effect image is acoustically synchronized with the fluctuation effect image display. The DSP 1243 is started (S7203). On the other hand, when it is determined that the display is a dot display (S7202: YES), the process of S7203 is not performed in order to prioritize the audio output related to the performance announcement effect or the music performance effect performed using the upper area A1. The process proceeds to S7204 described later.

The overall CPU 1241 executes the process of S7203, determines that the display of the variable effect image is not started (S7201: NO), or determines that the variable effect image is displayed in dots (S7202). : YES), it is determined whether or not to start the reduced display of the variable effect image (S7204). For example, when the display list for the main liquid crystal is created based on the setting information set in the control RAM 1245 by the process of S5728 (see FIG. 58), it is determined that the reduced display is started.
In the determination in S7204, a determination is made as to which audio is to be preferentially output based on the priority of each layer from the lowest first layer to the highest eighth layer specified in the priority management table. The

  If the overall CPU 1241 determines that reduced display of the variation effect image is to be started (S7204: YES), for example, based on setting information related to the variation effect set in the control RAM 1245, the variation effect is an effect greater than reach. It is determined whether or not there is (S7205). If it is determined that the reach is equal to or greater than the reach (S7205: YES), that is, if the expectation of a big hit is relatively high, the audio DSP 1243 performs a process of reducing the sound related to the change effect image and continuing the sound output of the change effect. It is executed (S7206). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not equal to or greater than reach (S7205: NO), that is, when the expectation level that is a big hit is relatively low, or when the necessity for audio output is low, the audio DSP 1243 is provided with audio output related to the variable effect image. Stop (S7207).

When the overall CPU 1241 determines not to start the reduced display of the variation effect (S7204: NO), when the process of S7206 is executed, or when the process of S7207 is executed, for example, in the process of S7103, the start of the performance announcement effect is started. Based on whether or not the display list for main liquid crystal including the instruction is set in the display list storage area 1291, it is determined whether or not the display of the performance notification effect image P47 related to the performance notification effect is started (S7208). Here, when it is determined that the display of the performance announcement effect image P47 has been started (S7208: YES), the sound DSP 1243 is caused to start the audio output related to the performance announcement effect image P47 in synchronization with the display of the performance notification effect image P47 (S7209). ).
In the determination of S7208, a determination is made as to which audio is to be preferentially output based on the priority of each layer from the lowest first layer to the highest eighth layer specified in the priority management table. The

When it is determined that the display of the performance announcement effect image P47 is not started (S7208: NO) or when the process of S7209 is executed, the general CPU 1241 for main liquid crystal including an instruction to start the music performance effect in the process of S7103, for example. Whether or not the display of the music performance effect image P48 related to the music performance effect is started is determined based on whether or not the display list is set in the display list storage area 1291 (S7210). Here, when it is determined that the display of the music performance effect image P48 is started (S7210: YES), the audio DSP 1243 starts audio output related to the music performance effect image P48 in synchronization with the display of the music performance effect image P48 (S7211). .
In the determination of S7210, a determination is made as to which audio is to be preferentially output based on the priority of each layer from the lowest first layer to the highest eighth layer specified in the priority management table. The

  On the other hand, when it is determined not to start the display of the music performance effect image P48 (S7210: NO), or when the process of S7211 is executed, the process proceeds to the data transmission control process of S3850 (see FIG. 38).

  Here, the audio priority output processing based on the priority of each layer from the lowest first layer to the highest eighth layer defined in the priority management table will be described. As an audio output control process executed based on the priority management table, there are audio output control patterns shown below. This process corresponds to priority determination means.

First, when the time for outputting the sound related to the effect (or display) belonging to one layer and the sound related to the effect (or display) belonging to another (one or more) layers overlap, priority is given to these layers. A sound output control pattern 1 that performs output control only for sounds related to effects (or displays) belonging to the highest level (including sounds related to effects (or displays) belonging to the lower priority layers).
This audio output control pattern 1 is adopted when one layer is the seventh layer or the eighth layer, or when one layer is the fourth layer and the other layer is the third layer. And the audio output ratio with other layers is 10: 0. In addition, since the sound in the case of outputting the jackpot definite sound in the variation effect of the third layer belongs to the seventh layer, the priority of the sound output becomes high when outputting the jackpot definite sound.

Next, in the case where the time to output the sound related to the effect (or display) belonging to one layer and the sound related to the effect (or display) belonging to another (one or more) layers overlap, The sound related to the effect (or display) belonging to the layer with the highest priority is output so that it can be heard by the player (in some cases, the game hall staff), and the effect belonging to a layer other than the layer with the highest priority (or Output control pattern 2 for controlling the output of the voice related to (display) more difficult to hear than the highest priority layer.
In this audio output control pattern 2, when one layer is the sixth layer and the other layer is the fourth layer, or when one layer is the fifth layer and the other layer is the fourth layer The audio output ratio between one layer and another layer is 7: 3.

[Light emission control processing by CPU of lamp control unit 1170]
Although the light emission control process in the CPU of the lamp control unit 1170 is not shown, the light emission control process in the CPU of the lamp control unit 1170 is synchronized with the sound output from the speaker 138 by the audio output control process controlled by the overall CPU 1241. Therefore, it is necessary to control light emission.
For this reason, the light emission control process in the CPU of the lamp control unit 1170 replaces “audio output” in S7203, S7206, S7209, and S7211 with “light emission output” in the same detailed flowchart as the audio output control process in FIG. The light emission control processing of various light emitting elements can be performed by replacing “continue sound output by lowering the sound” with “canceling light emission output” and replacing “canceling sound output” with “canceling light emission output” in S7207. .

Here, priority output processing of light emission in various light emitting elements based on the priority of each layer from the lowest first layer to the highest eighth layer defined in the priority management table will be described. This process corresponds to priority determination means.
As the light emission output control process executed based on the priority management table, the light emission output of various light emitting elements related to the effect (or display) belonging to one layer and the effect (or display) belonging to another (one or more) layers. In the case where the light emission output timings of the various light emitting elements are overlapped, only the light emitting elements related to the rendering (or display) of the layer having the highest priority among these layers are subjected to the light emission output control.
However, when the light emitting element related to the effect (or display) of the layer with the lower priority does not overlap with the light emitting element related to the effect (or display) of the layer with the highest priority, the effect ( Alternatively, the light emission output control processing of the light emitting element according to (display) is also executed.

Among the operation control processes performed by the CPU of the lamp control unit 1170, the variation effect associated with the special symbol variation display is based on the game information (various commands) transmitted from the main control unit 1100 as described above. Since the content and start / end timing are set in the effect control unit 1150, the CPU of the lamp control unit 1170 uses the logo accessory 107 or the CPU based on the change effect start command instructing the start of the change effect of the effect pattern selected by the CPU 1151. An operation control process of a movable accessory composed of the sub liquid crystal display device 106 and the logo accessory 107 is executed.
In addition, in the performance announcement performance and the music performance performance executed in the special performance mode, when performing the operation control process for operating the logo accessory 107, the CPU performs the operation control process in synchronization with the light emission control process, The logo actor 107 can be operated during the performance announcement performance or the performance performance special performance performed in the special performance mode.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the main control unit 1100 uses the main liquid crystal display device 108 and the speaker 138 that cannot be used for other effects because they are normally used for normal effects. The performance performance of the music irrelevant to the timing at which the production control unit 1150 receives various commands (game information) and the information indicated by these commands is executed. Therefore, an effect with a high degree of freedom can be executed without being greatly restricted by the main control unit 1100 that controls the game.

  In addition, when a music performance effect is performed, it is possible to execute a normal effect that uses special effect data that was not used before the music performance effect was performed. The function of notifying the change of the effect state of the normal effect that the effect that was not performed will appear will be achieved. For this reason, not only is the degree of freedom high, but an effective performance can be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, even if the main liquid crystal display device 108 is used for the normal presentation accompanying the variation display of the special symbol, the main liquid crystal display device 108 is used to perform the music performance without being affected by the variation display of the special symbol. Since the performance is performed, there is an advantage that the interest of the musical performance performance is not impaired by the normal performance.
Further, in the present embodiment, the island power supply device 500 (see FIG. 5) with a plurality of gaming machines 1 installed on the same island in the pachinko hall in the state where the individual power switch provided in each gaming machine 1 is “ON”. 5), the plurality of gaming machines 1 can be started at the same time. For this reason, as described in the present embodiment, the time conditions based on the elapsed time from power-on (in this embodiment, whether or not one hour has elapsed) are set to be the same for a plurality of gaming machines 1. Thus, it is possible to start the performance of the music on the plurality of gaming machines 1 all at once.
Moreover, in this embodiment, since a music performance effect is performed in which a new song is performed as an unperformed content, a more interesting performance is performed compared to a case where a special effect is performed using known content. Is possible.

[Variation regarding start time of performance announcement]
FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the start time of the performance announcement effect and the variation time of the special symbol. In the above embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 73 (A), the start time of the performance announcement effect is set to 1 minute, and when the variation effect longer than 1 minute is performed, The case where the performance announcement effect is not performed in the case where the variation production until the start time and the music performance production start time has not developed has been described. Instead, the start time of the performance announcement effect may be set to a time longer than the longest time of the special symbol variation time.
With this configuration, if the start time of the performance announcement effect is reached when the variation effect is being performed, the change effect will always end before the start time of the music performance effect. The time for performing the performance can be ensured.

[Modification of State Control Process of S3810]
By the way, in the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which the first performance performance is performed when the performance performance flag is set to “ON” while the performance performance permission flag is set to “ON”. The configuration may cause the following problems. That is, since the RTC information is used to control the music performance presentation permission flag, there is a possibility that an error occurs between the aircraft regarding the timing at which the music performance presentation permission flag is set to “ON”. On the other hand, for example, when the island power supply device 500 is turned on at 8:00, as shown in FIG. 74 (A), in the 48th series, the music performance is performed before 4 hours have passed since the power is turned on. While the performance permission flag is set to “ON”, there is a possibility that the performance performance permission flag is set to “ON” after 4 hours have passed since the power is turned on in the 49th series. When such a situation occurs, the first performance performance of the new song B is started when 4 hours elapses after the power is turned on in the 48th series, whereas 4 hours after the power is turned on in the 49th series. When the music has passed, the music performance effect of the new song A is started, so that a song shift occurs between the aircrafts.
Therefore, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, instead of the music performance presentation permission flag, the same as the music performance presentation permission flag set to “ON” when the time indicated by the RTC information is exactly 12:00, for example. The first permission flag and the second permission flag that is set to “ON” when the time indicated by the RTC information becomes 12:15, for example, and both of these two flags are set to “ON”. As a condition, execution of the first performance performance may be permitted. When this configuration is applied to the example described above based on FIG. 74A, both the 48th and 49th units have the first permission flag and the second permission flag set to “ ON "is set (see FIG. 74B). For this reason, when 4 hours have passed since the power was turned on, for example, the performance of the new song A started on both units, and when 5 hours had passed since the power was turned on, the first performance of the new song B started on both units. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of bending deviation.

[Modified example of display list creation table]
FIG. 75 is a schematic diagram of the all-mode table. In the above embodiment, when the first song performance performance of the new song is performed, the special selection for switching the display list creation table to be used is also performed in the state where all songs are released in order to newly appear the performance based on the new song in the normal performance. The case of executing was described. On the other hand, as another embodiment, the display list is created using the all mode table in which the selection ratios of the production patterns of all new songs are set equal as shown in FIG. It may be. Thereby, it becomes possible to make the normal production based on each new song appear in a balanced manner.

Hereinafter, other embodiments will be described.
In Embodiment 1 which concerns on the invention mentioned above, a game effect image is mainly displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 108 of the image display part 114. FIG. On the other hand, in the gaming machine 1 to which other embodiments described below are applied, the special effect image is mainly displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 108.
In the description of other embodiments, the same components as those of the embodiment according to the invention are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

[Other embodiment 1]
FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram showing a screen configuration during a jackpot game in the special effect mode of the other embodiment 1.
In the embodiment of the invention, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 7, the case where the special effect image is reduced and displayed as necessary and the game effect image is displayed in the entire area is described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, if it contains information that is relatively important to the player, such as a notification that prompts the player to make a right hit at the jackpot opening, it is difficult to convey information to the player if dots are displayed in the lower area A2. It is considered that a game effect image such as a notification that prompts the player to make a right hit at the jackpot opening is reduced and displayed within a range where information is transmitted to the player.
In this case, it is possible for the player to convey information relatively important to the player to the player while sufficiently enjoying the image of the performance announcement effect or the music performance effect which is a special effect.
Therefore, in another embodiment 1, when a big hit occurs in the special effect mode, the game effect image is reduced while the special effect image P47 or the music performance effect image P48 is displayed in the upper area A1. A case where the special effect image is superimposed and displayed will be described.
In addition, in other Embodiment 1, description regarding the structure and process which are common in the game machine 1 which concerns on embodiment of invention is abbreviate | omitted, and demonstrates a different point from embodiment of invention.

FIG. 76A is a screen diagram showing a state in which the opening effect displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 108 is reduced and displayed in the special effect mode. As illustrated in FIG. 76 (A), when the decorative symbol indicating that the determination result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot is stopped and displayed, the type of jackpot is notified and prior to the opening of the big winning opening 120. An opening effect including notification that prompts the player to make a right strike is performed. The opening effect shown in FIG. 76A may be executed in place of the opening effect shown in FIG.
In this way, during the normal performance for notifying information of relatively high importance to the player, the music performance performance image P48 is continuously displayed in the entire area, and the game performance image is reduced and superimposed on the game performance image. To do. The same applies to the case where the performance announcement effect image P47 is displayed.

FIG. 76A illustrates a state in which the opening effect image, which is a game effect image, is reduced and displayed at the lower left of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 108. However, the screen for reducing the opening effect image is displayed. The upper position may be another position. However, if the opening effect image is displayed in the center of the screen or the display size of these images is too small, the opening effect is difficult to see and information is not easily transmitted to the player. For this reason, it is desirable that the display position and display size of these game effect images be appropriate in consideration of the display position and display size from which various messages can be grasped.
76A to 76C, the music performance effect image P48 displays the remaining time of the music performance effect until the music performance effect ends, and the remaining time of the music performance effect is confirmed. By doing so, the player can grasp the remaining time until the musical performance performance is finished.

FIG. 76 (B) is a screen view showing how the challenge chance game effect displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 108 is displayed in a reduced scale in the special effect mode. In the challenge chance game effect (R4) shown in FIG. Alternatively, it may be executed.
FIG. 76 (C) is a screen view showing how the time-determined effect displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 108 is reduced and displayed in the special effect mode, and instead of the time-determined effect (R7) shown in FIG. May be executed.
Note that description of FIGS. 76B and 76C is the same as that of FIG.
76A to 76C are examples, and the present invention can be applied to some or all of the opening, R4 to R8, and ending production scenes in FIG.
For these drawing processes, the above-described drawing process 4 is used.

[Other embodiment 2]
FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram showing screen configurations of the normal effect mode and the special effect mode of the second embodiment.
In the other embodiment 2, the description of the configuration and processing common to the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the invention will be omitted, and different points from the embodiment of the invention will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 77 (A), the main liquid crystal display device 108 in the normal effect mode has a variable effect composed of elemental images such as a background P11, a decorative symbol P12, a reserved ball display P13, a character P14, and an item P15. An image (game effect image) is displayed. Even in the normal performance mode to which the other embodiment 2 is applied, using these element images, a game effect is sequentially performed with a predetermined performance time based on the progress of the game based on the result of the lottery. .

As shown in FIG. 77 (B), the main liquid crystal display device 108 in the special effect mode displays a game effect image composed of element images such as a background P21, a decorative symbol P22, and a reserved ball display P23. Further, the special liquid crystal display device 108 in the special effect mode displays a special effect image which is the performance announcement image P47 or the music performance image P48.
In the special effect mode, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), the special effect image is displayed in the special effect area A1 and the game effect image in the game effect area A2, respectively, on the area division screen. And the game effect image are simultaneously displayed on the main liquid crystal display device.
As described above, also in the other embodiment 2, basically, after shifting from the normal effect mode to the special effect mode as in the embodiment according to the invention, the game effect image and the special image are displayed using the divided area display. The effect image is displayed at the same time.

  Here, by the set time of the special effect mode, the pattern variation which is the variation of the decorative design P12 displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 108 in the variation effect (normal effect) in the normal effect mode shown in FIG. 77 (A). It may not finish. In such a case, for example, if the screen display is switched to the divided area screen shown in FIG. 77B when the mode is shifted to the special effect mode, the result of the variable effect becomes difficult for the player to understand.

Therefore, in another embodiment 2, the reduced game effect image is superimposed and displayed on the special effect image under certain conditions such that the symbol variation does not end by the set time of the special effect mode.
For example, as shown in FIG. 77 (D), the performance notification image P47 is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 108 as a whole, and the decorative symbol P12 displayed continuously from the normal performance mode is reduced to reduce the performance notification image P47. Superimposed on the display. As shown in FIG. 77 (C), the music performance image P48 is displayed entirely on the main liquid crystal display device 108, and the decorative design P12 continuously displayed from the normal performance mode is reduced to reduce the music performance image P48. Superimposed on the display.
As described above, in the second embodiment, if the variation effect is not completed by the set time of the special effect mode, the decorative symbol P12 that displays the variation effect is the content displayed in the normal effect mode. The image is reduced as it is and superimposed on the special effect image.

In another embodiment 2, the holding ball display P13 maintains the display size of the holding ball display P13 displayed in the normal effect mode shown in FIG. 77 (A), and FIGS. 77 (C) and 77 (D). As shown, the display is performed as it is in the special effect mode. The reserved ball display P13 is not displayed largely on the main liquid crystal display device. Therefore, if the time is reduced in the same way as the decorative pattern P12 due to the setting time of the special effect mode, it is highly likely that the display content of the holding ball is difficult to understand for the player. Therefore, in another embodiment 2, the reservation ball display P13 is configured to continue display in the same size even in the special effect mode without changing the display contents from the normal effect mode.
The screen configuration of FIG. 77 (C) is a display applicable instead of the screen configuration as shown in FIGS. 51 (B-3) and (C-3), and the screen configuration of FIG. 77 (D). Is a display applicable instead of the screen configuration as shown in (B-2) of FIG.

Furthermore, in other Embodiment 2, when it becomes set time of special production mode, the display of the character P14 and the item P15 is prohibited. As for the character P14 and the item P15, if they are simply reduced and displayed in the same manner as the decorative pattern P12, the contents may be difficult to understand. In addition, the character P14 and the item P15 have lower priority as information for displaying the lottery result than the decorative symbol P12 and the reserved ball display P13. On the other hand, if the character P14 and the item P15 are displayed with the display size in the normal effect mode, the area where the special effect image in the special effect mode is hidden increases.
Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 to which the other embodiment 2 is applied, the display of the character P14 and the item P15 on the main liquid crystal display device 108 is prohibited in the special effect mode.

  In the above embodiment, the case has been described in which it is determined whether or not to start the music performance effect based on the elapsed time since the power is turned on, but whether or not to start the music performance effect is determined by another method. You may make it do. For example, the set time is stored in the control ROM 1244, it is determined whether or not the current time measured by the RTC 1154 is the set time, and when it is determined that the set time is reached, the music performance effect is started. Also good. According to this configuration, by setting the same set time for a plurality of gaming machines 1, if there is no deviation in the current time measured by each RTC 1154 of each gaming machine 1, the plurality of gaming machines 1 Regardless of whether or not they are installed on the same island, it is possible to simultaneously start a musical performance performance on a plurality of gaming machines 1.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the main liquid crystal display device 108 is used to execute the normal performance, the performance announcement effect, and the music performance effect is described. However, at least one of these effects is performed using the sub liquid crystal display device 106. Or may be executed using the main liquid crystal display device 108 and the sub liquid crystal display device.
Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the special performance is a music performance performance that performs a new song as an unperformed content has been described, but the special performance is an effect that announces an unperformed content (for example, a character) other than the new song. It may be an effect using known content.
Further, in a pachinko gaming machine equipped with a so-called probability variation function, the “challenge chance” that is the promotion effect described above may be executed as a promotion effect indicating whether or not the probability variation occurs.

In addition, after the special effect mode is finished, the mode is changed to the normal effect mode. However, the jackpot finalizing effect is performed for a predetermined period after the transition to the normal effect mode (for example, until 20 times of changing effects are executed or 3 minutes). Has a higher probability than usual (for example, 10 times easier to select than usual). Therefore, since the jackpot finalizing effect is easily selected during this predetermined period, if the variable effect executed during this predetermined period is a variable effect that results in a jackpot, the player often sees it as normal. A jackpot finalizing effect that cannot be seen can be seen in this predetermined period. Further, in the predetermined period after the transition to the normal effect mode, a variable effect peculiar to the predetermined period different from the variable effect executed in the normal effect mode other than the predetermined period may be executed. By doing in this way, gameability can be improved.

[Schematic configuration of game system]
Subsequently, a gaming system 7800 including the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 78 is a schematic configuration diagram of a gaming system 7800. The gaming system 7800 includes a gaming machine 1, an information management device 7850, an information terminal 7810, and a game hall management computer 7830. The information terminal 7810 can bidirectionally communicate with the information management apparatus 7850 via the Internet 7815 by a player's operation. The gaming system 7800 of this embodiment has a login game mode and a non-login game mode.
The gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment advances the game, so that each time a predetermined condition is satisfied, a gaming point is given and the gaming point can be stored. Details of this will be described later.

The non-login game mode is a mode in which the player does not access the information management device 7850 using the information terminal 7810, in other words, does not log in to the gaming machine 1 and executes the game on the gaming machine 1. On the other hand, the login game mode is a mode in which a game based on a past game history can be executed, and a gaming machine login process and a history storage process can be executed.
The gaming machine login process is a process in which a player uses the information terminal 7810 to access the information management device 7850, obtain a password, and log in to the gaming machine 1.

  The history storage process is a process performed after the gaming machine login process. When the player finishes the game, the information management apparatus 7850 stores game history information including game points stored during the game. It is processing. In this history saving process, a lottery for returning game points stored by other players (hereinafter also referred to as a jackpot lottery) is executed, and when a jackpot lottery is won (hereinafter referred to as a jackpot winner). The game history of the player who played the game when the player won the jackpot lottery with the game points accumulated by the player and the game points accumulated by other players. Information can be stored in the information management device 7850.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot lottery is a time that does not overlap with the performance announcement effect and the music performance effect described above, and is executed once a day (for example, PM8: 30). It has become so. Hereinafter, the time during which the jackpot lottery is performed is also referred to as jackpot time. In addition, game points that are redeemed when winning in the jackpot lottery, that is, game points stored by other players are also referred to as jackpot game points below.

  Here, as described above, the jackpot time becomes the jackpot lottery, and the game points obtained by adding the game points stored by the player and the jackpot game points to the jackpot lottery are used. A system that is stored in the information management device 7850 as game history information of a player who has played at the time of winning is also referred to as a jackpot system.

The information terminal 7810 of the gaming system 7800 includes a camera (not shown), and has a function of capturing code information 7820 and reading the code information 7820 using the camera. In this embodiment, QR code (registered trademark) is used as code information. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the code information 7820, a two-dimensional matrix type code different from the QR code (registered trademark) may be used, or a bar code or a character string such as alphanumeric characters may be directly used. May be. As the information terminal 7810, various devices such as a mobile phone, a smartphone, a tablet terminal, and a laptop computer can be used.

  In the gaming system 7800, the information terminal 7810 and the information management device 7850 can be connected via the Internet 7815. For example, the player can read the code information 7820 displayed on the gaming machine 1 with the information terminal 7810 and can access the information management apparatus 7850 based on the read code information.

  The information management apparatus 7850 in the present gaming system 7800 includes a Web server 7851, an application server 7852, and a database server 7853. The information management device 7850 realizes an information transmission / reception control unit 7910, an information management control unit 7920, an information storage unit 7930, and a password generation unit 7940 by these servers. Details of these functional blocks will be described with reference to FIG. 79 described later.

  In this gaming system 7800, the gaming machine 1 is connected to a gaming hall management computer 7830 installed in the gaming hall. Specifically, in the gaming machine 1, the above-described game information output terminal board 1125 that outputs various signals indicating predetermined game information to the outside is connected to the game hall management computer 7830. Various signals output from the game information output terminal board 1125 include, for example, big hits, small hits, reach, start (special symbols, number of variations of normal symbols), winning (number of wins to the general winning opening 128, Signals relating to the number of passes), probability fluctuation, time reduction, fire ball (out ball), prize ball (safe ball), and the like. In other words, various signals representing the operation data of the gaming machine 1 are input to the gaming hall management computer 7830 from the gaming information output terminal board 1125 of each gaming machine 1. Then, the game hall management computer 7830 generates and notifies useful information useful for management of the game hall by collecting, calculating, and analyzing game information output from each gaming machine 1.

  In FIG. 78, each gaming machine 1 (game information output terminal board 1125) and game hall management computer 7830 are directly connected, but each gaming machine 1 (game information output terminal board 1125) and game hall management computer 7830 A relay device (for example, a call display device provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the gaming machine 1 on the upper part of an unillustrated island stand where the gaming machine 1 is installed) is provided, and the gaming information output terminal board 1125 outputs The game information to be played may be output to the game hall management computer 7830 via this relay device. In this way, information useful to the player can be displayed on the relay device, which leads to an improvement in service at the game hall.

[Functional configuration of information management device]
The functional configuration of the information management apparatus 7850 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a block diagram of the information management apparatus 7850. The information management device 7850 includes an information transmission / reception control unit 7910, an information management control unit 7920, an information storage unit 7930, and a password generation unit 7940.

  The information transmission / reception control unit 7910 is a communication interface. In particular, it receives an access request from the information terminal 7810 and outputs information related to the access request to the information management control unit 7920. Further, the information transmission / reception control unit 7910 receives information output from a plurality of components of the information management apparatus 7850 as a response to the access request from the information terminal 7810 and transfers the information to the information terminal 7810.

  The information management control unit 7920 is an arithmetic processing device that controls basic operations of the information management device 7850. The information management control unit 7920 determines the request content of the information related to the access request output from the information transmission / reception control unit 7910, and controls response processing according to the request content of the information terminal 7810.

  The information storage unit 7930 is a storage device for various information managed by the information management device 7850. The information storage unit 7930 stores player information, game history information, and model information on which the player has played in association with each other. Specifically, the information storage unit 7930 stores various types of information such as player information, game history information, and model information played by the player in a database for each player. In addition, the information storage unit 7930 includes display screen information (such as use screen information described later) of the Web dedicated site managed by the information management apparatus 7850 and URL information (hereinafter also simply referred to as URL information) of the Web dedicated site. Various information is stored.

  The “game history information” in the present embodiment is game date / time information representing the past game date / time, jackpot number information representing the past cumulative jackpot number, rotation number information representing the past accumulated special symbol variation number, It includes effect appearance information that indicates the type of effect that has appeared in the past game, and cumulative game point information that indicates the cumulative value of the game points acquired in the past game. Here, in the game history information, the other game history information excluding the accumulated game point information is hereinafter simply referred to as “other game history information”.

  The “player information” in the present embodiment is identification information for identifying a player, and includes an ID and password set by the player, and a terminal ID built in the information terminal 7810. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the player information may be information created based on the telephone number of the information terminal 7810 owned by the player, a mac address recorded on the network board of the information terminal 7810, or the like. Good.

  When the player requests the issuance of a password from the information terminal 7810 to start a game with a log-in request, the password generation unit 7940 responds to the request based on the information output from the information management control unit 7920. Process to generate. Password generation unit 7940 outputs the generated password to information transmission / reception control unit 7910. As a result, the password is transferred to the information terminal 7810.

  In the information management device 7850, the information management control unit 7920 and the information storage unit 7930 have a management function for managing player information, game history information, and model information. The information management control unit 7920, the information storage unit 7930, and the password generation unit 79400 have a management function for managing passwords. In this embodiment, as described above, the information management device 7850 is configured by the Web server 7851, the application server 7852, and the database server 7853, but is not limited thereto, and may be a single server. A server having other functions may be included.

[Game machine login process in login game mode]
FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the flow of the gaming machine login process in the login game mode of the gaming system 7800 of the present embodiment. If the game machine login process is not completed and the player operates the handle 130 to fire a game ball and wins the start opening 116, 118 during the login process, the game machine login is immediately performed. The process is canceled and a transition is made to the non-login game mode.

  First, in the process of S8003 of the gaming machine login process, the information terminal 7810 accesses a Web dedicated site managed by the information management apparatus 7850 based on the player's operation.

In the process of S8005, with the access from the information terminal 7810, the information management apparatus 7850 displays usage screen information representing a dedicated website screen (hereinafter also referred to as a usage screen) for display on the information terminal 7810. To 7810. The usage screen represented by the usage screen information can be input by a player's operation as necessary. Player information, game history information, model information, and the like possessed by the information management device 7850, etc. It is a screen for a player to use the management function.
Then, the player inputs player information (ID and password) registered in advance on the usage screen represented by the usage screen information transmitted to the information terminal 7810.

In the processing of S8010, the information terminal 7810 transmits the player information to the information management device 7850, thereby making an access request to the management function of the information management device 7850. Here, the player information transmitted from the information terminal 7810 to the information management device 7850 includes the ID and password input by the player's operation and the terminal ID of the information terminal 7810.
Note that an access request to the management function of the information management device 7850 of the information terminal 7810 may be made by transmitting only the terminal ID of the information terminal 7810, the MAC address recorded on the network board of the information terminal 7810, or the like.

  In the process of S8015, the information management apparatus 7850 performs an authentication process using the player information included in the access request from the information terminal 7810. Specifically, upon receiving player information from the information terminal 7810, the information management control unit 7920 of the information management device 7850 compares the received player information with the player information stored in the information storage unit 7930. When player information that matches the received player information is stored in the information storage unit 7930, authentication is permitted. When the authentication is permitted, in step S8018, the information transmission / reception control unit 7910 causes the information terminal 7810 to display usage screen information representing a usage screen including a model information acquisition promotion image that prompts acquisition of the model information of the gaming machine 1. Send.

  On the other hand, if the player information that matches the received player information is not stored in the information storage unit 7930, the information management control unit 7920 of the information management device 7850 denies authentication and sends the information to the information terminal 7810. Then, usage screen information representing a usage screen including a registration promotion image that prompts registration of player information is transmitted. The information terminal 7810 displays a registration promotion image based on the usage screen information and prompts the player to input player information. When the player information is input to the information terminal 7810 by the player, the information terminal 7810 transmits the player information to the information management device 7850. When the information management device 7850 receives player information from the information terminal 7810, the information management control unit 7920 registers the player information in the information storage unit 7930. When registration is performed, in step S8018, the information transmission / reception control unit 7910 notifies the information terminal 7810 of registration completion and transmits usage screen information representing a usage screen including a model information acquisition promotion image.

  The model information acquisition promotion image of the present embodiment suggests that the first code information is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 108 of the gaming machine 1 for the player. The first code information is information including model information, URL information, and a password issuance request.

  In the process of S8020, the information terminal 7810 receives the usage screen information representing the usage screen including the model information acquisition promotion image, and displays the usage screen including the model information acquisition promotion image. The player operates the effect button 142 and the effect key 144 of the gaming machine 1 by viewing the model information acquisition promotion image, and gives an instruction to display the first code information on the main liquid crystal display device 108.

In the process of S8023, the effect control unit 1150 of the gaming machine 1 determines whether or not the player has operated the effect button 142 and the effect key 144 to instruct the main liquid crystal display device 108 to display the first code information. Deciding. Specifically, the effect control unit 1150 operates the effect button 142 and the effect key 144 by the player, and when there is a predetermined input signal from the effect button 142 and the effect key 144, the first code information is displayed on the main liquid crystal. It is determined that an instruction to display on display device 108 has been issued. When there is no predetermined input signal from the effect button 142 and the effect key 144, the effect control unit 1150 determines that there is no instruction to display the first code information on the main liquid crystal display device 108.

When the instruction to display the first code information on the main liquid crystal display device 108 is not given (S8023: NO), the effect control unit 1150 of the gaming machine 1 stands by until the instruction is given.
When the player gives an instruction to display the first code information on the main liquid crystal display device 108 (S8023: YES), the effect control unit 1150 of the gaming machine 1 performs the main liquid crystal display device 108 in the process of S8025. 1st code information is displayed. The first code information is stored in advance in the ROM 1152. The player can capture model information, URL information, and a password issuance request included in the first code information in the information terminal 7810 by imaging the first code information with the built-in camera of the information terminal 7810. .

  In the process of S8030, the information terminal 7810 requests execution of a password issuing process. Specifically, when the first code information is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 108 by the player and the first code information is captured using the built-in camera of the information terminal 7810, the information terminal 7810 displays the first code information. The information management device 7850 is accessed based on the information, and player information (terminal ID of the information terminal 7810, etc.), model information, and a password issuance request are transmitted.

  In the process of S8035, the information management apparatus 7850 performs a password issuing process. Specifically, the password generation unit 7940 of the information management device 7850 includes player information (of the information terminal 7810) corresponding to the information terminal 7810 that made the password issue request among the player information stored in the information storage unit 7930. Terminal ID etc.) and game history information (including accumulated game point information) associated with the player information are used to perform a predetermined calculation process to generate a password. The information transmission / reception control unit 7910 of the information management device 7850 transmits the generated password to the information terminal 7810.

  In the present embodiment, this password is composed of 12 hiragana characters. Note that the password is not limited thereto, and the password may be composed of, for example, Roman characters, Chinese characters, katakana, numbers, and combinations thereof. Also, the number of characters in the password is not limited to 12 characters, and may be, for example, 13 or more characters.

  In the process of S8040, the information terminal 7810 receives the password transmitted from the information management apparatus 7850 and displays it on the usage screen. The player can recognize the password by looking at the usage screen. Then, the player operates the effect button 142 and the effect key 144 of the gaming machine 1 to display the password input screen on the main liquid crystal display device 108, and further operates the effect button 142 and the effect key 144 to operate the information terminal. Enter the password displayed on the 7810 usage screen.

  In the process of S8045, the effect control unit 1150 of the gaming machine 1 determines whether or not the password displayed on the use screen of the information terminal 7810 has been input by operating the effect button 142 and the effect key 144 by the player. to decide. When the password displayed on the usage screen of the information terminal 7810 is not input (S8045: NO), the effect control unit 1150 of the gaming machine 1 stands by until the input is made.

When the password displayed on the usage screen of the information terminal 7810 is input (S8045: YES), the effect control unit 1150 of the gaming machine 1 determines whether the password is suitable in the process of S8050. When the password does not match (S8050: NO), the effect control unit 1150 of the gaming machine 1 displays that the password is non-compliant on the main liquid crystal display device 108 in the process of S8055, and returns to the process of S8045. .

  FIG. 81 is a view for explaining the game history information 8101 and jackpot game point information 8103 stored in the FRAM 1155 of the effect control unit 1150. When the password matches (S8050: YES), the effect control unit 1150 of the gaming machine 1 executes the information replacement process in the process of S8055. This information replacement process will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 81, game history information 8101 is stored in the FRAM 1155. The game history information 8101 stores player information, past game point information, today's game point information, accumulated game point information, other today's game history information, and model information in association with each other. The jackpot game point information 8103 shown in FIG. 81 will be described later.

  In the information replacement process in S8055, first, the effect control unit 1150 obtains player information (information terminal 7810) based on the player information in the game history information 8101 stored in the FRAM 1155 based on the password adapted in S8050. Terminal ID etc.). Next, the effect control unit 1150 rewrites the value represented by the past game point information in the game history information 8101 with the accumulated game point information obtained based on the password adapted in S8050. Further, the effect control unit 1150 initializes the game point information today (that is, rewrites the value represented by the game point information today to “0”). In addition, the production control unit 1150 obtains the current time information from the RTC 1154, and among the other game history information (game date information, jackpot information, rotation number information, production appearance information), the game date information is obtained as current time information. And the big hit number information, the rotation number information, and the effect appearance information among the other game history information of today are initialized.

  The effect control unit 1150 calculates the total value of the past game point information value of the game history information 8101 of the FRAM 1155 and the value of the game point information today, and stores the total value as the value of the accumulated game point information. . When any of the past game point information and today's game point information is rewritten, the production control unit 1150 recalculates the accumulated game point information each time, and the calculated value is newly accumulated. The game history information 8101 is stored as game point information. Therefore, in the information replacement process of S8055, the effect control unit 1150 stores the value of the accumulated game point information in the game history information 8101 as the same value as the value of the past game point information.

By this information replacement process, the accumulated game point information of the player who logs in to the gaming machine 1 can be set in the gaming machine 1 as past gaming point information.
As described above, the login to the gaming machine 1 is completed, and the gaming machine login process is ended.

[History saving process in login game mode]
FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the flow of history storage processing in the login game mode of the gaming system 7800 of this embodiment. When the login process ends, the effect control unit 1150 executes the following history storage process.
First, in the process of S8210, the effect control unit 1150 of the gaming machine 1 executes a game history information replacement process.

FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the flow of the game history information replacement process. First, in the game history information replacement process, the effect control unit 1150 determines whether or not a game is in progress in the process of S8301. Specifically, the production control unit 1150 is changing the special symbol (FIG. 2: first special symbol display 2
01, any of the second special symbol display 202 is changing), during the opening effect, during the ending effect, or during the jackpot game, it is determined that the game is in progress, If it is not any of these, it is determined that the game is not in progress.

  When the effect control unit 1150 determines that the game is not being played (S8301: NO), the process shifts to S8330. On the other hand, when the effect control unit 1150 determines that the game is in progress (S8301: YES), the process proceeds to S8305.

In the process of S8305, the effect control unit 1150 determines whether or not it is the timing when the special symbol variation ends. The effect control unit 1150 proceeds to the process of S8330 when it is not the timing when the special symbol change ends (S8305: NO).
On the other hand, the production | generation control part 1150 transfers to the process of S8310 in the case of the timing which the fluctuation | variation of the special symbol was complete | finished (S8305: YES).

  In the process of S8310, the effect control unit 1150 performs other game history information update processing today. Specifically, the effect control unit 1150 first adds one value representing the rotation speed information among other game history information of the game history information 8101 stored in the FRAM 1155. Next, the effect control unit 1150 adds one value representing the jackpot count information when the jackpot is won in the change. Subsequently, the effect control unit 1150 adds one value of the corresponding effect appearance information when a predetermined effect appears in the change. In this way, the effect control unit 1150 performs update processing of other game history information today in the game history information 8101.

  Here, the control of giving game points and the game point giving effect will be described. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a game point giving effect executed in the main liquid crystal display device 108. FIG. 84 (A) shows a display effect when a gigantic item appears. FIG. 84 (B) shows a display effect when a premium effect that rarely appears. Note that the gaming machine 1 is set such that when a display effect in which a super hot item appears is selected, there is a higher possibility that a big hit notification will be made due to the change compared to a case where the display effect is not selected. ing. Also, the premium effect is set to be selected only when the big hit notification is given by the change.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the effect control unit 1150 determines the granting of game points when a predetermined condition (hereinafter also referred to as a game point generation condition) is established. For example, the effect control unit 1150 determines to give 200 points (200P) of game points when performing the appearance effect of a predetermined intense game item in the change. In this case, the effect control unit 1150, as shown in FIG. 84 (A), in parallel with the appearance effect of the gekiatsu item 8477, the suggestion image (game point suggestion image) indicating the game point grant reason and the game points to be given 8403 and a suggestion image (also referred to as a cumulative game point suggestion image) 8401 representing the player's cumulative game points. At this time, the game points given by the appearance of the gekiatsu item 8477 are not added to the accumulated game points and displayed.

  When displaying the cumulative game point suggestion image 8401, the effect control unit 1150 displays the value of the cumulative game point information of the game history information 8101 stored in the FRAM 1155 as the cumulative game point included in the cumulative game point suggestion image 8401. . That is, since the value of the accumulated game point information in the game history information 8101 is 11350 at the time when the accumulated game point suggestion image 8401 in FIG. 84 (A) is displayed, the accumulated game point suggestion image 8401 in FIG. 84 (A). Is displayed as “cumulative P: 11350P”.

  Further, the effect control unit 1150 determines to give 1000 points (1000P) of game points when performing a predetermined premium effect in the variation. In this case, the effect control unit 1150 displays the game point suggestion image 8410 and the accumulated game point suggestion image 8401 in parallel with the appearance of the premium effect 8499, as shown in FIG. 84 (B). At this time, the game points given by the appearance of the premium effect 8499 are not added to the accumulated game points represented by the accumulated game point suggestion image 8401 and displayed.

  In addition to the appearance of super hot items and the appearance of premium production, the game point generation conditions are “when developed to super reach”, “when super hot characters appear”, “cup-shaped movable accessory 196 and sub liquid crystal display device” 106 is movable ”,“ when the cumulative number of jackpots since the introduction of the gaming machine 1 reaches a predetermined value ”, or“ player based on the game history information of the game history information 8101 stored in the FRAM 1155 ” May be established when the cumulative number of big hits, the number of rotations, or the number of production appearances exceeds a predetermined value.

  Further, in this embodiment, 200 points of game points are given when performing the appearance effect of the gekiatsu item, and 1000 points of game points are given when performing the premium effect appearance effect. It is not limited, and the percentage of game points given can be set as appropriate.

  In the process of S8315 in FIG. 83, the effect control unit 1150 determines whether or not a game point generation condition is satisfied in the variation. The effect control unit 1150 proceeds to the process of S8330 when the game point generation condition is not satisfied in the change (S8315: NO).

  The effect control unit 1150 updates the game point information today in the game history information 8101 stored in the FRAM 1155 when the game point generation condition is satisfied in the change (S8315: YES). Specifically, the effect control unit 1150 adds a value obtained by adding the value of the game point determined to be given in the change (that is, the game point displayed on the game point suggestion image) to the value represented by the game point information today. Rewrite as new game point information today. For example, if the value represented by today's gaming point information is 11350 and the number of gaming points determined to be given in the change is 200, the value of the new today's gaming point information is 11550.

  Here, the jackpot game point information 8103 (see FIG. 81) stored in the FRAM 1155 will be described. The jackpot game point information 8103 is information representing the game points accumulated from the previous jackpot winning. That is, the value represented by the jackpot game point information 8103 is not initialized except for the jackpot winning, and is accumulated until the jackpot winning is made.

  In the process of S8325, the effect control unit 1150 updates the game point information 8103 for jackpot of the game history information 8101 stored in the FRAM 1155. Specifically, the effect control unit 1150 adds the value of the gaming point (that is, the gaming point displayed in the gaming point suggestion image) determined in the variation to the value represented by the jackpot gaming point information 8103. Is rewritten as new jackpot game point information 8103.

In the process of S8330, the effect control unit 1150 determines whether the jackpot time has come based on the current time information of the RTC 1154. As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot time is set to PM8: 30 which does not overlap with the performance announcement effect and the music performance effect described above. When it is not the jackpot time (S8330: NO), the effect control unit 1150 proceeds to the process of S8355.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot time is reached (S8330: YES), the effect control unit 1150 proceeds to the process of S8335. In the process of S8335, the effect control unit 1150 executes a jackpot lottery. Specifically, the production control unit 1150 obtains one random number value from a predetermined random number table, and determines that the random number is a predetermined value (also referred to as a jackpot winning value) and acquires it. If the random number is not a jackpot winning value, it is determined to be a loss. In this embodiment, the winning probability of this jackpot lottery is set to 50%. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot winning probability may be higher than 50% (for example, 70%) or may be lower than 50% (for example, 30%).

  In the process of S8340, the effect control unit 1150 determines whether or not the jackpot is won. In the case of jackpot winning (S8340: YES), the effect control unit 1150 proceeds to the process of S8345.

  In the process of S8345, the effect control unit 1150 adds a new value obtained by adding the value of the game point information 8103 for jackpot to the value of the game point information today in the game history information 8101 stored in the FRAM 1155. Store as game point information today. Along with this, the production control unit 1150 also updates the accumulated game point information.

  In the process of S8350, the effect control unit 1150 initializes the game point information for jack points. That is, the effect control unit 1150 rewrites the value of the game point information for jack points to “0”.

  In the process of S8355, the effect control unit 1150 starts the effect for jackpot when the jackpot lottery is won. The effect control unit 1150 performs this jackpot effect (winning pattern) for a predetermined time (5 minutes in this embodiment). This jackpot effect (winning pattern) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining a jackpot effect (winning pattern). Specifically, FIG. 85A shows a jackpot time entry effect. FIG. 85 (B) is a diagram showing a jackpot game effect that tells whether the jackpot lottery is successful or not. FIG. 85C is a diagram showing a jackpot winning notification effect. In the present embodiment, the jackpot effect (winning pattern) is executed by the sub liquid crystal display device 106.

  The effect control unit 1150 first performs a jackpot time entry effect suggesting that a jackpot time has been entered as a jackpot effect (winning pattern). For example, as shown in FIG. 85A, the effect control unit 1150 displays a rush suggestion image 8505 representing the rush of jackpot time and a winning expectation image indicating the winning expectation of the jackpot on the sub liquid crystal display device 106. 8510, a cumulative gaming point suggestion image 8401, and a jackpot gaming point suggestion image 8515 suggesting a jackpot gaming point are displayed.

  Prior to displaying the winning expectation degree image 8510, the effect control unit 1150 determines the number of stars in the winning expectation degree image 8510 based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in S8335, and displays the winning expectation degree image 8510. In this case, the higher the number of stars in the winning expectation image 8510, the higher the expected expectation, and the smaller the number of stars, the lower the expected expectation.

Further, the effect control unit 1150 displays the value of the jackpot game point information 8103 stored in the FRAM 1155 before the display of the jackpot game point suggestion image 8515, and the jackpot game point included in the jackpot game point suggestion image 8515. Display as. That is, when the jackpot gaming point suggestion image 8515 in FIG. 85 (A) is displayed, the value of the jackpot gaming point information 8103 is 3500, so the jackpot gaming point suggestion image 8515 in FIG. 85 (A). Is displayed as “Jackpot game points: 3500P”.

  Next, the effect control unit 1150 performs a jackpot game effect that determines whether the jackpot lottery is successful or not as a jackpot effect (winning pattern). For example, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), the effect control unit 1150 has a game suggestion image 8525 that suggests that a jackpot game is being played on the sub liquid crystal display device 106, and a game effect that represents the jackpot game effect. An image 8530, a cumulative gaming point suggestion image 8401, and a jackpot gaming point suggestion image 8515 are displayed.

  In FIG. 85 (B), the effect control unit 1150 displays a game effect image 8530 for progressing the roulette game. In this case, in the roulette of the game effect image 8530, if the roulette ball 8530a enters the zone described as “Jack pot” or “win”, the jackpot lottery is won. The effect control unit 1150 can execute the jackpot game effect in various game effects such as a ring-throw game, a shooting game, or a bingo game in addition to the roulette game.

  Subsequently, the effect control unit 1150 performs a jackpot winning notification effect as a jackpot effect (winning pattern). For example, as shown in FIG. 85 (C), the effect control unit 1150 causes the sub liquid crystal display device 106 to win a jackpot lottery, a winning suggestion image 8535, a cumulative gaming point suggestion image 8401, and this time An acquisition suggestion image 8540 that suggests the acquired jackpot points is displayed. In this case, the accumulated game point in the accumulated game point suggestion image 8401 is the latest accumulated game point information value (a value obtained by adding jackpot game points) in the game history information 8101 of the FRAM 1155. That is, since the accumulated game points at the time of entering the jackpot time were 13500P, the accumulated game points of the accumulated game point suggestion image 8401 in FIG. 85 (C) is 17000P obtained by adding 3500P acquired by winning the jackpot. Yes.

  On the other hand, when it is not jackpot winning (S8340: NO), the effect control unit 1150 proceeds to the process of S8360. In the process of S8360, the effect control unit 1150 starts the effect for jackpot when the jackpot lottery is not won. The effect control unit 1150 performs this jackpot effect (non-winning pattern) for a predetermined time (in this example, 5 minutes). This jackpot effect (non-winning pattern) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 86 shows a jackpot non-winning notification effect. In the present embodiment, a jackpot effect (non-winning pattern) is also executed by the sub liquid crystal display device 106.
The effect control unit 1150 first performs a jackpot time entry effect as a jackpot effect (non-winning pattern) suggesting that a jackpot time has been entered. In this case, the effect control unit 1150 performs the jackpot time entry effect as shown in the jackpot effect (winning pattern) shown in FIG.

Next, the effect control unit 1150 performs a jackpot game effect that determines whether the jackpot lottery is successful or not as a jackpot effect (non-winning pattern). In this case, the effect control unit 1150 performs the jackpot game effect as in the jackpot effect (winning pattern) shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, the effect control unit 1150 performs a jackpot non-winning notification effect as a jackpot effect (non-winning pattern). For example, as shown in FIG. 86, the effect control unit 1150 displays, on the sub liquid crystal display device 106, a non-winning suggestion image 8601 that indicates that the jackpot lottery has not been won, and a cumulative gaming point suggestion image 8401. Display. In this case, the accumulated game points of the accumulated game point suggestion image 8401 remain the accumulated game points at the time of entering the jackpot time.

  In the process of S8365, the effect control unit 1150 determines whether the end time of the effect for jackpot has been reached based on the current time information of the RTC 1154. In the present embodiment, the jackpot time is set to PM 8:30, the start timing of the jackpot effect is similarly the time, and the effect time of the jackpot effect is 5 minutes. . Therefore, the control unit 1150 determines that the end time of the jackpot effect is reached when the current time of the RTC 1154 is PM8: 35. When the end time of the jackpot effect is not reached (S8365: NO), the effect control unit 1150 returns to the history storage process of FIG.

  On the other hand, when the end time of the jackpot effect is reached (S8365: YES), the effect control unit 1150 displays the above-described jackpot effect end screen (the jackpot winning notification effect screen shown in FIG. 85C). Or the jackpot non-winning notification effect screen in FIG. 86) is displayed, and the jackpot effect is ended. Thereafter, the process returns to the history storing process of FIG.

In the process of S8215 of FIG. 82, the effect control unit 1150 determines whether or not the player has instructed display of the second code information. When the player wants to end the game and save the game history, the player releases the game ball by releasing the handle 130, and when the main liquid crystal display device 108 is in the standby state, the gaming machine 1 The production button 142 and the production key 144 are operated to instruct the main liquid crystal display device 108 to display the second code information. In this case, when the player operates the effect button 142 and the effect key 144 of the gaming machine 1 and there is a predetermined input signal from the input device 145, the effect control unit 1150 is instructed to display the second code information. Judge that it was made. On the other hand, when there is no predetermined input signal from input device 145, effect control unit 1150 determines that the instruction to display the second code information has not been issued.
When the player has not instructed the display of the second code information (S8215: NO), the effect control unit 1150 returns to the process of S8210.

  When the player gives an instruction to display the second code information (S8215: YES), the effect control unit 1150 is a game of the game history information 8101 stored in the FRAM 1155 in the process of S8220. Second code information is generated based on the player information (terminal ID of the information terminal 7810), accumulated gaming point information, other game history information, model information, and URL information stored in the ROM 1152. The image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 108. When the second code information is generated, the effect control unit 1150 initializes all the game history information 8101 stored in the FRAM 1155.

  By the way, in the non-login game mode, the effect control unit 1150 does not update the game history information 8101 stored in the FRAM 1155 when the game point generation condition is satisfied, but as in the process of FIG. 83: S8325 described above. The game pot information 8103 for jackpot is updated. As a result, the value of the jackpot game point information 8103 increases even if the player is playing in the non-login mode.

  On the other hand, when the game point generation condition is satisfied in the login game mode, the effect control unit 1150 updates the value of the game point information 8103 for jackpot stored in the FRAM 1155 by the process of FIG. 83: S8325, and S8220. Even when the second code information is generated in the process of (2), the game point information 8103 for jackpot is not initialized, and the state as it is is kept.

  Accordingly, the value of the jackpot game point information 8103 is added by both the game in the login game mode and the game in the non-login game mode, unless it is initialized by winning the jackpot lottery. Game points will continue to increase.

  When the second code information is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 108, the player captures the second code information using the built-in camera of the information terminal 7810. Therefore, in the process of S8225, the information terminal 7810 acquires the second code information by imaging, accesses the information management device 7850 based on the URL information included in the second code information, and is included in the second code information. The game history information, that is, the player information, the accumulated game point information, the other game history information, and the model information are transmitted to the information management device 7850.

  In the process of S8230, the information management control unit 7920 of the information management apparatus 7850 performs the authentication process using the player information (such as the terminal ID of the information terminal 7810) transmitted from the information terminal 7810. Specifically, the information management control unit 7920 determines whether or not the player information transmitted from the information terminal 7810 and the player information matching the information storage unit 7930 are present, and the matching player information is In some cases, authentication is permitted. If there is no matching player information, authentication is not permitted.

  When authentication is not permitted, the information management control unit 7920 transmits usage screen information representing a usage screen including a player information mismatch suggestion image that suggests that the player information does not match to the information terminal 7810, which will be described later. The process waits without executing the processes of S8235 and S8240.

  If the authentication is permitted, the information management control unit 7920 proceeds to the process of S8235 and executes a game history information update process. Specifically, the information management control unit 7920 has a game corresponding to player information (such as a terminal ID of the information terminal 7810) transmitted from the information terminal 7810 among the game history information stored in the information storage unit 7930. In the history information, the stored value of accumulated game point information is rewritten to the value of accumulated game point information transmitted from the information terminal 7810 and stored as new accumulated game point information. Further, the information management control unit 7920 calculates the total value of the value of the other game history information stored in the information storage unit 7930 and the value of the other today's game history information transmitted from the information terminal 7810. Then, the information management control unit 7920 rewrites the value of the other game history information stored in the information storage unit 7930 to the calculated total value and stores it as new other game history information.

  In the process of S8240, the information management device 7850 transmits the player information stored in the information storage unit 7930, game history information (cumulative game point information, other game history information), and model information to the information terminal 7810.

  In the process of S8245, the information terminal 7810 displays player information, game history information (cumulative game point information, other game history information) and model information transmitted from the information management device 7850. The player can check the game history information displayed on the information terminal 7810, and can confirm the total game history reflecting the game result played in the login game mode this time. Note that the player can check the game history at any time by accessing the information management device 7850 using the information terminal 7810.

[Notification of error or abnormality occurrence information]
There is a case where an administrator of the gaming machine 1 or a repairman person in charge of a repair shop that repairs the gaming machine 1 wants to check an error or abnormality of the gaming machine 1. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming machine 1 is in a standby state (non-gaming state), an administrator or a repair person operates the effect button 142 or the effect key 144, so that the game machine 1 Past errors and abnormalities can be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 108. This will be described in detail below. Hereinafter, a person who confirms an error or abnormality of the gaming machine 1 is also simply referred to as a “confirmer”.

  FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining notification of error or abnormality occurrence information of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 87 (A) is a diagram showing an initial screen of the main liquid crystal display device 108 when investigating the gaming machine 1. FIG. 87 (B) is a diagram showing a state in which a list of error occurrence information is displayed. FIG. 87C is a diagram showing a state where a list of movable accessory abnormality occurrence information is displayed. FIG. 87D is a diagram showing a state where a list of input device abnormality occurrence information is displayed.

When a predetermined signal is input from the input device 145 when operated by the confirmer, the effect control unit 1150 selects an investigation target such as error or abnormality occurrence information as shown in FIG. The survey target selection image 8700A is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 108. The survey target selection image 8700A includes a selection promotion image 8701 that prompts selection of a survey target, an error occurrence information tab 8703, a movable accessory abnormality occurrence information tab 8705, and an input device abnormality occurrence information tab 8707.
The confirmer visually recognizes the survey target selection image 8700A and operates the input device 145 to select the tabs 8703, 8711, and 8719 corresponding to the desired information.

  When a specific tab is selected by the confirmer, the effect control unit 1150 displays a list of information corresponding to the selected tab. When the error occurrence information tab 8703 is selected by the confirmer, the effect control unit 1150 displays an error occurrence information notification image 8700B as shown in FIG. 87 (B). The error occurrence information notification image 8700B displays a suggestion image 8709 indicating that a list of error occurrence information is displayed, an error occurrence information image 8711 indicating a plurality of error occurrence information that has occurred in the past, and is displayed in the list. And a next tab 8713E for displaying error occurrence information that could not be completed. In this case, the effect control unit 1150 generates four error occurrence information 3499 in the order of the time indicated by the error occurrence time information from the accumulated error occurrence information 3499A (see FIG. 34-14) stored in the FRAM 1155. The information image 8711 is displayed. When the player selects the next tab 8713E, the effect control unit 1150 displays the next four new error occurrence information 3499 as the error occurrence information image 8711 out of the accumulated error occurrence information 3499A. The effect control unit 1150 repeats this display control every time the next tab 8713E is selected until the displayed error occurrence information 3499 is removed from the accumulated error occurrence information 3499A.

When the confirming person selects the movable accessory abnormality occurrence information tab 8705, the effect control unit 1150 displays a movable accessory abnormality occurrence information notification image 8700C as shown in FIG. 87 (C). The movable accessory abnormality occurrence information notification image 8700C includes a suggestion image 8713 indicating that a list of movable accessory abnormality occurrence information is displayed, and a movable accessory indicating a plurality of movable accessory abnormality occurrence information that has occurred in the past. An abnormality occurrence information image 8715 and a next tab 8713R for displaying movable agent abnormality occurrence information that could not be displayed in the list are included. In this case, the effect control unit 1150 includes the four movable accessory anomalies in the order of the time represented by the abnormality occurrence time information from the accumulated movable accessory abnormality occurrence information 3698A (see FIG. 36-6) stored in the FRAM 1155. Occurrence information 3698 is displayed as a movable accessory abnormality occurrence information image 8715. When the next tab 8713R is selected by the player, the effect control unit 1150 displays the next four new movable accessory abnormality occurrence information 3698 out of the accumulated movable accessory abnormality occurrence information 3698A. 8715 is displayed. The effect control unit 1150 repeats this display control every time the next tab 8713R is selected until the displayed movable accessory abnormality occurrence information 3698 is eliminated from the accumulated movable accessory abnormality occurrence information 3698A.

  When the input device abnormality occurrence information tab 8707 is selected by the confirmer, the effect control unit 1150 displays the input device abnormality occurrence information notification image 8700D as shown in FIG. 87 (D). The input device abnormality occurrence information notification image 8700D is a suggestion image 8717 indicating that a list of input device abnormality occurrence information is displayed, and an input device abnormality occurrence information image indicating a plurality of input device abnormality occurrence information that has occurred in the past. 8719 and a next tab 8713N for displaying input device abnormality occurrence information that could not be displayed in the list. In this case, the effect control unit 1150 includes the four pieces of input device abnormality occurrence information in the order of the time represented by the abnormality occurrence time information among the cumulative input device abnormality occurrence information 3699A (see FIG. 36-6) stored in the FRAM 1155. 3699 is displayed as an input device abnormality occurrence information image 8719. When the player selects the next tab 8713N, the effect control unit 1150 displays the next four new input device abnormality occurrence information 3699 as the input device abnormality occurrence information image 8719 out of the cumulative input device abnormality occurrence information 3699A. Let The effect control unit 1150 repeats this display control every time the next tab 8713N is selected until the displayed input device abnormality occurrence information 3699 is removed from the accumulated input device abnormality occurrence information 3699A.

  In this embodiment, when the investigation target selection image 8700A is displayed and the error occurrence information tab 8703 is selected, the effect control unit 1150 notifies the error occurrence information and displays the error occurrence information notification image 8700B. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the error occurrence information may be notified by voice. Similarly, when the investigation target selection image 8700A is displayed, when the movable accessory abnormality occurrence information tab 8705 is selected, the effect control unit 1150 notifies the movable accessory abnormality occurrence information of the movable accessory abnormality. Although the generation information notification image 8700C is used, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification of the movable accessory abnormality generation information may be performed by voice. Furthermore, when the input device abnormality occurrence information tab 8707 is selected when the investigation target selection image 8700A is displayed, the effect control unit 1150 notifies the input device abnormality occurrence information and displays the input device abnormality occurrence information notification image. Although it is performed using 8700D, it is not restricted to this, You may make it alert | report alert | report of input apparatus abnormality occurrence information.

[Import to information terminal based on code information]
A confirmer (such as a manager of the gaming machine 1 or a person in charge of a repairman) may want to import information on errors or abnormalities of the gaming machine 1 into the information terminal. Therefore, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a function for taking in past errors and abnormalities of the gaming machine 1 into an information terminal possessed by an administrator or a person in charge of repair. This will be described in detail below. In the following, a person who takes in error or abnormality information of the gaming machine 1 is simply referred to as “information acquirer”. Note that the information terminal possessed by the information acquirer is provided with a built-in camera.

FIG. 88 is a diagram for describing the error information or abnormality occurrence information of the gaming machine 1 taken into the information terminal. When a predetermined signal is input from the input device 145 by the information acquirer operating the production control unit 1150, the cumulative error occurrence information 3499A, the cumulative movable accessory abnormality occurrence information 3698A stored in the FRAM 1155, and Code information (QR code (registered trademark)) representing each piece of information is generated for the cumulative input device abnormality occurrence information 3699A. Then, the effect control unit 1150 causes the main liquid crystal display device 108 to display a code information selection image 8800A for selecting the generated code information, as shown in FIG. Specifically, the code information selection image 8800A includes a suggestion image 8810 indicating error occurrence information, code information indicating error occurrence information (hereinafter, also referred to as third code information) 8811, and movable accessory abnormality occurrence information. , Suggesting image 8820 indicating the moving object abnormality occurrence information (hereinafter also referred to as fourth code information) 8821, suggesting image 8830 indicating the input apparatus abnormality occurrence information, and input apparatus abnormality occurrence information Code information (hereinafter, also referred to as fifth code information) 8831.

  An information acquirer can quickly capture desired information into the information terminal by capturing code information corresponding to the desired information with the built-in camera of the information terminal that he / she possesses. For example, if the information acquirer wants to capture error occurrence information, the error occurrence information can be quickly captured by aiming at the third code information 8811 and taking an image with the built-in camera of the information terminal he possesses.

[Modification of FRAM 1155]
In the gaming machine 1, the effect control unit 1150 includes accumulated error occurrence information 3499A, accumulated movable accessory abnormality occurrence information 3698A, accumulated input device abnormality occurrence information 3699A, game history information 8101, and jackpot game point information 8103. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the gaming machine 1 may include storage means that does not depend on an external power supply, for example, a RAM that receives power supply from a capacitor or a battery. In this case, the effect control unit 1150 stores accumulated error occurrence information 3499A, accumulated movable accessory abnormality occurrence information 3698A, accumulated input device abnormality occurrence information 3699A, game history information 8101, and jackpot game point information 8103 in this RAM. May be stored.
In the gaming machine 1, the FRAM 1155 is provided in the effect control unit 1150, but the present invention is not limited to this. The FRAM 1155 may be provided in a control unit different from the effect control unit 1150, for example, the main control unit 1100, the firing control unit 1130, the payout control unit 1140, the lamp control unit 1170, and the image sound control unit 1160. . For example, when the FRAM 1155 is provided in the main control unit 1100, the main control unit 1100 stores the accumulated error occurrence information 3499A, the accumulated movable accessory abnormality occurrence information 3698A, and the accumulated input device abnormality occurrence information 3699A. You may make it memorize | store in FRAM1155 provided in. For example, when the FRAM 1155 is provided in the image sound control unit 1160, the image sound control unit 1160 receives the game history information 8101 from the effect control unit 1150 and uses the game history information 8101 as the image sound control unit. You may make it memorize | store in FRAM1155 provided in 1160. FIG.
In the gaming machine 1, the game history information 8101, accumulated error occurrence information 3499 A, accumulated movable accessory abnormality occurrence information 3698 A, and accumulated input device abnormality occurrence information 3699 A are stored only in the FRAM 1155 provided in the effect control unit 1150. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect control unit 1150 stores the game history information 8101 in the RAM 1153 having a relatively high reading speed in addition to the FRAM 1155, and when using the game history information 8101 in a normal state, the game history information stored in the RAM 1153. If the game history information 8101 is deleted when the power supply to the RAM 1153 is cut off across the day using the 8101, the game history information 8101 stored in the FRAM 1155 may be used. Good. Further, for example, the effect control unit 1150 adds the accumulated error occurrence information 3499A, the accumulated movable accessory abnormality occurrence information 3698A, and the accumulated input device abnormality occurrence information 3699A to the RAM 1153 having a relatively high reading speed in addition to the FRAM 1155. When the accumulated error occurrence information 3499A, accumulated movable accessory abnormality occurrence information 3698A, or accumulated input device abnormality occurrence information 3699A is used in the normal state, the accumulated error occurrence information 3499A, accumulated movable accessory abnormality stored in the RAM 1153 is used. The generation information 3698A or the cumulative input device abnormality occurrence information 3699A is used, and the power supply to the RAM 1153 is cut off across the day and the cumulative error occurrence information 3499A, the cumulative movable accessory abnormality occurrence information 3698A, And cumulative input device error occurrence information When the 699A is erased, the cumulative error occurrence information 3499A stored in FRAM1155, cumulative movable won game abnormality occurrence information 3698A, or it may be used the accumulated input device abnormality information 3699A.

[Modification of error detection processing]
In the gaming machine 1, the production control unit 1150 stores the accumulated error occurrence information 3499A in the FRAM 1155 in the error information storage process of S3324 in FIG. 33, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, the effect control unit 1150 may measure the frequency of error occurrence (for example, the number of error occurrences per day) based on the accumulated error occurrence information 3499A. An administrator or a repair person of the gaming machine 1 may operate the input device 145 to instruct the gaming machine 1 to notify the error occurrence frequency. When there is a predetermined input signal from the input device 145, the effect control unit 1150 may cause the main liquid crystal display device 108 to display the occurrence frequency information indicating the occurrence frequency of the error. In this case, occurrence frequency information may be displayed for each type of error.

[Modification of retry processing]
In the gaming machine 1 described above, the effect control unit 1150 stores the accumulated movable accessory abnormality occurrence information 3698A in the FRAM 1155 by the retry process of FIG. 36-4, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the production control unit 1150 determines the frequency of occurrence of an abnormality (for example, the number of occurrences of abnormality per day) of the movable combination (eg, cup-shaped movable combination 196) based on the accumulated movable combination abnormality occurrence information 3698A. You may make it measure. A manager or a repair person of the gaming machine 1 may operate the input device 145 to instruct the gaming machine 1 to notify the frequency of occurrence of the movable accessory. When there is a predetermined input signal from the input device 145, the effect control unit 1150 may cause the main liquid crystal display device 108 to display occurrence frequency information indicating the occurrence frequency of the measured abnormality of the movable accessory. In this case, occurrence frequency information may be displayed for each type of error.

[Modified example of input device abnormality detection processing]
In the gaming machine 1, the effect control unit 1150 stores the cumulative input device abnormality occurrence information 3699A in the FRAM 1155 by the retry process of FIG. 36-4, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, the effect control unit 1150 may measure the frequency of occurrence of abnormality in the input device 145 (eg, the number of occurrences of abnormality per day) based on the cumulative input device abnormality occurrence information 3699A. An administrator of the gaming machine 1 or a repair person may instruct the gaming machine 1 to notify the occurrence frequency of the input device 145 by operating the input device 145. When there is a predetermined input signal from the input device 145, the effect control unit 1150 may cause the main liquid crystal display device 108 to display occurrence frequency information indicating the occurrence frequency of the abnormality of the input device 145 measured. In this case, occurrence frequency information may be displayed for each type of error.

[Modification of Jackpot System]
Modification 1:
In the jackpot system, the effect control unit 1150 adds the jackpot game points in the jackpot game point information 8103, and when the jackpot lottery is won, However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the production control unit 1150 stores a predetermined item instead of a game point, and when winning the jackpot lottery, the stored item is added to the game history information of the player. Good.

Modification 2:
In the jackpot system, the production control unit 1150 performs jackpot lottery when the current time reaches the jackpot time, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the current time is the jackpot time, the effect control unit 1150 may add the jackpot game points to the player's game history information 8101 without performing the jackpot lottery.

Modification 3:
In the jackpot system, the production control unit 1150 performs a jackpot lottery when the jackpot time is once a day, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a jackpot time is set several times a day (PM1: 30, PM5: 30, PM8: 30, etc. three times), and the production control unit 1150 performs a jackpot lottery when each jackpot time is reached. It is good.

Modification 4:
In the jackpot system, the production control unit 1150 performs a jackpot lottery when the jackpot time is once a day, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect control unit 1150 may perform a jackpot lottery both when the first jackpot time is reached and when the second jackpot time is reached. In this case, the first jackpot time is set to have a higher appearance frequency than the second jackpot time. For example, the first jackpot time is set every three hours after the gaming machine 1 is turned on, and the second jackpot time is The pot time may be one time PM8: 30. Then, the winning probability of the jackpot lottery when the first jackpot time is reached may be set lower than the winning probability of the jackpot lottery when the second jackpot time is reached.

Modification 5:
In the jackpot system, the production control unit 1150 performs a jackpot lottery when the current time is the jackpot time, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect control unit 1150 does not have the current time when the jackpot time is reached, but when a predetermined effect appears (for example, when a premier effect as shown in FIG. 84 (B) appears) When the operation status after 1 is set satisfies a certain condition (for example, when the cumulative number of big hits since the installation of the gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value), a jackpot lottery is performed. Also good.

Modification 6:
In the jackpot system, as shown in the game history information replacement process in FIG. 83, the effect control unit 1150 performs a jackpot lottery when the jackpot time is reached even when the game is not in progress. The present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control unit 1150 may not perform the jackpot lottery even when the jackpot time is reached when the game is not being played.

Modification 7:
In the jackpot system, the effect control unit 1150, as shown in the game history information replacement process of FIG. 83, when the change of the special symbol is completed and the game point generation condition is satisfied, The game is added to the jackpot game point information 8103 and the game history information 8101, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect control unit 1150 satisfies the game point generation condition not only when the change of the special symbol is finished but also during the change, during the big hit game, during the ending, or during the opening. In this case, the game points may be added to the jackpot game point information 8103 and the game history information 8101.

Modification 8:
Although the production control unit 1150 performs the production for jackpot (FIG. 85) on the sub liquid crystal display device 106, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect control unit 1150 may perform the jackpot effect (FIG. 85) on the main liquid crystal display device 108. In this case, the effect control unit 1150 performs the jackpot effect in the special effect area A1 of the main liquid crystal display device 108 as in the performance announcement effect and the music performance effect described above, and performs the normal effect (design variation effect) in the lower area. You may make it carry out by A2. In addition, the production control unit 1150 can take the following four modes when the production timing of the jackpot production and the performance announcement production and the music performance production described above overlap. That is, as the first aspect, the effect control unit 1150 performs the jackpot effect on the sub liquid crystal display device 106, and performs the normal effect (design variation effect) and the performance announcement effect and the music performance effect as described above. You may make it carry out with the main liquid crystal display device 108 like a form. As a second mode, the production control unit 1150 performs a jackpot production and a normal production (symbol variation production) on the main liquid crystal display device 108 (upper region A1 and lower region A2). The musical performance performance may be performed by the sub liquid crystal display device 106. As a third aspect, the production control unit 1150 may perform the jackpot production, the performance announcement production and the music performance production, and the normal production (design variation production) on the main liquid crystal display device 108. Good. As a fourth aspect, the effect control unit 1150 performs a normal effect (symbol variation effect) on the main liquid crystal display device 108, and performs a jackpot effect and the above-mentioned performance announcement effect and music performance effect on the sub liquid crystal display device 106. You may make it perform.

[Modifications in retry processing and input device abnormality detection processing]
In the command reception process (FIGS. 36-1 to 36-3), the retry process (FIG. 36-4) and the input device abnormality detection process (FIG. 36-5) are performed when a change start command is received (FIG. 36-1). : S3609: YES), when an opening command is received (FIG. 36-2: S3627: YES), or when an ending command is received (FIG. 36-3: S3665: YES) The present invention is not limited to this. The effect control unit 1150 may execute the retry process (FIG. 36-4) and the input device abnormality detection process (FIG. 36-5) at other timings in the command reception process. For example, the retry process (FIG. 36-4) and / or the input device abnormality detection process (FIG. 36-5) may be executed at the start of the command reception process. In addition, the effect control unit 1150 performs the retry process (FIG. 36-4) and the input device abnormality detection process (FIG. 36-5) when the player is not playing the gaming machine 1, that is, during the change of the special symbol ( FIG. 2: If any of the first special symbol display 201 and the second special symbol display 202 is fluctuating), during the opening effect, during the ending effect, or during the big hit game, You may make it perform.

[Other variations]
In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine, which is a pachinko game machine, has been described as an example of the game machine. It may be a ball game machine or the like, and these game machines may be equipped with a payout device for paying out a medium such as a ball or a medal or not (for example, a so-called enclosed type). Good. In particular, in a different type of gaming machine such as the gaming machine 1 and the revolving type gaming machine, by sharing and adopting the gaming system of the present embodiment, a new gaming Can provide fun.

In the above embodiment, the case where the invention is applied to a one-type and two-type mixed type pachinko gaming machine has been described as an example. However, the present invention is applied to other gaming machines such as a single-type pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Is also applicable.
When the present invention is applied to a slot machine, for example, ART (assist replay time), AT (assist time), pseudo bonus, etc. per bonus in the slot machine correspond to player advantageous games.

  The configuration of the gaming machine 1 and the operation mode of each member described in the above embodiment are merely examples, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be realized with other configurations and operation modes. Further, the order of processing, the set value, the threshold value used for determination, etc. in the flowcharts described above are merely examples, and the present invention can be realized with other orders and values without departing from the scope of the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the screen diagrams and the like exemplified in the above embodiment are merely examples, and may be screens of other display modes.

◆ [Effect of Jackpot System]
[Invention A1]
Conventionally, a player plays a game for the purpose of obtaining a privilege (player advantageous privilege) advantageous to the player, such as a big hit game, a probability variation game, or a continuous support game using an electric tulip. These player advantageous benefits are benefits that can occur after a big hit, in other words, if a player does not win a big hit, he cannot enjoy these player advantageous benefits, and even if the game is progressing, it is quite a big hit When it was not possible to get it, there was a case that it would be bored in the game.
Therefore, various devices have been devised in recent gaming machines in order not to bore the game player. For example, points are accumulated according to the occurrence of actions (such as transition to super reach or the appearance of specific characters) that occur in the game. A gaming machine that returns to a player is known. Specifically, in this gaming machine, accumulated point information (for example, QR code (registered trademark)) representing accumulated points can be notified to the player, and the player can display the accumulated point information on the information terminal he possesses. Acquiring accumulated points can be enjoyed.
However, in such a gaming machine, when the power is turned off, such as when an unexpected power failure occurs or the gaming machine is reset, the accumulated point information is also erased, and the player moves along with the progress of the game. It may be difficult to enjoy the accumulated point information that has been accumulated hard.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine of the invention A1, the gaming machine is an external power supply dependent storage means (RAM 1103, RAM 1153, etc.) that depends on an external power supply, an independent storage means (FRAM 1155) that does not depend on the external power supply, and a player. Advantageous privilege execution means (main control unit 1100) for executing a player advantageous game (S1620, S1625) to which an advantageous player advantageous privilege can be assigned, and the player advantageous privilege are different from each other in the progress of the game. The independent storage means is accumulated as accumulated game progress privilege information (accumulated game point information of the game history information 8101) by accumulating game progress privilege information (gaming game point information of the game history information 8101) representing the game progress privilege that accompanies it. Bonus information accumulating means (production control unit 1150) stored in the game, and the accumulated game progress privilege information stored in the independent storage means Benefits reduction information for imparting to the player (FIG. 82: S8220) and an informing means for informing the player (main liquid crystal display device 108, etc.), and summarized in that comprises a.

  That is, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the effect control unit 1150 stores the accumulated game point information of the game history information 8101 in the FRAM 1155, generates second code information based on the accumulated game point information, and this second Two-code information is reported on the main liquid crystal display device 108.

According to this configuration, since the accumulated game point information of the game history information 8101 is stored in the FRAM 1155, even if the value of the accumulated game point information is increased due to the game, the accumulated game point information is stored in the event of an unexpected power failure or It will not be erased even when the power is turned off, such as when the store is reset. Therefore, the second code information based on the accumulated game point information can be generated and notified to the player even during a power failure or after reset. As a result, the player can enjoy the accumulated game point information accumulated through hard work without wasting it, and the game motivation can be improved. In other words, the interest of the gaming machine can be improved.
Further, since accumulated game point information of the game history information 8101 is stored in the FRAM 1155, for example, when the gaming machine 1 is turned off every day (that is, when the gaming machine 1 is reset). In addition, it is possible to continuously store the accumulated game point information across days, and it is possible to generate second code information based on the accumulated game point information and notify the player. As a result, the player can enjoy the accumulated game point information accumulated through hard work without wasting it, and the game motivation can be improved. In other words, the interest of the gaming machine can be improved.

[Invention A2]
The gaming machine according to the invention A1, wherein the privilege information accumulating means accumulates game progress privilege information and stores it as first accumulated game progress privilege information in the storage means, and the game progress 2nd accumulation means which accumulates privilege information and stores in the storage means as second accumulated game progress privilege information different from the first accumulated game progress privilege information. If the condition is satisfied, the storage means stores the third cumulative game progress privilege information obtained by adding the second cumulative game progress privilege information to the first cumulative game progress privilege information. The gist is that the notifying means notifies the player of the privilege return information for giving the third cumulative game progress privilege information to the player.

  That is, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game point generation condition (S8315: YES) is established, the effect control unit 1150 stores the accumulated game points of the game history information 8101 in the FRAM 1155 (S8320) and the jack. Pot gaming point information 8103 is stored (S8325). When the jackpot lottery is won (S8340: YES), the effect control unit 1150 adds the value of the game point information 8103 for jackpot to the value of the game point information of the game history information 8101 today, that is, the game history. The value of the jackpot game point information 8103 is added to the value of the accumulated game point information of the information 8101 (S8350). The effect control unit 1150 notifies the main liquid crystal display device of the second code information based on the accumulated game point information of the added game history information 8101 (S8215).

  According to this configuration, when the player wins the jackpot lottery, the player can obtain the accumulated game point information of the game history information 8101 including the game point information 8103 for jackpot via the second code information. 7810. Therefore, the player can not only enjoy the player's advantageous benefits such as a big hit game, but also can make the jackpot lottery a new pleasure and improve the interest of the gaming machine 1.

[Invention A3]
The gaming machine according to the invention A2, further comprising a time measuring unit capable of measuring a current time, wherein the privilege information accumulating unit is configured such that when the time measured by the time measuring unit becomes a specific time, The gist is that the third cumulative game progress privilege information obtained by adding the second cumulative game progress privilege information to the first cumulative game progress privilege information is stored in the storage means.

  In other words, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the measurement time of the RTC 1154 becomes the jackpot time (S8330: YES), the effect control unit 1150 adds the game history information 8101 to which the game point information 8103 for jackpot is added. The accumulated game point information is stored.

  According to this configuration, the player can look forward to a predetermined jackpot time, and can improve the interest of the gaming machine 1.

[Invention A4]
A gaming machine according to invention A2 or A3,
The bonus information accumulating means stores the third cumulative game progress privilege information obtained by adding the second cumulative game progress privilege information to the first cumulative game progress privilege information when the lottery is won. It is a summary to memorize.

  That is, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot lottery is won (S8340: YES), the effect control unit 1150 accumulates game point information in the game history information 8101 including the game point information 8103 for jackpot. Is remembered.

  According to this configuration, the player can look forward to the jackpot lottery and can improve the interest of the gaming machine 1.

[Invention A5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the invention A2 to the invention A4, further comprising a time measuring unit capable of measuring a current time, wherein the privilege information accumulating unit is configured such that the time measured by the time measuring unit is the first specified When the first lottery is executed at the time, and the first lottery is won, the second cumulative game progress privilege information is added to the first cumulative game progress privilege information. The obtained third cumulative game progress privilege information is stored in the storage means, and when the time counted by the timing means becomes a second specific time, a second lottery is executed, Storing the third cumulative game progress privilege information obtained by adding the second cumulative game progress privilege information to the first cumulative game progress privilege information in the storage means when the second lottery is won, Output of the first specific time Frequency, the second higher than the frequency of occurrence of a particular time, winning probability of the first lottery, the lower than winning probability of the second drawing, and summarized in that.

  That is, in the gaming machine 1 (jackpot system: modification 4) of the present embodiment, the production control unit 1150 is both when the first jackpot time is reached and when the second jackpot time is reached. Make a jackpot drawing. In this case, the appearance frequency of the first jackpot time is set higher than the second jackpot time, and the winning probability of the jackpot lottery when the first jackpot time is reached is the second jackpot time. It is set lower than the winning probability of jackpot lottery.

  According to this configuration, since there are a plurality of jackpot times, the player can regularly receive a jackpot lottery, and when a second jackpot time with a relatively high probability of winning appears, You can have great expectations for winning the jackpot. As a result, the interest of the gaming machine 1 can be improved.

◇ [Effect of error detection processing]
[Invention B1]
In a conventional gaming machine, when an error is detected, the detected error information may be stored, for example, in a RAM of the gaming machine, and error notification may be performed on the spot.
However, in such a gaming machine, when the power is turned off, such as when an unexpected power failure occurs or the gaming machine is reset, the error information is also erased, and the gaming machine administrator, factory, etc. There was a possibility that the repair person could not check the error information of the gaming machine. As a result, there is a possibility that the manager or the repair person cannot easily grasp the state of the gaming machine.
In addition, the failure of managers and repair personnel to acquire error information for gaming machines, preventing fraud, unable to identify repaired parts of gaming machines, and continuation of the game being stopped May occur, and the player's willingness to play may be reduced.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine of invention B1,
External power supply dependent storage means (1103, 1153, etc.) that depend on an external power supply, independent storage means (1155) that does not depend on the external power supply, time measuring means (RTC1154) that can measure the current time, and the gaming machine Error occurrence information (error occurrence information 3499) in which error information indicating an error is associated with a time measured by the current timing means and when the error occurs is stored in the independent storage means. And a storage control means (production control unit 1150).

  That is, in the gaming machine 1, the effect control unit 1150 stores the error occurrence information 3499 in which the error information and the error occurrence time information based on the time counted by the RTC 1154 are associated with each other in the FRAM 1155.

According to this configuration, since the error occurrence information 3499 is stored in the FRAM 1155 that does not depend on the external power supply, the error occurrence information 3499 is not erased even after the power is turned off, such as in the event of an unexpected power failure or when the gaming machine is reset. Therefore, even after a power failure or a power reset of the gaming machine (for example, after the gaming machine 1 is turned off after the game hall is closed, or after straddling the day), the error occurrence information 3499 is stored in the gaming machine. It is possible to notify the manager and the person in charge of repair. For this reason, since the administrator and the repair person of the gaming machine can acquire the error occurrence information 3499 even after the power is turned off, it is possible to easily grasp the state of the gaming machine.
In addition, since the administrator or repair person of the gaming machine can acquire the error occurrence information 3499 even after the power is turned off, it is possible to suppress fraud and to easily specify the repair location. Furthermore, it is possible to smoothly advance the game without stopping the continuation of the game. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.
Furthermore, since the error occurrence information 3499 is associated with the error information and the error occurrence time, the administrator or the repair person can quickly identify the cause of the error.

[Invention B2]
The gist of the gaming machine according to the invention B1 is provided with notifying means (main liquid crystal display device 108) for notifying the error occurrence information stored by the storage control means.

  That is, in the gaming machine 1, when the input device 145 is operated by a manager or a repair person of the gaming machine, the effect control unit 1150 notifies the error occurrence information 3499 stored in the FRAM 1155 on the main liquid crystal display device 108. I am doing so.

  According to this configuration, since the administrator or repair person of the gaming machine can acquire the error occurrence information 3499 even after the power is turned off, the state of the gaming machine can be easily grasped.

[Invention B3]
The gaming machine according to the invention B1 or B2, further comprising error frequency measuring means for measuring the frequency of occurrence of the error of the gaming machine based on the accumulated error occurrence information, wherein the notification means includes the error frequency measurement The gist is to notify the occurrence frequency information indicating the occurrence frequency of the error measured by the means.

  That is, in the gaming machine 1, the effect control unit 1150 measures the frequency of error occurrence (for example, the number of times of error occurrence per day) based on the accumulated error occurrence information 3499A, and performs a predetermined input from the input device 145. When there is a signal, the main liquid crystal display device 108 is made to display occurrence frequency information indicating the occurrence frequency of the measured error.

  According to this configuration, the administrator of the gaming machine and the person in charge of repair can recognize the frequency of occurrence of the error, and can quickly determine whether or not repair is necessary.

[Invention B4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the inventions B1 to B3, wherein the notifying means notifies the error occurrence information in a standby state where a game is not being performed by a player. And

  That is, in the gaming machine 1, the effect control unit 1150 displays the error occurrence information 3499 stored in the FRAM 1155 on the main liquid crystal display device 108 when the gaming machine 1 is in a standby state (non-gaming state). Yes.

  According to this configuration, the administrator of the gaming machine and the person in charge of repair can recognize the error occurrence information without disturbing the player.

◆ [Effects of retry processing and input device error detection processing]
[Invention C1]
In recent gaming machines, there are known gaming machines capable of detecting an abnormality of a movable body (such as a driving tool) used for gaming effects and an input device (such as a button or key) that can be operated by the player. When these abnormalities are detected, the failure information may be recorded in, for example, a RAM of a gaming machine and used for repair.
However, in such a gaming machine, when the power is turned off, such as when an unexpected power failure occurs or the gaming machine is reset, the abnormal information is also erased, and the gaming machine manager or repair shop Even if the person in charge of repair cannot confirm the abnormality information of the gaming machine, there is a possibility that the abnormality of the gaming machine cannot be found immediately. Therefore, a game with a problem is executed on the gaming machine, and there is a possibility that a predetermined performance or the like is affected. As a result, the interest of the gaming machine may be reduced.

On the other hand, in invention C1,
A gaming machine comprising main control means (main control unit 1100) and sub-control means (effect control unit 1150) for controlling a game effect based on an instruction from the main control means, wherein the sub-control means Includes a storage means (FARAM 1155) that does not depend on an external power source, a time measuring means (RTC 1154) capable of measuring the current time, and a driving means (movable accessory driving unit 1191) for driving a movable body used for the game effect. A movable body detecting means (production control unit 1150) for detecting whether or not the movable body is operating normally; and a movable body abnormality indicating that the movable body is not operating normally by the movable body detecting means. When the information is detected, the movable body abnormality information and the time corresponding to the detection of the movable body abnormality information, which is the time measured by the time measuring means, are associated with each other. The abnormality information (movable won game abnormality occurrence information 3698), a storage control unit (the performance control unit 1150) for storing in the storage means, and summarized in that comprises a.

  That is, in the gaming machine 1, the effect control unit 1150 stores, in the FRAM 1155, the movable accessory abnormality occurrence information 3698 in which the movable accessory abnormality information is associated with the abnormality occurrence time information based on the time counted by the RTC 1154. I am doing so.

According to this configuration, the movable accessory abnormality occurrence information 3698 is stored in the FRAM 1155 that does not depend on the external power supply, and therefore is erased even after the power is turned off in the event of an unexpected power failure or a gaming machine reset. Not. Therefore, even after a power failure or a reset of the gaming machine, the movable accessory abnormality occurrence information 3698 can be notified to the administrator or repair person in charge of the gaming machine.
For this reason, since the administrator or repair person in charge of the gaming machine can acquire the movable accessory abnormality occurrence information 3698 even after the power is turned off, the state of the gaming machine can be grasped quickly and easily. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of times that the gaming machine has a problem with the gaming machine, to reduce the influence on a predetermined performance, and to improve the interest of the gaming machine.
In addition, since the movable accessory abnormality occurrence information 3698 is associated with the movable accessory abnormality information and the abnormality occurrence time, the administrator or the person in charge of the repair can quickly identify the cause of the abnormality of the movable accessory. Can do.

[Invention C2]
The gist of the gaming machine according to the invention C1 is characterized by comprising notifying means (main liquid crystal display device 108) for notifying the movable body abnormality occurrence information stored by the storage control means.

  That is, in the gaming machine 1, when the input device 145 is operated by a manager or a repair person of the gaming machine, the effect control unit 1150 displays the movable accessory abnormality occurrence information 3698 stored in the FRAM 1155 as the main liquid crystal display device 108. I am trying to alert you.

  According to this configuration, since the administrator or repair person of the gaming machine 1 can acquire the movable accessory abnormality occurrence information 3698 even after the power is turned off, the state of the gaming machine 1 can be easily grasped.

[Invention C3]
A gaming machine comprising main control means (main control unit 1100) and sub-control means (effect control unit 1150) for controlling a game effect based on an instruction from the main control means, wherein the sub-control means The memory means (FARAM 1155) independent of the external power source, the time measuring means (RTC 1154) capable of measuring the current time, the input device (input device 145) operable by the player, and the input device operating normally When input device abnormality information indicating that the input device is not operating normally is detected by the input device detection means (production control unit 1150) for detecting whether or not the input device is operating normally, The input device abnormality information associated with the input device abnormality information and the time measured by the time measuring means and corresponding to the detection of the input device abnormality information. Information (input device abnormality information 3699), a storage control unit (the performance control unit 1150) for storing in the storage means, and summarized in that comprises a.

According to this configuration, since the input device abnormality information 3699 is stored in the FRAM 1155 that does not depend on the external power supply, it is not erased even after the power is turned off in the event of an unexpected power failure or when the gaming machine is reset. Therefore, the input device abnormality information 3699 can be notified to the administrator of the gaming machine and the person in charge of repair even after a power failure or a reset of the gaming machine. For this reason, the administrator or repair person of the gaming machine can acquire the input device abnormality information 3699 even after the power is turned off, and can quickly and easily grasp the state of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of times that the gaming machine has a problem with the gaming machine, to reduce the influence on a predetermined performance, and to improve the interest of the gaming machine.
Moreover, since the input device abnormality information 3699 is associated with the input device abnormality information and the abnormality occurrence time, the administrator or the person in charge of repair can quickly identify the cause of the abnormality of the input device.

[Invention C4]
A gaming machine according to invention C3,
The gist of the present invention is to provide notifying means (main liquid crystal display device 108) for notifying the input device abnormality occurrence information stored by the storage control means.

That is, in the gaming machine 1, when the input device 145 is operated by a manager or a repair person of the gaming machine, the production control unit 1150 displays the input device abnormality occurrence information 3699 stored in the FRAM 1155 on the main liquid crystal display device 108. I am trying to inform you.

  According to this configuration, the administrator or repair person of the gaming machine can acquire the input device abnormality occurrence information 3699 even after the power is turned off, so that the state of the gaming machine can be easily grasped.

[Invention C5]
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions C1 to C4,
Based on the accumulated abnormality occurrence information of the movable accessory and / or the input device, an abnormality frequency measuring means for measuring the occurrence frequency of the abnormality of the movable accessory or / and the input device is provided, and the notification means includes the abnormality frequency. The gist is to notify the frequency of occurrence of the abnormality measured by the measuring means.

  That is, in the gaming machine 1, the effect control unit 1150 is configured to move the movable accessory (such as the cup-shaped movable accessory 196) and / or based on the cumulative movable accessory abnormality occurrence information 3698 A and / or the cumulative input device abnormality occurrence information 3699 A. When the frequency of occurrence of abnormality (for example, the number of occurrences of errors per day) of the input device 145 is measured and a predetermined input signal is received from the input device 145, the frequency of occurrence of abnormality measured on the main liquid crystal display device 108 is represented. The occurrence frequency information is displayed.

  According to this configuration, the manager or the repairer of the gaming machine can recognize the frequency of occurrence of the movable accessory (such as the cup-shaped movable accessory 196) and / or the input device 145, so is repair necessary? It is possible to quickly determine whether or not.

[Invention C6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the inventions B1 to B5, wherein the informing means is in a standby state in which a game is not being performed by a player, and / or when the movable accessory abnormality occurrence information and / or The gist is to notify input device abnormality occurrence information.

  That is, in the gaming machine 1, the effect control unit 1150 displays the movable accessory abnormality occurrence information 3698 and / or the input device abnormality occurrence information 3699 stored in the FRAM 1155 when the gaming machine 1 is in a standby state (non-game state). The display is made on the main liquid crystal display device 108.

  According to this configuration, the administrator or repairer of the gaming machine can recognize the movable accessory abnormality occurrence information 3698 and / or the input device abnormality occurrence information 3699 without interfering with the player. .

[Various aspects of the gaming machine 1]
◆ [Aspects D1 to D4]
The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can be expressed in the following manners D1 to D4.
[Aspect D1]
A time measuring means for measuring time, a time determining means for determining whether or not a predetermined time has been reached based on a time measurement result of the time measuring means, a normal performance executed based on a lottery result, and the time While performing the special effect different from the normal effect that is executed when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined time has been reached, and when the special effect is being executed, the special effect is ended. Effect control means for displaying remaining time information that can specify the remaining time, and when the effect control means executes the normal effect when the special effect is not executed, the first aspect When the normal effect is executed while the special effect is executed, the normal effect is executed in a second mode different from the first mode. The gaming machine.

[Aspect D2]
A time measuring means for measuring time, a time determining means for determining whether or not a predetermined time has been reached based on a time measurement result of the time measuring means, a normal performance executed based on a lottery result, and the time Effect control means for executing a special effect that is started when it is determined by the determination means that a predetermined start time has been reached, and is ended when it is determined by the time determination means that a predetermined end time has been reached; When the normal effect is executed when the special effect is not being executed, the normal effect is executed according to the first aspect, and the special effect is being executed. When performing the normal performance, the normal performance is executed in a second mode different from the first mode.

[Aspect D3]
Time measuring means for measuring time, time determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined time has been reached based on the time measurement result of the time measuring means, and determination that the time predetermined by the time determination means has been reached An effect control means for executing a special effect, a first effect composed of a plurality of normal effects, and a second effect different from the first effect; Priority storage means for storing priority information indicating the priority of each effect in the effect, wherein the special effect is executed following the first special effect and the first special effect. The effect control means, when executing the special effect as the first effect, when executing any of the plurality of normal effects, the priority storage means Based on the priority information stored in And priority determining means for determining whether or not the priority of the normal effect is higher than the special effect being executed, and the priority when the priority of the normal effect is higher than the special effect being executed. If it is determined by the determining means, the normal effect is prioritized and executed over the special effect being executed, and the priority determining means if the priority of the normal effect is lower than the special effect being executed. If the first effect control is executed, the first effect control is executed by the first effect control when the second effect is executed. A game machine comprising: second effect control for executing the second effect regardless of whether the second effect is executed with priority.

[Aspect D4]
Time measuring means for measuring the current time, time determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined time has been reached based on the time measurement result of the time measuring means, and whether or not a predetermined error has occurred. An error determining means for determining, a special effect executed when it is determined by the time determining means that a predetermined time has been reached, a first effect comprising a plurality of normal effects, and the first effect Effect control means for executing a second effect that is different from the effect, and an error notification for notifying that an error has occurred by the error determination means, and priority of each effect in the first effect Priority storage means for storing priority information indicating the degree, and the effect control means performs any of the plurality of normal effects when the special effect is being executed as the first effect. Run The priority determination means for determining whether the priority of the normal effect is higher than the special effect being executed based on the priority information stored in the priority storage means; and the normal effect If the priority determination means determines that the priority is higher than the special effect being executed, the normal effect is executed with priority over the special effect being executed. If the priority determination means determines that the degree is lower than the special effect being executed, the first effect control for continuously executing the special effect being executed and the second effect are executed. The second effect control for executing the second effect regardless of which first effect is preferentially executed by the first effect control, and the error notification is: The second effect is being executed Executed regardless, characterized in that, the gaming machine.

◆ [Aspects E1 to E16]
The gaming machine 1 can also be expressed in various modes such as E1 to E16 as follows.
[Aspect E1]
A time measuring means capable of measuring the current time;
Effect control means capable of executing a first effect using installation position information representing an installation position of the gaming machine and a second effect not using the installation position information;
With
The effect control means can execute the third effect when the time measured by the time measuring means reaches a predetermined time,
The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the third effect includes a first effect and a second effect.

  The installation position information is information indicating the position of the gaming machine 1 in the game hall where the gaming machine 1 is introduced. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the installation position information may be information indicating the position of the area where the gaming machine 1 is introduced.

[Aspect E2]
Providing production control means capable of executing a predetermined production,
The effect control means changes a start timing of the predetermined effect based on installation position information representing an installation position of the gaming machine,
Or
A production control means capable of executing a predetermined production at the first timing,
The production control means, when executing the predetermined production, is executed at a second timing later than the first timing, based on installation position information representing an installation position of the gaming machine. Gaming machines,

[Aspect E3]
Based on the first effect pattern for executing the predetermined effect at the first timing and the installation position information indicating the installation position of the gaming machine, the predetermined effect is executed at the second timing later than the first timing. A production control means capable of realizing the second production pattern,
The production control means includes
When the second effect pattern is realized and a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when there is a hold on which a jackpot game is executed), a special game (for example, awarding of game points) is executed. A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E4]
A time measuring means capable of measuring the current time;
Effect data storage means for storing effect data for executing the predetermined effect;
Production control means capable of realizing the first production pattern and the second production pattern,
The production control means includes
As the first effect pattern, when the time measured by the time measuring means reaches a predetermined time, the reproduction based on the effect data stored in the effect data storage means is started, and the second The game machine is characterized in that, as the production pattern, a reproduction based on the production data stored in the production data storage means is started at a timing different from the predetermined time according to the installation position information. .

[Aspect E5]
A time measuring means capable of measuring the current time;
Lottery means for lottery whether or not to win a game based on a game using a game medium;
Lottery holding means capable of holding the lottery performed by the lottery means; and
Prefetch determination means capable of executing prefetch lottery that is a lottery for determining the lottery result of the lottery held by the lottery holding means before the lottery held is lottery by the lottery means; ,
A pre-reading effect based on the lottery result of the pre-read lottery, from when the pre-read lottery is performed by the pre-reading determination unit until the lottery subject to determination of the pre-read lottery is executed by the lottery unit Pre-reading effect realization means for realizing the pre-reading effect performed in the
The prefetching effect realization means includes:
A first pre-reading effect pattern that is a pre-reading effect that is executed when the time measured by the time measuring means reaches a predetermined time, and a time that is timed by the time measuring means is a time other than the predetermined time A gaming machine capable of realizing a second prefetch effect pattern to be executed.

[Aspect E6]
Providing production control means capable of performing production based on installation position information representing the installation position of the gaming machine,
The effect control means is capable of realizing a first effect pattern that executes a first effect and a second effect pattern that executes a second effect that is different from some of the first effects. A gaming machine characterized by

[Aspect E7]
A time measuring means capable of measuring the current time;
A time effect produced when the time measured by the time measuring means reaches a predetermined time, and changes in a first change effect that changes in the first cycle and a second cycle different from the first cycle. A game machine comprising an effect control means capable of executing a timing effect including a second change effect.

[Aspect E8]
A time measuring means capable of measuring the current time;
Production control means for performing a timed effect starting from a predetermined time based on the time measured by the time measuring stage,
The production control means includes a first production pattern for executing a second type production different in type from the first type production and the first type production, and the first type production and the second type production as the time production. The second type effect pattern, wherein the effect time of the first type effect is different from the effect time of the first type effect executed in the first effect pattern. A gaming machine characterized by being capable of realizing the above.

[Aspect E9]
A time measuring means capable of measuring the current time;
Production control means for performing a timed effect starting from a predetermined time based on the time measured by the time measuring stage via a predetermined production means,
The effect control means performs an effect with a fixed effect time as the timed effect, and varies the effect contents in the effect time.

[Aspect E10]
The effect control means is capable of executing a plurality of effects as the timed effects at a predetermined time interval, and after power supply, a specific effect among the plurality of effects is executed first. To play.

[Aspect E11]
The production control means executes, as the time production, a first time production with a constant execution interval from the start of the next time production and a second time production with an undefined execution interval. A gaming machine.

[Aspect E12]
The said effect control means performs the timing effect from which the time which an effect requires differs by making the specific effect in a series of time-measurement effects different.

[Aspect E13]
The game machine characterized in that the production control means executes a time production having different time required for production when the working day is different based on the time measured by the time measuring stage.

[Aspect E14]
The production control means includes a first section in which the production content changes, a second section that is executed after the first section and the production content is fixed, and a production content that is executed after the second section. A gaming machine that executes a series of timed effects composed of at least a third section.

[Aspect E15]
The production control means is a first section in which the production content is fixed, a second section that is executed after the first section and the production content is changed, and a production content that is executed after the second section is fixed. A gaming machine that executes a series of timed effects composed of at least a third section.

[Aspect E16]
The effect control means executes a music effect that performs an effect by selecting one song from a plurality of songs that increase up to a predetermined number with the passage of time based on the time measured by the time measuring means, as the timing effect,
A gaming machine further comprising a privilege granting unit for granting a privilege when a predetermined number of pieces of music can be selected by the effect control unit.

  As mentioned above, although this invention was demonstrated based on the Example and the modification, Embodiment mentioned above is for making an understanding of this invention easy, and does not limit this invention. The present invention can be changed and improved without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and equivalents thereof are included in the present invention.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Game machine 108 ... Main liquid crystal display device (notification means)
1150 ... Production control unit (memory control means)
1154 ... RTC (time measuring means)
1155 ... FRAM (independent storage means)

Claims (2)

An external power supply dependent storage means dependent on the external power supply;
Independent storage means independent of the external power source;
A time measuring means capable of measuring the current time;
Storage control for storing, in the independent storage means, error occurrence information in which error information indicating an error in the gaming machine is associated with a time measured by the timing means and when the error occurs Means,
A gaming machine comprising: The gaming machine according to claim 1,
A gaming machine comprising a notifying means for notifying the error occurrence information stored by the storage control means.